Blessing or Curse? Weighing the Pros, Cons of OxyContin

By Sue Scheible; SUE SCHEIBLE

The stories have come from people of all ages and circumstances: parents who turned in their children to police, grandparents whose cancer medications were stolen, orthopedic patients unwittingly hooked on painkillers, teenagers snared in a lark that led to addiction.

The problem is OxyContin, a powerful, long-acting narcotic analgesic. A special state commission will soon make recommendations on increased controls. The focus is expected to be tighter prescribing practices, rather than a ban.

“Some of the stories break your heart,” said Hingham state Rep. Garrett Bradley, who serves on the commission. “It just is destroying lives.”

OxyContin, introduced in 1996, was initially described as a wonder drug for relieving pain in patients with cancer, severe back injuries and other chronic conditions.

“This medicine has been very helpful,” said Dr. James Everett of Weymouth, a cancer specialist affiliated with South Shore Hospital. “There are other shorter-acting pain drugs, but they have more side effects, including the potential for liver damage if given in excess dose.” OxyContin also is used in emergency care, primarily for patients who are already taking it. “It is a great drug for chronic pain, but there does need to be more control over it,” said Dr. Donald Hansen, chief of emergency services at Jordan Hospital in Plymouth.

Jordan’s emergency physicians have gotten occasional inappropriate requests for OxyContin by patients in the emergency department, but Hansen said abuse is not widespread.

Not long after the drug’s introduction, reports began accumulating of how the pills could be crushed and snorted or dissolved and injected for a fast, potent high – instead of the slow, time-released relief the medicine was designed to give. Illegal use led to addiction and heroin; the street price soared along with a wave of pharmacy holdups.

Many pharmacies now refuse to stock the drug, requiring at least 24-hour notice to order small quantities for specific customers. Cancer patients are fearful they will be followed home when they pick up their medications. They are told to keep it in a locked box. And federal and state lawmakers have proposed the drug be banned.

The state commission has conducted four hearings on OxyContin and other opium-based painkillers. The final hearing is at 10 a.m. Oct. 5 [Correction: 10 a.m. Oct. 4 in Gardner Auditorium] at the State House. By the end of October, the panel plans to make its recommendations on legislation.

“This drug does a lot of good, but we have to make sure it is getting to the people who really need it,” said Bradley, the Hingham representative. “There are other medications for acute pain.”

Last week, a truck with pharmaceutical drugs including OxyContin and other narcotics was stolen in Pembroke after the driver had made a delivery to a CVS Pharmacy.

Paul Nolan, deputy police chief in Milton, said he believes many of the bank robberies that have occurred on the South Shore in recent months have been related to OxyContin addiction.

“They should tighten up who they prescribe it for,” he said.

State Sen. Steven Tolman, who filed a bill to ban OxyContin, said he is “open to compromise,” but the rate of addiction is so high he believes the federal government should outlaw the drug.

“It is out there everywhere, and it should not be prescribed for knees, teeth, elbows,” he said.

A 48-year-old man who was prescribed OxyContin after knee replacement surgery said he developed a physical dependency without realizing it. He said he became severely depressed, a known side effect, when he tried to stop taking it and his doctor did not withdraw him correctly by lowering the dose gradually.

“The drug definitely did the job in relieving my pain, but no one warned me about how that stuff could affect me,” he said. “There was zero information and I ended up taking it too long, and in larger dosage, than I needed to, all because of a lack of direction.”

Duval’s Pharmacy in Whitman was held up in February by a masked man demanding OxyContin. It was owner John Duval’s first armed robbery in 40 years of practice. He has stopped stocking the medication. Patients can order it a day ahead and he will get small quantities for them.

“If people don’t pay attention to the fact they are running out, or if their doctor hasn’t given them another drug until this one comes in, they can run into a problem,” Duval said. The Massachusetts Pharmacists Association has no figures on how many pharmacists no longer stock OxyContin, but spokesman Carmelo Cinqueonce said, “They are trying to balance the needs of the patient with the threat of armed robbery.”

During the hearings, the state panel heard from oncologists, pain specialists, the American Cancer Society, and Roger Brown, pharmacist and clinical coordinator at Brockton Hospital. All urged that a balance be kept.

The Massachusetts Medical Society opposes any ban and supports the drug’s use under controlled medical conditions, with physician supervision, said spokesman Richard Gulla.

Rep. Bradley criticized OxyContin maker Purdue Pharma “for not informing the health care community of how powerful the drug was.” Attorney Tim Bannon, spokesman for the company, said the problem is broader than the abuse of one drug.

“There has never been any reliable data to suggest that OxyContin itself is the most abused prescription drug,” he said. Purdue Pharma supports education programs for doctors, patients and the public about prescription drug abuse in general, Bannon said. Bradley said the company waited too long to begin those programs.

Sue Scheible may be reached at [email protected].

Medical Surveillance

By Mutawe, Abdalla M

Key elements of an effective program for employees in Healthcare facilities

Abstract:

This article identifies the major elements of a medical surveillance program that can be used in healthcare facilities. Issues that can augment the program, such as preplacement examinations, medical screening and immunization programs, are addressed as well.

A COMPREHENSIVE SITE-SPECIFIC medical surveillance program for a healthcare facility helps to identify hazards, assign responsibilities, and establish and implement relevant protocols. Hazard identification can be achieved through job safety and health analyses, workplace surveys, incident reporting, and post-exposure evaluation and follow-up. Potential exposures to chemical, biological or physical agents must be anticipated, identified, evaluated and controlled. In addition to clinical examinations, and collection and analysis of employee health data concerning certain exposures-such as exposure to hazardous drugs-the program must address management commitment, hazard analysis and employee training found in safety and health programs in other industries.

A medical surveillance program is required by many OSHA standards, including those addressing bloodborne pathogens, ethylene oxide and formaldehyde. Also, a medical surveillance program may be required by consensus industry standards and industry practice regarding issues such as handling and administering hazardous drugs and occupational exposure to mycobacterium tuberculosis (TB).

Understanding the Risks

More than eight million people are employed in hospitals, nursing homes and other healthcare settings. These are dynamic workplaces where employees are potentially exposed to a broad spectrum of hazards unique to their work environments. Estimates suggest that 600,000 to 800,000 accidental percutaneous injuries (injuries from contaminated needles and other sharps) occur annually in healthcare facilities [NIOSH(a) 4-5]. On average, employees at a 100-bed facility may suffer 18 to 26 percutaneous injuries annually exposing employees to potential infection with bloodborne diseases (Perry, et al 32). Estimate suggest that 800 workers became infected with the hepatitis B virus (HBV) in 1995 [NIOSH(a) 4-5]. Additionally, many healthcare employees became infected on the job with the hepatitis C virus (HCV), which is the most common bloodborne pathogen in the U.S., with approximately four million of the general population infected [NIOSH(a) 4-5]. OSHA’s Bloodborne Pathogens standard was promulgated to protect employees from exposure to hazards caused by bloodborne pathogens in the workplace [OSHA(b)].

Commonly used chemical sterilants and disinfectants, such as ethylene oxide (29 CFR 1910.1047) and formaldehyde (29 CFR 1910.1048), are regulated by specific OSHA standards. The hazards from other substances such as antineoplastic agents and hazardous drugs are recognized by industry practice. Other hazards such as noise, ionizing and nonionizing radiation are also covered by OSHA standards.

Some OSHA standards and industry guidelines incorporate requirements for a medical surveillance program that encompasses medical and occupational history, physical examination, and laboratory and diagnostic procedures. Table 1 lists OSHA standards with medical surveillance requirements. The intent of the medical surveillance program is to detect any adverse effect or trend caused by the exposure to a hazard or a hazardous substance in order to apply necessary interventions. The program must also focus on early identification and treatment for employees.

Workplace Statistics

Table 2 shows that employees in nursing homes (SIC 805) and those in hospitals (SIC 806) had incidence rates for all occupational recordable injuries and illnesses exceeding that of private industry [BLS(a)]. The incidence rates with lost times for occupational injuries and illnesses are presented in Table 3; these rates also exceeded those of the private sector [BLS(a)]. Nearly half of the lost-worktime injuries were caused by overexertion that includes activities such as lifting and repositioning of patients. Many injuries are also caused by slips, trips and falls, contact with objects and exposure to harmful substances. Tables 4 and 5 list the incidence rates per 10,000 employees for the most common events contributing to job-related injuries in 2001 and 2002, respectively [BLS(b)].

When feasible, engineering controls such as biological safety cabinets are preferred to eliminate hazardous situations.

Elements of a Comprehensive Medical Surveillance Program

The structure of a medical surveillance program is similar to any other workplace safety and health program. It consists of policies and protocols that assign responsibilities and incorporate procedures which focus on prevention or early detection of adverse effects and application of appropriate interventions.

Management Commitment & Employee Involvement

Based on regulatory standards and industry practice, management’s policy must recognize the potential hazards and the need to protect employees through a systematic approach to preventing job-related injuries and illnesses, and giving exposed employees vaccinations, medical surveillance, and early diagnosis and treatment. Management must provide direction and motivation, and allocate adequate resources to administer the program and assign responsibilities for implementation.

Employee cooperation and involvement is vital to program success. New workers must be informed of the surveillance program during orientation. Employee input concerning program changes and impiementation can be gathered through participation in safety committees and periodic safety meetings. Employees must be encouraged to report exposure incidents and signs/symptoms of adverse effects to those responsible for administering the program.

Worksite Analysis

Hazard identification can be made by SH&E professionals through comprehensive safety and health surveys, job hazard analyses of procedures and equipment, periodic inspections, and accident and near-hit investigations. Protocols must be developed for reporting exposure incidents and providing postexposure evaluation and follow- up.

A workplace exposure incident is described in 29 CFR 1910.1030 (bloodborne pathogens) as a parenteral contact or other specific contact with human blood or other potentially infectious materials (OPIM) to nonintact skin, eye, mouth or other mucous membrane. The term OPIM includes semen, vaginal secretions, cerebrospinal fluid, synovial fluid, pleural fluid, pericardial fluid, peritoneal fluid, amniotic fluid, saliva in dental procedures, any body fluid that is visibly contaminated with blood, and all body fluids in situations in which differentiating between body fluids is difficult or impossible. All exposure incidents must be investigated to find causes and make recommendations to prevent recurrence. The log of work-related injuries and illnesses must be reviewed at least annually to determine rates and trends at the facility and to amend the surveillance program as necessary.

Hazard Prevention & Control

The goal of a medical surveillance program is to identify, evaluate and eliminate or mitigate health risks by eliminating or minimizing exposures. When feasible, engineering controls are preferred to eliminate hazardous situations. Engineering controls, such as biological safety cabinets, adequate ventilation and negative-pressure isolation rooms, must be periodically inspected and maintained. Other control methods, such as work practice controls, PPE and various administrative controls, can be used in cases where engineering controls are not feasible.

Table 1

OSHA Standards with Screening/Surveillance Requirements

Staff whose responsibilities are to administer the medical surveillance program must be familiar with the facility’s emergency response plan. They must participate in pre-emergency planning to anticipate and identify the need for decontamination, isolation, vaccinations and prophylaxis for exposed employees.

Safety & Health Training

Employees covered by the medical surveillance program and their immediate supervisors must receive safety and health training as required by a specific OSHA standard (e.g., bloodborne pathogens) or as required by a specific procedure, such as mixing and administering hazardous drugs. They must be informed and become familiar with the facility’s medical surveillance program.

Medical Protocols

Most healthcare facilities require a preplacement medical examination. Several specific OSHA standards apply where employees have occupational exposure to certain workplace hazards (e.g., bloodborne pathogens, ethylene oxide, formaldehyde). In addition, OSHA compliance directives and industry recommendations outline procedures for screening, medical examinations and medical management.

A medical protocol includes collection of information concerning the worker’s medical and occupational history. A physical exam must focus on signs and symptoms relevant to the workplace exposure and the target organ. Laboratory studies will be used to detect any changes or altered body function caused by the work-related event.

A coherent system must be made ava\ilable to track employees for the needed periodic screening and to ensure compliance with vaccination and return appointments. Appropriate software may be necessary for tracking employees’ vaccination and medical screening status. Immediate supervisors should encourage employees to participate and assist them in obtaining the required vaccines, periodic medical examinations when required, and post-exposure evaluation and follow-up schedule after an exposure incident.

Maintenance of Records

A confidential medical record must be maintained for employees for the duration of their employment plus 30 years after termination. Access to medical records must comply with 29 CFR 1910.1020, Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records, as well as with requirements of the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act.

Table 2

Incidence Rates for All Recordable Injuries & Illnesses*

Table 3

Incidence Rates for Occupational Injuries & Illnesses with Lost Workday*

Hazards in Healthcare Facilities Bloodborne Pathogens

Healthcare workers are at risk of exposure to bloodborne pathogens. OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1030 applies to occupational exposure to blood or other potentially infectious materials. Post-exposure evaluation and follow-up for HBV, HCV and HIV is required after an exposure incident. OSHA’s standard specifically states that HBV vaccination and post-exposure evaluation and follow-up are to be provided according to recommendations of the U.S. Public Health Service current at the time these evaluations and procedures take place.

After an exposure incident, employees must be evaluated for possible infection to HBV, HCV and HTV [CDC(c)]. The source person, if known, must be tested for infection with HBV, HCV and HIV if s/ he will consent to provide blood samples. If the source person is not infected with the bloodborne pathogens of concern, baseline testing or further follow-up of the exposed employee is not necessary. However, if the exposed employee requests to be tested, the employer must allow for the necessary blood tests [CDC(c)].

Vaccination & Post-Exposure Evaluation & Follow-Up for HBV

The risk of acquiring HBV from a needle injury contaminated with blood containing HBV, from a source that has tested positive for hepatitis B e antigen (HBeAG) and hepatitis B surface antigen (HBsAG), is 22 to 31 percent with serologic evidence (i.e., testing positive for HBsAG or HBeAG of 37 to 62 percent) [CDQc)]. HBsAG can be identified in serum as early as one to two weeks and as late as 11 to 12 weeks after an exposure incident. Many healthcare workers who became infected with HBV did not recall a percutaneous injury, although some have recalled caring for a patient who had HBV. Such a finding emphasizes the need for HBV vaccination of healthcare employees [CDC(C)].

The HBV vaccination (recombinant vaccine) consists of three doses. The first and second doses are given four weeks apart. The third dose is normally administered five months after the second dose [CDC(a)]. Although Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CEXZ) did not initially recommend a routine booster dose following the HBV vaccination, current recommendations require testing of employees who have patient care responsibilities or blood contact and are at risk for injuries from contaminated sharps [CDC(c)]. Such employees must be tested one to two months after completion of the vaccination series to determine whether they have developed immunity to hepatitis B.

Employees who are not immune (nonresponders) after receiving the first HBV vaccination series must be offered a second vaccination series. A blood test will be performed one to two months after completion of the second series to determine immune response. Employees who do not develop adequate immune response after the second vaccination series must then be informed that they are not immune to hepatitis B and that they are at higher risk of acquiring the disease. These employees must use PPE and report any exposure incident immediately so that they can be offered the necessary prophylaxis.

Employees with a documented adequate immune response following completion of the vaccination series do not need additional preventive treatment for hepatitis B after an exposure incident. The hepatitis B immune globulin (HBIG) and/or hepatitis B vaccination series is recommended for those with no or inadequate immune response after an occupational exposure incident. When indicated, HBIG must be administered as soon as possible (within one week) following an exposure incident. If two HBIG doses are required, the second dose must be administered approximately 30 days after the first dose.

Post-Exposure Evaluation & Follow-Up for HCV

The risk of acquiring HCV by a needlestick contaminated with blood from an HCV-positive source is 1.8 percent (range zero to seven percent) [CDC(c)]. The risk of transmission of HCV from contact with mucous membranes was not quantified, however, it is less likely to occur [CDC(c)].

After an occupational exposure to blood or OPIM from an HCV- positive source, and after obtaining consent from the exposed employee, testing for HCV is performed as follows: Immediately or as soon as possible, perform a baseline test for anti-HCV and alanine aminotransferase (ALT) activity. A follow-up test for anti-HCV and ALT activity can be performed approximately four to six months after exposure. However, if an earlier diagnosis is desired, the test can be performed at four to six weeks. All positive anti-HCV results must be confirmed by enzyme immunoassay usine supplemental anti-HCV testing.

No known vaccine is available for HCV. In addition, no PDA- approved prophylaxis (such as an antiviral agent) is available to prevent HCV infection. Use of immune globulin does not prevent the transmission of HCV. This emphasizes the need to implement appropriate engineering and work practice controls to prevent or minimize exposure to HCV.

Table 4

Incidence Rates for Nursing Homes & Hospitals, 2OO1*

Post-Exposure Evaluation & Follow-Up for HIV

The risk of acquiring HIV from a needlestick contaminated with HIV-positive blood is approximately 0.3 percent [CDC(c)]. The chance of acquiring HIV from an exposure involving mucous membrane (splash, spatter or spray) contact with HIV-positive blood is approximately 0.09 percent [CDC(C)].

Following an exposure incident and after obtaining consent, the exposed employee is tested for HIV immediately after the exposure incident (baseline), at six weeks, 12 weeks and six months, An additional test at 12 months after the exposure incident is only recommended under certain circumstances. An PDA-approved rapid HTV- antibody test kit can be used to test the exposure source.

Evaluation of the exposed employee must start immediately after an exposure incident. Employees must be evaluated for post-exposure prophylaxis (PEP). Information available about HIV infection indicates that there is a brief window of approximately 24 hours for the infection to develop at the site of inoculation. Initiation of antiretroviral PEP a few hours after the exposure incident might prevent or inhibit systemic HTV infection. Recommendation for the PEP is based on the severity of exposure and infection status of the exposure source.

Mycobacterium TB

Healthcare facilities are required to assess the risk for transmission of mycobacterium TB at the facility [CDQa)]. Based on this assessment, a Mantoux test should be made available-upon initial assignment (baseline)-to all employees working in areas that pose potential exposure to mycobacterium TB. This skin test consists of 0.1 ml of purified protein derivative (PPD). The frequency of the PPD test is based on the risk assessment results. Often, facilities admitting fewer than six TB patients in the preceding year are classified as low risk and normally an annual PPD test is sufficient [CDQa) 1O].

For new employees with a negative PPD skin test and with no documented negative PPD test for the preceding 12 months, a second PPD skin test should be offered within one to three weeks following the first test. This two-step test is necessary to confirm the presence or absence of previous TB infection. Employees with positive skin test results must be evaluated for TB. Chest X-ray and acid-fast bacilli (AFB) sputum testing may be necessary to rule out active TB for employees with symptoms resembling those associated with the disease. In addition, employees with positive PPD test reaction (latent TB infection) must be evaluated for preventive therapy.

Table 5

Incidence Rates for Nursing Homes & Hospitals, 2OO2*

Unprotected exposure/contact with a patient who has active TB must be investigated. A PPD test must be administered to exposed employees as soon as possible after the exposure. If the test is negative, a second test is administered 12 weeks after the exposure was terminated.

Hazardous Drugs

NIOSH defines hazardous drugs as those having one or more of the following characteristics:

1) carcinogenicity;

2) teratogenicity or other developmental toxicity;

3) reproductive toxicity in humans;

4) organ toxicity at low doses in humans or animals;

5) genotoxicity;

6) structure and toxicity profiles of new drugs, which mimic existing drugs determined to be hazardous by the above criteria [NIOSH(b) 18-19].

Hazardous drugs include antineoplastics and chemotherapy drugs that meet NIOSH’s definition. A medical surveillance program must cover all employees with potential exposure to these drugs. These employees include pharmacists, nurses, physicians and housekeeping staff.

All employees should be afforded a baseline medical examination that includes history, physical and diagnostic laboratory testing [OSHA(b)]. The frequency of the periodic medical examination is based on the employee’s exposure history and must consider the type of hazardous drugs handled by the employee; average hours of daily exposure; PPE used by the employee; type ofengineering controls; and any unusual circumstances such as spills and clean-up operations. The medical exam can be conducted annually or every two or three years as deemed necessary by the healthcare provider.

A comprehensive physical exam with emphasis on the target organs that may be affected by the hazardous drugs must be made available to exposed employees. It must consider the reproductive system and any history of malignancy. Signs and symptoms presented by the employee should be evaluated and compared to those likely caused by exposure to hazardous drugs (McDiarrnid).

Preplacement and periodic medical exams may include a complete blood count with differential and a reticulocyte count. They may also include tests to determine liver and kidney function; urine test to determine damage to the kidneys or bladder; and any other laboratory tests necessary for the comprehensive medical evaluation.

OSHA Subpart Z: Toxic & Hazardous Substances

sections of this subpart may apply to healthcare facilities if employees are exposed to the air contaminants. Ethylene oxide and formaldehyde are the most commonly used chemicals at these facilities.

Ethylene Oxide

Ethylene oxide is usually used as a sterilant for surgical equipment and other medical supplies. OSHA’s standard for ethylene oxide [29 CFR 1910.1047 Paragraph (f)(2)(i)] requires a written compliance program to reduce employee exposure to or below the permissible exposure limit (PEL) of 1 ppm and the excursion limit (5 ppm). When required, the written program must be updated at least annually. Employees with exposure exceeding the action level (0.5 ppm) for 30 days or more in one year must be afforded a medical surveillance program. This program consists of initial and periodic medical examinations including medical and work history, physical examination and laboratory studies.

The medical and work history and the physical exam will evaluate any adverse effects to the eyes and skin, and to the pulmonary, hematologie, neurologic and reproductive systems. To evaluate an employee’s ability to wear a respirator, the physical examination should include evaluation of cardiovascular function, a chest X-ray and a pulmonary function test.

Formaldehyde

In healthcare facilities, formaldehyde is used as a formalin solution to fix and preserve tissues such as in biopsy specimens. Other applications may include use in specific laboratory procedures and disinfection of hemodialysis machines. The OSHA standard for formaldehyde is 29 CFR 1910.1048.

A formaldehyde hazard communication program must be implemented. In addition, a medical surveillance program must be made available for employees exposed to formaldehyde at concentrations exceeding the action level (0.5 ppm) or the short-term exposure limit (STEL) of 2 ppm. The program consists of a medical disease questionnaire and, if necessary, a medical examination at the time of the initial assignment (baseline) and at least annually thereafter for those employees with exposure above the action level or STEL. In addition, the medical disease questionnaire must be made available to employees with signs and symptoms associated with overexposure to formaldehyde. Medical exams should also be made available to employees determined to need them based on information in the medical disease questionnaire.

The physical examination will evaluate any irritation or sensitization to the skin and the respiratory system. The examination will also include an evaluation for any irritation to the eyes. Employees who are required to wear a respirator must be afforded a baseline and an annual pulmonary function test.

Physical Agents

Exposure to noise, ionizing and nonionizing radiation must be considered in the medical surveillance program as well. Employees at a heliport, laundry facility, landscaping and other support facilities such as woodworking and metal fabrication and maintenance shops are often exposed to noise levels at or above 85 decibels measured on the A scale, for eighthour time-weighted average, which requires immediate implementation of a hearing conservation program. An effective program would include noise monitoring, annual audiometric testing and annual employee training.

Employees exposed to ionizing radiation must be provided with personal monitoring equipment to monitor their exposure dose. Employees must be informed of the radioactive material or radiation in their work area, safety instructions and devices to minimize exposure.

A medical surveillance program for employees exposed to laser beams may include a preplacement physical examination that includes medical and occupational history (ANSI/LIA). This exam and any periodic medical examinations must focus on an employee’s ocular condition. The eye examination may include any past eye injuries or diseases.

Other Employee Safety-Related Issues

Safety of employees at Healthcare facilities is an ongoing challenge because of the many new and existing infectious diseases, such as antibiotic-resistant bacteria, severe acute respiratory syndrome and bioterrorism agents, such as anthrax and smallpox. Medical surveillance programs complement engineering and work practice controls and PPE. Clear policies must be established and implemented to encourage employees to report any signs and symptoms of work-related illness. Procedures must also cover postexposure evaluation and follow-up, treatment and isolation precautions for the affected employee.

Conclusion

A comprehensive medical surveillance program is essential for protecting employees in a healthcare facility. It allows for early detection of any changes in employees’ health status relevant to occupational exposure and helps administrators implement the necessary interventions to prevent a serious occupational illness. It is augmented with other prevention methods such as workplace vaccination and post-exposure evaluation and follow-up procedures.

Defining Medical Surveillance

Medical surveillance is the analysis of health information to identify problems that may be occurring in the workplace that require targeted prevention. Surveillance serves as a feedback loop to the employer. Surveillance may be based on a single case or sentinel event, but more typically uses screening results from the group of employees being evaluated to look for abnormal trends in health status. Surveillance can also be conducted on a single employee over time. Review of group results helps to identify potential problem areas and the effectiveness of existing worksite preventive strategies.

The views presented in this article are those of the authors and do not necessarily reflect the policy or views of OSHA.

References

ANSI/UA. American National Standard for Safe Use of Lasers. Z136.1-2000. Orlando, FL: Laser Institute of America, 2000.

Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLSXa). “Workplace Injuries and Illnesses: Incidence Rates of Nonfatal Occupational Injuries and Illnesses by Selected Industries and case Types, 1996-2002.” Washington, DC: U.S. Dept. of Labor, BLS, 2003.

BLS(b). “Workplace Injuries and Illnesses: Incidence Rates for Nonfatal Occupational Injuries Involving Days Away from Work per 10,000 Full-Time Workers by Industry and Selected Events or Exposures Leading to Injury or Illness.” Washington, DC: U.S. Dept. of Labor, BLS, 2001,2002.

Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC)(a). “Guidelines for Preventing the Transmission of Mycobacterium Tuberculosis in Healthcare Facilities.” Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report. Oct. 28,1994: 8-49.

CDC(b). “Immunization of Healthcare Workers.” Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report. Dec. 26,1997:3-4.

CDC(c). “Updated U.S. Public Health Service Guidelines for the Management of Occupational Exposures to HBV, HCV and HIV, and Recommendations for Post-Exposure Prophylaxis.” Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report. June 29,2001:1-32.

McDiarmid, M. “Medical Surveillance for Antineoplastic Drug Handlers.” American Journal of Hospital Pharmacy. May 1990: 1062- 1064.

NIOSH(a). Preventing Needlestick Injuries in Health Care Settings. NIOSH Publication No. 2000-108. Washington, DC: U.S. Dept. of Health and Human Services, CDC, NIOSH, Nov. 1999.

NIOSH(b). Preventing Occupational Exposure to Antineoplastic and other Hazardous Drugs in Healthcare Settings. NIOSH Publication No. 2004-102. Washington, DC: U.S. Dept. of Health and Human Services, CDC, NIOSH, 2004.

OSHA(a). “Controlling Occupational Exposure to Hazardous Drugs.” section VI, Chapter 2. Technical Manual. Washington, DC: U.S. Dept. of Labor, OSHA, 1999.

OSHA(b). Occupational Exposure to Bloodborne Pathogens. 29 CFR 1910.1030. Washington, DC: U.S. Dept. of Labor, OSHA, 1991.

Perry, J., et al. “2001 Percutaneous Injury Rates.” Advances in Exposure Prevention. 6(2003): 32.

Abdalla M. Mutawe, RN, P.E., CSP, CIH, is regional safety engineer for technical support in OSHA’s Region X Office, Seattle. A compliance officer since 1985, he is the regional office coordinator for hazard communication, bloodborne pathogens, tuberculosis, nursing homes, process safety management and machine guarding. Mutawe holds a B.S. in Chemical Engineering and an M.S. in Industrial Hygiene, both from the University of Oklahoma.

Copyright American Society of Safety Engineers Oct 2005

Ice Age Survivors

By Hore, Phil

Phil Hore traces the ancestry of big cats, elephants, rhinos, possums, kangaroos and echidnas across several ice ages and continents.

The “woolly” rhinoceros was covered in thick hair as an adaptation to living in a cold climate. This large mammal coexisted with the woolly mammoth Mammuthus primigenius, mainly in Asia and later in Europe. Its forebears lived in China. The woolly rhinoceros roamed about alone or in small family groups like present-day African rhinoceroses. Like the mammoth it died out when the climate became warm. DNA from an extinct woolly rhinoceros shows that it is the modern Sumatran rhino’s closest relative.

During the past 50 million years or so our planet has endured a number of ice ages, with some far more extreme and severe than others. During these times, many of our modern animal species, or relatives of modern species, migrated between continents as more and more of the world’s water became trapped in the ever-growing ice sheets.

This sudden drop in ocean levels up to an astonishing 70 metres in some areas – allowed remote groups of animals to merge and mingle for the first time. Even on some of the more secluded islands, animals that had been isolated for millions of years could unexpectedly enter new areas by walking across newly formed land bridges or wading across a shallow stretch of water.

This permitted many “new world” groups in North and South America to start mingling with “old world” ones in Africa and Eurasia, and explains why these continents today share species like cats, dogs, pigs and deer.

Eventually the ice sheets covering the northern hemisphere retreated, causing ocean levels to rise once more, covering the land bridges and separating these animals again. Over the following centuries, many of these pioneer species fell extinct in their traditional homelands yet managed to hold on in their new habitats.

An example of this are early horses that first evolved 60 million years ago in most of the northern hemisphere and then fell extinct everywhere except North America, where the modern horse (Equus) emerged some 35 million years ago. When an early Oligocne ice age began 30 million years ago (mya), ocean levels dropped and horses began spreading across the Bering land bridge that spanned today’s Bering Sea between Asia and Alaska. This enabled them to radiate into Asia, Europe and Africa again. In due course, however, the horse became extinct in America yet managed to hold fast in their new homelands.

The oddity is that when Europeans entered North America they came face to face with Indians on horseback! If America’s horses had become extinct, where did these horses come from?

The movie The Ghost and the Darkness is based on the true tale of two male lions that killed more than 130 people in a 9-month period during 1898 at a place called Tsavo in Kenya. As good as the movie was, it unfortunately got one major fact wrong by having the protagonists played by two large maned lions.

Male Tsavo lions are maneless. They’re also larger than most African male lions and have a proportionally smaller skull. The fossil record and cave paintings throughout Europe inform us that male lions with small skulls and no manes are cave lions (Panthera atrox)’. Could it be that cave lions like the one pictured above have managed to survive in isolated Tsavo, deep within Africa? As wild as this sounds, the possibility has sent several zoologists into Tsavo to find out if this could be true.

Remarkably, the horse had been reintroduced into the Americas some 200 years earlier when the Spanish conquistadors invaded South America and unwittingly re-established the species.

But this isn’t the only example of an old world species that actually originated in the new world. Camels, rhinos, wolves (indeed all canines) and even the cheetah evolved in North America, only to trek into Eurasia and Africa when the Bering land bridge formed. Out of all these species only wolves (the canines) can still be found in North America. All otheis are now extinct in their original homeland – except perhaps for one!

The cheetah’s (Arinonyx jubatus) fossil record in North America goes back over three million years to two large cats called Miracinonyx inexpectatus and M. trumani. Both were larger than the modem African cheetah and the now extinct European one (Roman circuses accounted for the extinction of most larger European species, including bears, lions and even a dwarf elephant from the Mediterranean). These American cats had the narrow bodies, elongated limbs, short faces and reduced whiskers of modern cheetahs yet were more primitive as they could retract their claws (unlike cheetahs, which are extremely specialised).

Cheetahs crossed into Asia when the Bering land bridge appeared, eventually reaching as far as southern Africa When the land bridge closed, these cheetahs were left stranded. It’s believed that the original population then died out in America while the small populations left in places like Iran (where there are still around 100 alive today) and most of Africa became ever more inbred due to the lack of a stable population base.

But did the American cheetah die out, or did it change its spots? Recent studies point to the latter being the case. The American lion, puma, cougar or mountain lion (Felisjoncolor) has the distinction of having the most names given to any animal ever! These are large cats with short faces, white underbellies and teardrop markings running down their noses. The kittens are often spotted like a cheetah. The puma also has absolutely no fossil record past three million years ago – the earliest is a cat called Viretailurus schaubi. In fact, the only cat that could possibly be its ancestor is the similar-sized Miracinonyx. It’s also worth noting that there is no cat outside of America of the right age that could be its ancestor either.

Biological studies of pumas also strongly support this close relationship, so it seems the American cheetah may well have escaped the ice age extinctions, albeit in a larger form and hidden under a tawny coat.

For years anatomists have noticed similarities between the Asian elephant (Elephas maximus) and a European mammoth species (Mammuthus primigenius). Both have large heads with prominent bumps along the crest of their skulls. They also have high shoulders and a spine that slopes down from their large front legs to their short back ones. Asian elephants are also quite hairy, especially when they are young.

Now tests on woolly mammoth DNA have shown a close tie between the two – more so than with the African elephant (Loxodonta africana). It seems M. primigenus may have managed to slip into the 21st century as one of the only two species of elephants alive today. However, the scientists who managed to code this DNA warn that it is still reasonably fragmented and there could indeed be some differences between the two that they either haven’t seen or found yet.

The mammoth is not the only shaggy animal to survive. Other than perhaps the horse, rhinos have been one of the great mammalian success stories over the past 40 million years. These beasts managed to leave America and spread all the way to Africa, where they solely remain – or so many think!

Asia actually has three rhinoceros species with the largest in India (Rhinoceros unicornis), a second in Java (Rhinoceros sundaicus) and the third in Sumatra (Dicerorhimis sumatrensis). DNA from an extinct woolly rhinoceros (Coelodonta antiquitatis) shows that it is the Sumatran rhino’s closest relative. Calculations suggest the two diverged 20 mya when Sumatra was joined to Asia through land bridges as a result of low sea levels (Sumatra was actually part of Gondwana, just like Papua New Guinea and Australia). Although there are less then 300 left today, the Sumatran rhino looks like it is straight out of times past. They are large and often covered with thick, dense brown/reddish hair. They also have “formed” toes rather than the padded hoofs of modern rhinos.

Scientist examining carcass of baby mammoth. Tests on woolly mammoth DNA has shown a close tie with Asian elephants.

With only 300 left, the Sumatran rhino will join its long-dead relative in extinction within a generation unless radical action is taken immediately. A sad end to a long-time survivor!

Most of the examples of ice age survivors discussed above are still being argued about and should be considered “possible” survivors. There are, however, more “definite” ones than these. Ice age animals still roam in some of the colder regions of the north!

The musk ox (Ovibos moschatus) looks like a robust, shaggy cow but is instead the world’s largest goat. It’s a true ice age survivor that is so well-protected against the cold that it runs the chance of overheating if it exerts itself too much, even during the coldest winter. This is thanks to the extremely fine wool that makes up its thick coat, which is eight times warmer then sheep’s wool. In fact, the amazing properties of this wool has people scrambling to protect them – musk ox were all but extinct in Canada until some far- sighted farmers caught the few that were left and started breeding them.

Musk ox may well be one of the more intelligent animals on the planet as well. They are highly protective and caring of each other and have shown great problem-solving abilities and a talent for learning new things, including unlocki\ng gates and escaping!

Occupying the same region as the musk ox is the bizarrelooking Saiger antelope (Saiga tatarica), which is so ancient it seems to fit somewhere between true antelopes and sheep. To retain heat, the Saiger has a gigantic bulbous nose that traps and holds the heat from its breath when it exhales. The Saiger also faces extinction now as starving farmers in places like Russia and Mongolia are unmercifully poaching them.

Pangolins (Manis gigantea) are a group of armoured mammals found in both Asia and Africa and are often misidentified as part of the family Edentata, which includes antealers. In fact, these odd creatures belong to the family Xenarthra, making their closest living relative the sloth. Although it is no longer found around Germany, these animal oddities first evolved there. The fact that they eat ants (or termites) and have armoured bodies like armadillos is a matter of convergent evolution. To put it simply, they look like an anteater because they eat ants! Pangolins are rare today, yet who can look at their scaly body and not see images of the armoured giants that once roamed our world?

One of the more unusual survivors Ls a living creature whose behaviour and physical attributes are a “carry-over” from this unusual time. The pronghom antelope (Antilorapm Americana) from North America is celebrated as one of the fastest animals alive today. It can run at 95 km/h for as far as 15 km. But why would an animal devote so much energy to speed when there’s no predator alive that even comes dose to it in the Americas?

Alive today there isn’t, but the pronghom evolved in an ancient savannah that was patrolled by the American cheetah, an animal more than capable of catching a pronghom in full Sight – if it could get close enough.

This is where the second of the pronghom’s special features comes in to play, as it possesses the best vision of any mammal alive or dead. It can pick up movement as far as 5 km away. Its eyes are located high on its head, helping it to keep watch while its head is down during feeding -just the thing you need to spot a pesky cheetah trying to move within sprinting range.

Two unusual survivors aren’t animals at all but plants, one of which is so common that you may have eaten one in the past week or so. The avocado (Persea Americana) is a South American fruit that has survived until modem times thanks to the intervention of humans and fanning. The seed inside the avocado fruit is gigantic and needs to be swallowed and excreted for it to germinate in the wild. However, no modern herbivore in South America can swallow such a seed without choking to death.

This may be the case today, but 10,000 years ago South America had some of the largest mammalian herbivores ever, including the enormous ground sloth (Megatherium americanutn), which could grow as tall as two stories. Coprolites (fossilised poo) reveal that these sloths ate everything in their region, including the humble avocado.

Here is a classic case of parallel evolution, where two organisms evolved alongside each other in a symbiotic relationship. The loss of one almost caused the extinction of the other.

Likewise the osage orange tree (Madum pomtfera), which is found on the North American plains, also yields gigantic fruits that were once eaten (and similarly distributed) by the American sloth and mammoth – some of the only herbivores at the time that could manage the tough-skinned fruit

Luckily both the avocado and the osage live for a long time, and both managed to survive just long enough for humans to unwittingly save them. In the case of the avocado it was farmers cultivating them for their fruit, while the osage was saved by the reintroduction of the horse by the conquistadors.

Australasia also has its out-of-place survivors thanks to the bizarre geological connections in the area The closest and most obvious are the bonds that tie Papua New Guinea (PNG) and ancient Australia together. Both islands share several animals including cassowaries, possums, kangaroos and even dingoes (in PNG they are called singing dogs).

One of the most “obviously” Australian animals is the echidna – more precisely the short-beaked echidna (Tachyglossus acuieatus). PNG not only shares the short-beaked echidna with Australia but also has a dwindling population of the larger and less spiky long-beaked echidna (Zaglasssus bruijni). This rarely-seen monotreme is one of the last survivors of a time when both regions were populated by the megafauna

The modern Tbchyglossus is physically very similar to the giant echidna (MegalibgirUia rainsayi) that lived in Australia 20,000 years ago. It may well be a dwarf species that shrunk to the smaller environment of PNG to survive (a process also seen in the recently described dwarf human species from Indonesia called hotnofloresiensis).

As remarkable as the relationship between Australia and PNG is, another island hidden away in the Indonesian archipelago is truly an ark from the last ice age. Called Sulawesi, this small island is home to dozens of amazing species that are completely out of place in our modem world The island has had few predators over the past 50 million years and has managed to keep many species that have long since disappeared from the rest of the world. Early explorers of the area, like Alfred Russel Wallace, noticed the uniqueness of the area’s flora and fauna and drew a line through the region called “Wallace’s line”. On one side of this invisible divide you’d find Asian and European animals while on the other side are native Australian and Pacific species.

The clouded leopard has the longest canines of any living cat relative to its body size. These long teeth are reminiscent of the sabre-toothed tiger.

Recent geological surveys have shown that the islands along this part of Indonesia (like Sumatra) were once part of Gondwana, an ancient supercontinent that included most of the land masses that make up today’s continents of the southern hemisphere. Sulawesi is actually the most northern part of this group, so instead of being an Asian island it should be thought of as the most northern part of Australasia

Sulawesi’s ancient forests are home to “old world” primates like macaques and primitive tarsiers. Tarsiers are tiny – some weigh as little as 7 grams – and have massive eyes and incredibly manipulative hands. The fossil record for the group is poor but the remains that have been unearthed suggest they first appeared around 70 million years ago – around the time Tyrannosaurus rex was terrorising the planet.

But the wonders don’t stop there. Rummaging through the forest floor is the most primitive pig on the planet called babirusa (Babyrousa babyrussa) or deer pig. These are so archaic that the male’s upper canines grow up through the roof of their mouth and curl just in front of their eyes, giving them a demonic look.

For some time is was supposed their closest relative was a European pig that died out 35 million years ago, but new evidence suggests they’re actually closer to hippos then they are to any modern pig species. A miniature hippo relative, horned like a demon from hell, stuck on a tiny island in Indonesia? Who’d have thought?

But where Sulawesi becomes important to Australia is in its trees. This distant island is home to the largest and most primitive species of possum on the planet. Called the bear cuscus, this is a 10 kg possum with a bear-like face, front hands like a koala and a hairless prehensile tail. The fossil record tells us these cuscuses died out on mainland Australia millions of years ago, yet here on this island, thousands of kilometres away, the most primitive member of the family is still alive and doing reasonably well.

Sulawesi is truly a unique island that deserves a lot more attention then it’s been getting, especially since almost every one of its amazing animal species is close to extinction due to poaching.

Australia also has its own share of hidden treasures. Concealed away in Queensland’s dense rainforests is the smallest and most primitive of all kangaroos, the musky rat kangaroo (Hypsiprymnodon moschatus). At only 0.5 kg in weight, this tiny macropod still possess several features that reveal the close ties between kangaroos and possums. These include a long, prehensile tail, opposable digits and multiple births. Most of these features are important if you live in trees, which early kangaroos did.

There was also once a second group of kangaroos that roamed Australia called the Sthenurinae. These were far more robust then modern species, with shorter faces, powerful arms and stronger tails. Their extinction, however, seems to have been short-lived with the classification of the banded harewallaby as the only known surviving species of Sthenurinae. Unfortunately these tiny 3 kg wallabies have become extinct on mainland Australia, but luckily can still be found on several islands around Shark Bay in Western Australia where no predators (like cats and foxes) have been able to reach and wipe them out.

I find it incredible that almost every iconic animal from the ce age is still with us today – with the exception of maybe one. Sabre- tooth tigers (Smilodon) may be long dead and buried, but if you’re hoping they might still be hidden away in some distant jungle then I suggest you try something.

Research the planet’s rarest cat species – the clouded leopard (Neofelis nebulosa) from South-East Asia – and have a look at the size of its teeth! Smilodon may be extinct but there’s still a silhouette of this great carnivore staring out at us from the edge of a forest with a killer’s eye and an ancient smile.

Phil More is manager of the National Dinosaur Museum (www.nationaldinosaurmuseum.com.au).

Copyright Control Publications Pty Ltd Sep 2005

Cuba: Modern Health Care Harnesses Power of Herbal Remedies

By Patricia Grogg

GUANTANAMO, Cuba, Oct. 3, 2005 (IPS/GIN) — For a wide range of health problems from high blood pressure to asthma to the common cold, people are just as likely to turn to herbal remedies as to conventional drugs in this easternmost province of Cuba.

Garlic tincture, copal wood resin syrup and a compound known as Imefasma are the three most highly sought after “phytopharmaceuticals” or plant-based medicines produced by the state-run pharmaceutical industry in Guantanamo, located 1,000 kilometers southeast of Havana.

Imefasma is a bronchodilator made from a combination of banana stalks, aloe vera and a flower from the hibiscus family (Hibiscus elatus malvaceae) which many asthmatics have begun to use in place of prescription drugs.

“My grandson has been taking it for three years and he hasn’t had a single asthma attack in all this time. Not even one,” declared a woman waiting to be served at a dispensary in the city center.

Garlic tincture is also a highly popular natural remedy, used to treat high blood pressure and high blood cholesterol levels. It also has anti-inflammatory properties, noted Cristina Tabera, a pharmaceutical technician.

Although natural and traditional medicine has been incorporated into the mainstream public health care system throughout Cuba, the use of herbal remedies is particularly widespread in Guantanamo.

“My parents treated me with herbal remedies, and it wasn’t because we couldn’t afford other medicines. It’s a custom in our province,” Maria Miras San Jorge, director of the Guantanamo Pharmaceutical and Optical Enterprise, told IPS.

The state company she directs employs a total of 757 workers, including 631 women.

At the same time, however, some of the doctors interviewed by IPS warned of the potential risks posed by this practice, because some of the plants can be toxic in overly large doses.

“The danger is greater in the case of children. A lot of caution is needed when prescribing remedies for children under five,” said a pediatrician from the Guantanamo Hospital who asked to remain anonymous.

The province’s herbal medicine industry encompasses three laboratories and 26 dispensaries spread throughout 10 municipalities, seven of them in mountainous regions.

The raw materials for the laboratories are provided by a plantation devoted to cultivating medicinal plants. “In all, there are 141 workers employed in the production of these remedies, and this year’s projected output is 2.1 million units. And none of that will be surplus production, it will all be consumed right here in the province,” said Miras San Jorge.

The use of medicinal plants is a longstanding tradition in Cuba, passed down from generation to generation.

In the 1940s, Cuban botanist, agronomist and pharmacologist Juan Tomas Roig (1877-1971) identified 599 species used by the population for different medicinal purposes.

“I consider myself a disciple of Tomas Roig,” said Americo Delgado, who is famous throughout Guantanamo for his encyclopedic knowledge of the curative powers of hundreds of plants.

“Mother Earth has everything a human being needs, you just need to know where to look for it,” he added.

Delgado’s living room is set up like a clinic, where twice a week he attends to hundreds of “patients,” dispensing the medicinal plants he goes out to gather himself from the surrounding forests.

“The plants he recommends are very good. He cured my mother of an ulcer she had on her leg,” reported Maria Mercedes, who lives in the same neighborhood.

Delgado told IPS that he keeps scrupulous records of the people he sees, their medical problems, and the treatment he has prescribed to them. He stressed that his work is monitored by a Ministry of Public Health laboratory.

“Mr. Delgado has become a community leader in the use of medicinal plants for different health problems,” said Marlenis Cala Cala, the permanent representative of the federal Ministry of Science, Technology and the Environment on the Provincial Commission on Natural and Traditional Medicine.

Cala Cala admitted, however, that Delgado lacks the technology needed to ensure the maximum effectiveness of the services he provides. “We are cooperating with a development, innovation and technology transfer project aimed at fulfilling his dream of having a small laboratory,” she reported.

A CD-ROM on medicinal plants developed in Guantanamo offers information on the 74 species most commonly used in the mountainous regions of Cuba, and has been distributed to health care and higher education centers with access to digital technology.

Cala Cala told IPS that various projects are under way to protect and revive endangered plant species that are in high demand for the health care system, such as Java tea (Orthosiphon aristatus B), rue (Ruta graveolens L.) and rosemary (Rosmarinus officinalis L.).

The Cuban government program for the development of natural medicine, established in 1996, addresses a wide range of activities, including the training of medical personnel, scientific research and development, the production and distribution of herbal medicines, and the integration of natural medicine techniques into the mainstream health care system.

The country’s health care authorities have stressed that natural medicine should not be viewed as an alternative or complement to conventional Western medicine, but rather as an integral part of the treatment arsenal of all Cuban health professionals.

Bill Gates and Warren Buffett Talk With UNL Students About Much More Than Money

By Steve Jordon, Omaha World-Herald, Neb.

Oct. 3–LINCOLN — The world’s two richest men talked mostly about human values — personal relationships, leadership, pleasing customers –and less about dollars Friday in a rare Q & A session with University of Nebraska-Lincoln students.

Warren Buffett, chairman of Berkshire Hathaway Inc. of Omaha, and Bill Gates, chairman of Microsoft Corp., agreed on nearly everything, from the danger of nuclear terrorism to the unlimited potential of students to Buffett’s superior bridge-playing skills.

Both believe they and other wealthy people pay too little in income taxes in relation to average wage-earners. That their fortunes will go to help resolve global disparity. That true success is measured by the love of those around you, not by money.

Student Stefanie Tomkins asked how an individual could leave the world a better place and not be discouraged by the size of that task.

“You’re changing the world every day,” Buffett said, such as by the way you behave around other people.

Gates said true change takes a long time and requires broad experience. “A small number of people can actually make a very dramatic difference.”

The formal topic was ethics, and both said that the ethical character of a business starts at the top and filters through the organization. But they answered any questions the students posed, including one about how much cash they had in their billfolds.

Turns out Gates has an assistant who keeps his money, while Buffett had enough to get into a friendly poker game the two planned for later in the day.

About 1,700 people, nearly all of them business students who received tickets to the event, attended the 1 1/2-hour session at the Lied Center’s concert hall. The two held a similar session at the University of Washington in 1998, near Gates’ hometown of Seattle. Nebraska Educational Television will broadcast a program on the event sometime next year.

Gates and Buffett sat on stools with a table and Cokes between them, and about 50 of the students sat on risers on both sides of the stage.

The students on stage, selected by their professors to ask questions, drew numbers and stepped to microphones in order, with 27 getting to ask questions.

Buffett arrived early, wearing a red-and-white Nebraska athletic jacket over a red shirt and white pants. Gates was a bit late and wore a dark red Harvard sweat shirt, the university he famously abandoned to start up his software company.

Asked by student Tara Steinbach whether he would succeed Buffett at Berkshire, Gates said the job wouldn’t fit his expertise and that he is content to act as an adviser since he joined its board of directors in December.

“It won’t be me,” Gates said of Buffett’s successor.

The two said they have been friends since 1991, when Gates’ mother invited Buffett and the late Katharine Graham of the Washington Post to a gathering in Seattle and then called her son to attend.

“Mom, I’m busy,” Gates said he protested at first, figuring he didn’t know much about investing.

He eventually flew to the party in a helicopter, planning to leave after a few hours. Instead, he and Buffett began talking about their many common interests, and since then the two get together frequently, either in person or via the Internet.

At Friday’s event, Buffett took the leadership role, usually answering first or saying, “You take this one, Bill.”

The two friends have a 25-year age difference — Gates turns 50 this month, and Buffett turned 75 this summer — and while Gates is just starting to raise a family, Buffett is a great-grandfather.

Buffett got more laughs than Gates. As he took a drink of Coke — Berkshire is a big Coca-Cola shareholder — he urged students to drink lots of it. Actually, he said, “I don’t care whether you drink it. Just open the can.”

Nichole Brockhoft, a business administration major, asked what was the best advice they had ever received, and Buffett turned to Gates, saying, “What did I tell you that impressed you most?”

Gates said he once saw Buffett’s calendar and it was almost blank. That’s a good lesson on keeping control of your time and learning how to say no, Gates said.

“The truth is, I don’t get invited anyplace,” Buffett said.

Seriously, Buffett said, his father had told him that it’s more important to do well on your “inner scorecard” of personal success rather than the “outer scorecard” of exterior accomplishments.

Several times Buffett praised the work in education and health of the Gates Foundation, which already holds a large share of Gates’ $51 billion fortune. He said his own wealth, mostly $40 billion worth of Berkshire Hathaway stock, will go toward similar causes, applied “as intelligently as possible” by the Buffett Foundation’s board of directors.

Student Allison Mack asked what the two thought they would be doing 10 years from now.

“I’m doing what I love, and health will determine how long I do,” Buffett said. He said he has told his children to tell him when it’s time to stop working.

Gates said that in the coming years he expects to spend more time on philanthropy and less time on work at Microsoft. There, he spends most of his working hours in meetings, brainstorming new product ideas and reviewing progress of other projects. He takes two weeks of “think leave” away from daily business to ponder new ideas.

Buffett said he has 50 weeks a year of “think leave” and has almost no work schedule.

“I read a lot,” he said, and he spends a fair amount of time on the telephone.

Student Ryan Mendlik asked what habits young people should develop, and Gates said one habit to avoid is procrastination. His fellow students used to think it was fun to put things off until the last minute, Gates said, but that didn’t work in business.

Buffett recommended not cutting corners and doing more than your share. He said it’s important to “have the right heroes” as role models.

Student Christin Lovegrove asked how the two could raise children in a wealthy environment. Buffett said his children weren’t raised that way, since his home and lifestyle were no different from the average Omaha neighborhood.

Gates said it’s important to expose children to the realities of life, including poor areas outside the United States.

Some students said afterward that the session was enlightening.

Genevieve Truong, an accounting major from San Francisco, was on the stage but didn’t get to ask her question about private enterprise’s role in higher education. Tuition is rising rapidly and government seems to have other spending priorities, she said.

But Truong said she was pleased that the two men gave “very thoughtful answers,” especially Gates’ comment that to succeed in business you should develop three key abilities: to think strategically, to lead other people and to be a good individual performer.

“It’s something to focus on,” Truong said.

Mark Ketcham of Omaha, an actuarial science major, said he had expected Gates and Buffett to discuss mainly business. “They really care about global issues,” he said.

Tyler Kaps, an accounting major from Arcadia, Neb., said he was impressed with their recommendation to find an occupation you love rather than looking for the biggest paycheck. “I was surprised at how down-to-earth they are,” he said.

Many of the students picked up Dilly Bars provided by Dairy Queen, one of Berkshire’s subsidiaries, on the sidewalk after the talk.

Other Buffett-Gates observations:

–No corporation can ensure that all its employees act properly all the time, Buffett said. With 190,000 employees at Berkshire, “somebody’s always doing something wrong.”

–Recent tax cuts have benefited the wealthy, Buffett said. “Bill and I should have a much higher tax rate.” Gates said a rate as high as 40 percent or even 50 percent would be “not that bad” for very wealthy people. Buffett drew applause when he said, “There are people fighting in Iraq that are paying higher tax rates than mine.”

–Video games of the future will be more social, Gates said, allowing people to interact with each other and attracting more women and a wider range of age groups.

–Their biggest business mistakes have been deals they have missed. Gates said he miscalculated the direction of Internet search engines, and Buffett said he failed to invest at times when he knew he should. But both said they don’t dwell on past mistakes but rather move ahead to new things.

–Asked what super powers they would want, Buffett said he’d like to read faster and Gates said he would like the power to resolve the sorts of problems his foundation tackles.

–Buffett said that reading Benjamin Graham’s investment book, “The Intelligent Investor,” in college changed his life, but as a child he had read investment books at his father’s office.

–Gates said a key moment in his life was when his school, using the proceeds from a mothers’ rummage sale, bought a computer. He and a friend, Microsoft co-founder Paul Allen, became obsessed with finding out what the machine could do.

–Buffett said he makes most decisions without consulting others. Gates said he has a trusted circle of advisers.

—–

To see more of the Omaha World-Herald, or to subscribe to the newspaper, go to http://www.omaha.com.

Copyright (c) 2005, Omaha World-Herald, Neb.

Distributed by Knight Ridder/Tribune Business News.

For information on republishing this content, contact us at (800) 661-2511 (U.S.), (213) 237-4914 (worldwide), fax (213) 237-6515, or e-mail [email protected].

BRK, MSFT, KO, WPO,

Nursing Resource Teams can recruit and retain nurses

Hamilton, ON (October 4, 2005) — A new human resources management strategy could help create full-time jobs and attract nurses who might otherwise find it difficult to obtain full-time work, a McMaster University study says.

Over the past decade nurse staffing has been a challenge for hospitals. One response has been to use a nursing resource team, an innovative transformation of the float pool of the past. Resource teams consist of staff employed by the organization to cover vacancies and absences and to respond to increases in the numbers of patients or the seriousness of their conditions.

The McMaster study explored the nursing resource team (NRT) at Hamilton Health Sciences (HHS) from the first two years of its implementation, September 2002 until June 2004.

Researchers and clinicians from McMaster’s Nursing Health Services Research Unit (NHSRU) and HHS found that the NRT offered a competitive advantage for the organization through its ability to recruit, retain, and maximize the use of nurses during a time of shortage.

Prior to the establishment of the NRT, nursing human resources management had become problematic. Insufficient nursing capacity meant using agency nurses, sanctioning overtime, and leaving nursing teams short-staffed. Limited staffing capacity created stress for nursing staff who felt overworked and under-supported.

Resource management teams are usually managed centrally. Resource staff are managed and deployed by a central staffing office that assigns nurses to areas in need of personnel across the entire hospital. The difference between a traditional float pool and a modern resource team is the range of units to which an individual nurse can be assigned. In a traditional float pool, a nurse is regarded as a generic worker who is able to work with various patient populations and utilize many skill sets. In resource teams, however, nurses’ specialized skills are recognized and used. Nurses work in their area of clinical expertise and preference, developing in-depth knowledge of particular clinical populations.

The study, funded by the Nursing Secretariat of the Ontario Ministry of Health and Long-Term Care, found the NRT is also a vehicle for staff development and it provides excellent orientation and integrates nurses into the organization in a manner that recognizes their unique abilities and employment needs.

Dr. Andrea Baumann, Principle Co-Investigator and Co-director of NHSRU, says the NRT proved to be a more efficient means of providing appropriate staff coverage and has facilitated the discontinuation of agency use.

“The NRT supports the efficient allocation of staff and is considered to provide safer, more productive, and higher quality staff than agencies. The use of a nursing resource team provides a way for an organization and its employees to work together to benefit nurses and management, and ultimately improve patient care.”

The implementation of the resource team at HHS was considered a success by all study participants. In contrast to traditional float pools, resource teams recognize nursing expertise, create opportunities for full-time work, and provide nurses with opportunities for professional development.

The nursing resource team at Hamilton Health Sciences:

Provided a recruitment strategy offering full-time employment to new and experienced nurses internal and external to the organization.

Capitalized on nursing expertise by deploying members to clinical areas where they were competent to practice and could use their specialist skills and expertise.

Represented a “just-in-time approach” to clinical needs. It provided a flexible and adaptive mechanism for dealing with fluctuations in patient census, for covering nurse absenteeism, and reducing overtime.

Provided a pool of skilled nurses that could be recruited into specialist nursing areas as jobs become available.

Participants in the NRT study included nurses, business clerks, managers, and administrators. A total of 101 individuals took part through 24 interviews, nine focus groups, and direct observation. Front line nurses, comprising 23 NRT nurses and 20 unit-based charge nurses, were the largest group, representing 42.6 percent of the sample.

On the World Wide Web:

McMaster University

As prison labor rises, Brazilian unions fret

By Terry Wade

SAO PAULO, Brazil (Reuters) – In a dank workshop where the
din of pounding hammers bounces off cement walls, Rosangela
Oliveira, a convicted drug runner, screws locks together at a
factory inside the Tatuape Women’s Prison.

The 29-year-old mother of six is one of 42,000 prisoners
working in hundreds of jailhouse factories that Brazil’s most
populous state, Sao Paulo, has set up with private companies.

It hopes that giving inmates job skills will end a cycle of
poverty and crime that means six out every 10 released convicts
return to prison.

Unions, however, worry the state is killing off good jobs
by offering companies a way to avoid paying costly pension and
health benefits. Moving a job into a prison can cut costs in
half and erode job security in the formal labor market.

Prisoners, who usually earn a monthly minimum wage of 300
reais, say jobs keep them away from jailhouse violence and help
them support families on the outside. Still, they fear bias
against ex-convicts will prevent them from getting jobs after
leaving prison.

“We sell prison labor,” said Marcio Martinelli, director of
the state office for prisoner education and assistance.

A marketing executive from the private sector, Martinelli
was hired in March and wants to find jobs for nearly all the
state’s 117,000 convicts.

He tells companies that opening prison workshops is
socially responsible and can offer inmates, many of whom were
poorly educated in public schools, a path out of crime.

“The problem of the prisoner is a social one and if you
don’t employ him now, he will be out of jail tomorrow, and if
he isn’t employed when he leaves prison then we will return to
crime,” Martinelli said.

He has focused on finding skilled work for prisoners, like
furniture making and metalworking, instead of the traditional
prison job of sewing professional soccer balls.

Brazilian law has long guaranteed prisoners the option to
work and earn at least two-thirds the monthly minimum wage,
though most companies pay more than this. The state does not
receive any money from the companies.

But Sao Paulo, which houses more than a third of the
country’s inmates, is emphasizing jobs as part of a broader
restructuring of its penal system.

In 2002, it knocked down Carandiru, Latin America’s largest
prison, to end years of bloody revolts, including a police
massacre of 111 rioting prisoners in 1992.

Since closing Carandiru, the state has built dozens of
mini-prisons in small towns in its vast agricultural interior.
Jobs in the new prisons now threaten to alter local economies.

“Companies that use prison labor in a nasty way to cut
costs are engaging in unfair competition,” said Osvaldo
Ansarah, a lawyer for a statewide federation of metalworkers,
who traditionally have the best-paying manufacturing jobs.

“Companies should use prison labor only to complement their
work forces, not to replace them,” he added.

Some unions want a law passed to prevent companies from
having inmates make up more than a small proportion of their
workforce, say 10 percent.

When the state acts as broker for prison jobs lacking
benefits and safety protections it could hurt workers in the
rest of the labor market, they argue.

“We need to avoid outsourcing, informality and temporary
work,” Ansarah said.

Prison jobs in Sao Paulo have grown 35 percent over last
five years, a period in which Brazil’s economy was stagnant,
union power waned and U.S.-style outsourcing grew rapidly.

HUMANIZING CRIMINALS

Martinelli, of the state’s prisoner training office, said
he understands the concerns of unions but that building a
better society requires giving prisoners marketable skills.

Employers of prisoners say they are pleased with the
experiment. Shop floor supervisors say working alongside
prisoners allowed them to see inmates as people instead of
faceless criminals.

“We are pleased with the work. We’ve been here four years
and the tendency is to grow,” said Adelucio Sorce Marques, a
young supervisor at a prison workshop of LAO Industria, a
company which makes water meters, some of them for export.

“I’ve learned a lot from the women working here,” he said.

Still, Oliveira, the convicted drug trafficker who puts
together locks for the Alianca key company, fears that even
with new skills she will have a hard time finding a job.

“There’s a small chance I can get a job with this company
when I get out of jail, but there’s a lot of prejudice against
ex-cons and nobody will want to hire someone like me with a
tattoo on their neck,” she said.

US says Egypt vows to treat Guantanamo inmate well

By Will Dunham

WASHINGTON (Reuters) – The United States said on Monday it
received assurances from Egypt’s government that an Egyptian
man sent back from Guantanamo Bay would be treated humanely,
but rights activities feared he would be tortured.

The Pentagon disclosed over the weekend that the man,
identified by human rights lawyers as wheelchair-bound
49-year-old teacher Sami Al Laithi, had been sent to Egypt from
the prison for foreign terrorism suspects at the U.S. naval
base at Guantanamo Bay, Cuba. He had been held without charges
at Guantanamo for more than three years.

“The United States has made it clear that it does not
expel, return or extradite individuals to other countries where
it believes that it is more likely than not that they will be
tortured or subject to persecution,” said Cmdr. Flex Plexico, a
Pentagon spokesman.

“Prior to returning this detainee to Egypt, the United
States received appropriate assurances from the government of
Egypt regarding this detainee’s treatment upon his return to
Egypt. This includes assurances that this individual will
continue to be treated humanely, in accordance with Egyptian
and international legal obligations, while he remains in
Egypt,” Plexico said.

The New York-based Center for Constitutional Rights, which
represents numerous Guantanamo detainees and is affiliated with
his lawyer, criticized his return because of Egypt’s history of
human rights violations and state-sponsored torture.

The Pentagon said a tribunal cleared him of being an “enemy
combatant,” a designation given to Guantanamo prisoners rather
prisoner of war status, which confers a host of rights. This
paved the way for release.

‘HUMAN DIGNITY’

“You have someone who the United States has decided is no
longer an enemy combatant and is not dangerous, and we sent him
back to a country that regularly puts people in secret
detention and tortures them,” said lawyer Barbara Olshansky of
the Center for Constitutional Rights.

“I don’t understand our willing disregard for the sanctity
of human dignity that’s reflected in human rights.”

Court papers filed by his lawyers stated Al Laithi is
confined to a wheelchair as a result of a spinal injury caused
when Guantanamo personnel stomped on his back, fracturing two
vertebrae.

The Pentagon offered a different account.

“This individual’s current health problems resulted from an
injury sustained before our involvement with him. According to
the detainee’s statements to us, his injury was sustained in an
automobile accident, and the damage has progressed over time,”
Plexico said.

“There are no indications that his condition was adversely
affected by his detention.”

His lawyer Clive Stafford-Smith had filed a court motion to
prevent his transfer to Egypt based on the likelihood he would
be tortured or abused. The court turned this down, but
Stafford-Smith asked for the decision to be reconsidered, the
group said.

It added the U.S. government transferred him without prior
notice to his lawyers or the court. It was unclear when Al
Laithi arrived back in Egypt.

The court papers stated he left Egypt in 1986 to stay with
his sister in Pakistan and never returned after criticizing the
lack of political openness in Egypt. He said he was seized in
Pakistan 3-1/2 years ago before U.S. authorities took custody
of him.

Olshansky said her group has heard through his friends and
relatives that Al Laithi had been sent back into government
detention in Egypt.

The Pentagon said “approximately 505” men are being held at
Guantanamo. Rights activists have criticized indefinite
detentions of detainees. Court papers stated Al Laithi faced
“torturous interrogations” there.

Antibiotic Affects Some Children’s Teeth

CHICAGO — Treating infant ear infections with the common antibiotic amoxicillin doubles children’s risk they will suffer a problem later on with their permanent teeth, a study said on Monday.

The condition, dental fluorosis, results from exposure to excessive fluoride during teeth enamel formation. The effect on incisors and molars can range from barely noticeable white flecks to pits and brown stains — and may spell dental trouble later on in life.

Overall, 24 percent of study participants developed dental fluorosis, and use of the antibiotic between the age of three and six months doubled the risk of the condition.

“Duration of amoxicillin use was related to the number of early-erupting permanent teeth with fluorosis,” study author Liang Hong wrote in the current issue of the Archives of Pediatrics and Adolescent Medicine.

Hong, now at the University of Missouri, completed the study while at the University of Iowa in Iowa City.

In the study, 579 children were followed from birth to 32 months, and 91 percent used amoxicillin at least once — a sign of the antibiotic’s popularity and its potential impact on dental health.

“The findings suggest that amoxicillin use in infancy could carry some heretofore undocumented risk to the developing teeth,” the study said. “While the results of this one study do not warrant recommendations to cease use of amoxicillin early in life, they do further highlight the need to use antibiotics judiciously, particularly during infancy.”

Inviting Student Engagement With Questioning

By Caram, Chris A; Davis, Patsy B

Questions that stretch students’ minds, invite curiosity, provoke thinking, and instill a sense of wonder can keep students engaged.

Youth of today expect, actually demand, experiences that are action-packed, flashy, entertaining, and propel them into sensory overload. How can teachers capture students’ attention when they must compete with the drama of real life, cell phones and games, loud music, and action movies? How can classrooms mirror that excitement, engage students in learning objectives, and inspire them to advance their own learning?

Students actively engage in learning because they are intrinsically motivated by curiosity, interest, and enjoyment, or they want to achieve their own intellectual or personal goals (Brewster and Fager 2000). Learning that students view as purposeful creates for them an insatiable thirst for extending their knowledge. Successful student engagement requires a classroom culture that invites mutual inquiry, gives permission to investigate open-ended and suggestive questions (Levy 1996; VanTassel-Baska 2003), and casts the teacher as a deliberate facilitator.

If creating a culture of investigation is a key component to engaging students, then why is the questioning element of teaching “often either underdeveloped or unarticulated” (Hannel and Hannel 2005, 6)? Teacher preparation programs frequently do not include questioning techniques and engagement strategies in their training of preservice teachers. When considering the state of apathy and disinterest of students in today’s classrooms, school districts clearly should be preparing teachers through professional development in the philosophical belief and techniques of questioning and investigative learning. Arguably, an important skill for teachers is the ability to find problems to solve and formulate questions to answer.

What Successful Teachers Do

“Classrooms are powerful places. They can be dynamic settings that launch dreams and delight minds or arid places that diminish hope and deplete energy” (lntrator 2004, 20). The teacher is responsible for creating a culture that fosters motivation and engagement, and for inspiring and energizing student learning. While teachers have little control over many factors that contribute to a student’s interest in school and level of engagement, research has shown that teachers can influence student motivation, certain practices do work to increase task commitment, and methods exist to make learning more engaging and relevant for students at all levels (Anderman and Midgely 1998).

Effective use of questioning arouses curiosity, stimulates interest, and motivates students to seek new information. Students engaged in the questioning process benefit from the clarification of concepts, emergence of key points, and enhancement of problem- solving skills. Using questioning, teachers assess students’ knowledge, determine needs for focused reteaching, and encourage students to think at higher cognitive levels.

Teacher-Generated Questioning

Successful teachers engage students with questioning rather than using a stand-and-deliver method of teaching. Teacherinitiated questioning is a simple, yet strong method for exploring ideas and concepts. It is applicable in all courses and is an essential tool for teaching students to think. This teaching strategy is based on the practice of disciplined, rigorously purposeful dialogue between the students and teacher. According to questioning expert and educational consultant Lee Hannel (Hannel and Hannel 2005), teachers who ask the right questions kindle fires of critical thinking to create problem solvers. His research and subsequently developed strategies related to his Highly Effective Questioning method have demonstrated how cognitive student engagement results from teacher- generated questioning.

As claimed by Hannel and Hannel (1998, 7), student engagement “should not be optional…. Students come to school to learn, and when they are in school they do not have the right not to learn. Students are undertrained not underbrained.” Teachers should feel that it is incumbent on them to engage students, invite them to be curious, and help them quench their thirst for knowledge. Teachers must be committed to tap dance, if needed, to secure the interest of students.

Questioning is a highly effective strategy that has the potential to successfully engage students. Questioning a particular student about an aspect of a lesson prompts the attention of that student as well as most of the students in close proximity. The distribution of questions should include all students, yet be unpredictable so that students know that their attention is required.

To engage learners effectively with questions, teachers must foster a culture of investigation in which students are receptive to questioning-encouraged and willing to respond. Teachers can reinforce student efforts verbally and thereby sustain engagement.

Effective Strategies

Teacher-initiated questions enhance student learning by developing critical thinking skills, reinforcing student understanding, correcting student misunderstanding, providing feedback for students, and enlivening class discussion. Questions serve as a teaching tool by which instructors manage and direct learning, test student understanding, and diagnose problem areas. The skillful use of questioning can enhance learning and increase student performance. The following strategies lend insight into successful questioning.

1. Create a classroom culture open to dialogue. A positive expression, nod, or verbal acknowledgment of a correct response encourages students to participate in discussions. Pose questions in nonthreatening ways and receive answers in a supportive fashion. A harsh tone, especially when it interrupts a student’s response, can be devastating for both the student and his or her peers.

2. Use both preplanned and emerging questions. Preplanned questions are those prepared by the teacher to introduce new concepts, focus the discussion on certain items, steer the discussion in specific directions, or identify the level of student knowledge on the topic. Emerging questions derive from the discussion itself and the specific answers given to previous questions. Teachers need to go with the flow, using student responses to bring depth and breadth to the lesson.

3. Select an appropriate level of questions based on learners’ needs. Assess students’ needs and tailor questions to maximize the number of correct answers while moving toward increasingly difficult questions. One good strategy is to start with knowledge-level questions and graduate to open-ended questions-perhaps building from the recall of facts to higher levels of thinking and problem solving. If a question requiring a higher-level thinking skill confuses a student, pose a question requiring a different level of thinking. Progressing from simple questions to more difficult ones that require reasoning helps students develop cognitive abilities and critical thinking skills.

So much classroom learning has focused on the lower rungs of the thinking skills ladder-knowledge, comprehension, memorization, and understanding. To correct the imbalance in the types of thinking skills required by present classroom questioning techniques, teachers must focus on questions that generate higher-level thinking (Kagan 1999).

Teachers can use effective questioning to maximize learning if they remain cognizant of students’ thinking skill levels. Table 1 identifies categories of student thinking skills (Munk 2001 ), provides examples of trigger questions in each category, and gives key words that teachers can use when designing questions (Houghton 2003).

4. Avoid trick questions and those that require only a Yes or No response. Trick questions frustrate students and tend to encourage frivolous responses. Yes or No questions encourage students to respond without fully understanding or thinking through the issue.

5. Phrase questions carefully, concisely, and clearly. Using multiple questions that are related to the same topic, are phrased improperly, or cause overlapping responses may result in unintentional cueing and a teacher’s inability to accurately assess student understanding.

6. Address questions to the group or to individuals randomly. Pose the question to the entire group and wait before identifying a student to respond. The wait time encourages all students to think about the response, because they do not know who will be selected to answer. To keep everyone attentive and involved, select students at random to answer questions. Select both volunteers and others to answer questions. Occasionally calling on a student prior to asking the question is a technique that can be used to redirect an inattentive student.

7. Use sufficient wait time. Wait time is the amount of time an instructor waits for students to respond before giving the answer or posing another question. At least five to ten seconds are needed for students to think about and respond to the questions. Of course, questions at higher cognitive levels tend to require longer wait times. The teacher can enhance the analytic and problem-solving skills of students significantly by allowing sufficient wait times, both after posing a question and after the answer is given.

8. Re\spond to answers given by students. Listen carefully to the answers given by students; do not interrupt students while they are responding to questions unless they are straying far off course, are unfocused, or are being disruptive. Respond to correct answers with positive reinforcement. Sarcasm, reprimands, accusations, and personal attacks are ineffective and harmful. Repeat answers only when other students have not heard them; repeating wastes time. Keep questioning until the learning objectives for the session have been achieved; this may be the best opportunity to teach a particular concept. Handle incomplete answers by reinforcing what is correct and then asking probing questions. Probing questions require the student to think beyond the initial response; they direct, develop, or refocus the student’s response.

9. Deliberately frame questions to promote student interest. Questions should be sufficiently open to accommodate diverse interests and learning styles, and to allow for individual responses and creative approacheseven ones that the teacher has not considered. Consider that there may be multiple answers to many questions.

10. Use questions to identify learning objectives for follow-up self-study. Pose questions toward the end of the teaching session to identify specific areas for additional learning opportunities that students can pursue on their own to extend learning (Walsh 2004; Wiggins and McTighe 1998).

Student-Generated Questioning

Teachers who are successful in motivating and engaging students often establish the classroom practice of inviting student- generated questions. Student-initiated questions are a powerful force for encouraging creative dialogue. By engaging in student-led questioning, students are confronted with varied perspectives, are pushed to evaluate and articulate their own thinking beyond a level they could attain on their own, and actually influence and enhance the learning of others (Kagan 1999).

Table 1. Thinking Skills Model Categories, Trigger Questions, and Key Words

Student-generated questioning parallels inquiry-based learning. In both methods, students are encouraged to think, investigate, ask pertinent questions, and gather information. When students use these methods, they have more ownership in the learning process and become active participants, responsible for their own growth. Further, letting students lead generates a motivation that is distinctive.

As an additional benefit, when students question students to construct their own knowledge, they develop lifelong social skills and caring attitudes toward their peers. Interestingly, cooperation increases and competition decreases (Wiggins and McTighe 1998). Cognitive engagement is ensured in situations that involve students to this degree.

Gaston County Schools

Teachers in Gaston County, North Carolina, are expected to establish inviting classroom climates that promote active engagement, stimulate creative development, and maximize learning opportunities for all students through the infusion of effective questioning strategies. Through staff development provided district- wide, teachers and administrators at all grade levels (K-12) receive training in the integration of questioning skills to create powerful learning experiences. The training includes demonstration teaching and exploration of strategies that can elevate student performance in all academic areas.

The district encourages teachers to develop thinking classrooms that purposely give priority to teaching students in multiple ways, encouraging students to think about what they are learning, and helping students to transfer newly acquired skills into more complex content. Gaston County teachers use strategies that invite students into the learning situation, excite their curiosities, and entice them to investigate further. Rather than placing emphasis strictly on drill and practice, these teachers operate from a cognitive perspective, designing questions that stretch their students’ thinking and challenge their understanding. By asking appropriate, thoughtprovoking questions, these teachers are able to stimulate learning and engage students in learning experiences that emphasize the development of critical and creative thinking.

Closing Thoughts

Curricular concepts or objectives rarely lure students away from playing video games, watching television, or daydreaming. Though establishing and maintaining focus have much to do with the integrity of teaching and learning, they have little to do with the magic of the classroom. Much of the fine art of teaching comes in finding creative ways to deliver the standard required curriculum in ways that are irresistible to young minds (Tomlinson 2003).

Teaching is about designing, creating, and inventing intellectually challenging work for studentswork that engages students and is so compelling that students persist when they experience difficulty and feel satisfaction, indeed delight, when they successfully accomplish the challenge (Schlechty 1997). “More than any other thing, or at least more than any other thing that we have the power to control, good and engaging instruction is our best hope to unleash the learning potential of our students in this time of great educational change. If this change is to occur, it must be because of the engagement with students, not in spite of them” (Hannel and Hannel 2005, 7).

Engaging learners in questioning, both teacherdirected and student-initiated, impacts not just the type of thinking we develop in our students but also the depth of thought (Kagan 1999). Whether thinking skills are taught directly or integrated into the curriculum, the goal is to develop students who question, are critical thinkers, and are creative. Questions that stretch students’ minds-the kind that invite students’ curiosity, provoke thinking, and instill in students a sense of wonder-keep students engaged.

Progressing from simple questions to more difficult ones that require reasoning helps students develop cognitive abilities and critical thinking skills.

References

Anderman, L. H., with C. Midgely. 1998. Motivation and middle school students. Champaign, IL: ERIC Clearinghouse on Elementary and Early Childhood Education. ERIC ED 421 281.

Brewster, C., with J. Fager. 2000. Increasing student engagement and motivation: From time-on-task to homework. Portland, OR: Northwest Regional Educational Laboratory.

Hannel, C. L, and L. Hannel. 1998. The seven steps to critical thinking. NASSP Bulletin 82(598): 87-93.

Hannel, C. L, and L. Hannel. 2005. Highly effective questioning, 4th ed. Phoenix, AZ: Hannel Educational Consulting.

Houghton, R. S. 2003. Comparing thinking skills model-Adapted from Marzano. Available at: www.ceap.wcu.edu/HOUCHTON/Leamer/ Think94/NCmarzanoThink.html.

Intrator, S. M. 2004. The engaged classroom. Educational Leadership 62(1): 20-25.

Kagan, M. 1999. Higher-level thinking questions, book series. San Clemente, CA: Kagan Publishing.

Levy, S. 1996. Starting from scratch: One classroom builds its own curriculum. Portsmouth, NH: Heineman.

Munk, T. 2001. North Carolina thinking skills: An introduction. Chapel Hill, NC: Learn NC. Available at: www.learnnc.org/articles/ thinkingskills0403.

Schlechty, P. C. 1997. Inventing better schools: An action plan for educational reform. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.

Tomlinson, C. A. 2003. Fulfilling the promise of the differentiated classroom. Alexandria, VA: Association for Supervision and Curriculum Development.

VanTassel-Baska, J. 2003. Curriculum planning and instructional design for gifted learners. Denver: Love Publishing.

Walsh, J. 2004. Effective guestioning. Birmingham: University of Alabama at Birmingham. Available at: www.uab.edu/uasomume/cdm/ questioning.htm.

Wiggins, G., and J. McTighe. 1998. Understanding by design. Alexandria, VA: Association for Supervision and Curriculum Development.

Chris A. Caram is Deputy Superintendent in Gaston County Schools, North Carolina. Formerly, she was Associate Professor of Educational Leadership at the University of Arkansas at Little Rock. Her research interests include organizational culture, leadership, team building, and at-risk education.

Patsy B. Davis is Director of Academically Gifted Programs in Gaston County Schools. She received her graduate degree in Gifted Education from Belmont Abbey College in North Carolina. Her research interests include gifted education and talent development.

Copyright Kappa Delta Pi Fall 2005

FlexRadio Systems SDR-1000 HF+VHF Software Defined Radio Redux

By Lindquist, Rick

In product review terms it could become a serious challenge to keep up with the ever-evolving FlexRadio Systems SDR-1000-the first commercially available software defined Amateur Radio transceiver. This marks our second look at the SDR-1000. Must reading is our first snapshot, “SDR-1000 Software-Defined HF/VHF Transceiver,” by Steve Ford, WB8IMY, in the April 2005 QST “Product Review.” Steve noted some limitations and setup problems, and FlexRadio has addressed them. It now offers a fully integrated package including a PC to sidestep the problems of getting everything set up and configured to play together.

A Work in Progress

The improvements since our last look, involving both hardware and software, have been significant, and even more arrived or were in the offing as this review went to press-including another software increment. To avoid getting caught in an endless loop, we froze changes at PowerSDR software version 1.4.3.

The architects and developers of the current DSP code used in the PowerSDR software, Frank Brickie, AB2KT, and Bob McGwier, N4HY, worked closely during the development process with FlexRadio’s Gerald Youngblood, K5SDR, and Eric Wachsmann, KE5DTO. The FlexRadio Web site, www.flex-radio.com, includes all software downloads, the Operating Manual and any documentation you’d ever need. There’s also an excellent reflector and-at least so far-they’re able to keep up with user inquiries and troubleshooting issues.

With cutting-edge technology like this, it’s sure nice to know you’re not out there alone!

A Marriage of Convenience

With the SDR-1000, the union of Amateur Radio gear and the personal computer has transitioned to the point that a transceiver’s functions can reside in a virtual world we can’t really touch or see. With the advent of the SDR-1000, the physical radio box has become a “peripheral” in the genre of software-generated data. As Steve Ford’s earlier review noted, software defines this transceiver’s functionality, so each PowerSDR revision can, in effect, represent a new-or at least an improved or different- transceiver.

Download and install, and you’re there! The only thing you really need in the shack plus the SDR-1000, mic and key is a fast PC, and they now offer one.

The possibilities become almost limitless. There’s still that pesky radio hardware box, the PC and a sound card and perhaps an accessory or two to contend with. The physical components of what we might call the SDR-1000 “system” do impose some real restrictions on what the transceiver is capable of now or in the future. The open- source software can accommodate a wide range of upgrades that might otherwise only be possible through hardware or firmware upgrades. There are no DSP chips to become obsolete in the SDR-1000, for example.

“The Radio that Keeps Getting Better”

That’s what FlexRadio Systems calls its product, and the characterization is right on target. Since we first looked at the SDR-1000 earlier this year, its manufacturers wisely decided to market the full-blown transceiver in a form that’s as close as possible to a turnkey system. This way, you don’t require a software and RF engineering background to get up and running. The move also seems to have been an effort to appeal to a wide audience-to capitalize on the title of Gerald Youngblood’s series, “A Software Defined Radio for the Masses,” which won him the 2002 Doug DeMaw, W1FB, Technical Excellence Award. The articles appear in the July/ August and September/October 2002 issues of QEX and are available on their Web site.

For most, the SDR-1000 system will be only marginally more difficult to set up than the average PC with a printer and another accessory or two. It more likely will require more tinkering-and maybe some hand-holding from FlexRadio-to tweak the system to suit your needs. While the full complement of equipment fills a small table or desktop (see lead photo), in most stations most of the equipment can be beneath the desk.

In addition to the SDR-1000 “black box,” the SDR-1000 “packaged system” now can include a Dell PC with a professional-quality Delta 44 sound card installed and configured, a Delta 44 “break-out box” (see Figure 1) for audio I/O connections, computer speakers, cables and an accessory connector kit to interface with the SDR-1000 and a parallel control cable. The PC with our system had a Celeron 2.4 GHz processor and 512 MB of RAM, and the limitations of the Celeron versus an Intel Pentium 4 (P4) processor were noticeable, especially for CW. FlexRadio now offers the 3.2 GHz P4 computer (the Dell Optiplex 170L) for the SDR-1000 package. For now, the PowerSDR software will only run under Windows-in our case, XP Home with Service Pack 2.

Options include a Dell flat panel display (monitor)-a must unless you happen to have a spare sitting around, an automatic antenna tuning unit with tuning capability to 10:1 SWR, a low power Down East Microwave DEMI144-28FRS 2 meter transverter that can fit inside the black box, a Contour ShuttlePm 2 (see Figure 2) or Griffin PowerMate controller and a USBto-parallel port converter.

Hardware Upgrades

A few changes have been made in the black box since our initial outing. “We improved the Quadrature Sampling Detector (QSD) out-of- band rejection by adding two resistors to properly terminate the filters,” Youngblood explains. FlexRadio also swapped in an RF preamplifier with higher dynamic range.

The latter change could help to explain why the dynamic range numbers we measured with the preamplifier enabled were better on this version of the SDR-1000 than those taken with the preamp off. See Table 1. Note that the near-in third order IMD dynamic range is right up there with the best radios we’ve ever measured, and extends at least in to 2 kHz.

FlexRadio also corrected an anomaly noted in our original review- in which the box drew more current on 160 meters than on other HF bands-by changing the value of two resistors on the power amplifier.

The beauty part here is that all SDR-1000s, starting with the very first, can be upgraded to match the capabilities and performance of the latest unit off the line. In fact, our black box is the very same unit we used for the first QST review with upgrades added at FlexRadio. Youngblood says FlexRadio plans to offer similar upgrade service soon to existing SDR-1000 owners via a third party.

Getting Things Under Control

For all intents and purposes, you can control the radio using the PowerSDR “console”-which is what FlexRadio calls its user interface- the PC keyboard and a wheel mouse. Steve’s earlier review describes this.

Figure 1-The break-out box for the optional M-Audio Delta 44 professional sound card allows making the connections without crawling behind the PC.

Figure 2-The optional Shuttle-Pro controller.

The optional controllers are another way. Steve checked out the PowerMate for his review. We got the ShuttlePro 2 for this one. It’s more than just a knob to tune the radio. It also has 13 buttons (9 are user-programmable, and labels to go under the button caps are provided). FlexRadio provides an Excel document that describes the assignable functions, which you record like macros in other software packages. Using the ShuttlePro or the mouse-or both-may leave your keyboard collecting dust, although it’s handy for direct frequency entry and even for programming CW memories or a keyboard buffer.

Like the tuning knob on many conventional ham radio transceivers, the ShuttlePro’s has a dimple (actually three of them). It also has a spring-loaded “shuttle” ring surrounding the tuning knob that simplifies quick frequency excursions. Move it a little and the frequency changes more slowly. Crank it over all the way (either right or left), and the frequency may change too fast for you to keep up. Both controls can be assigned to other functions.

I found it a pretty handy accessory although it’s almost as easy to tune the radio using a wheel mouse. The ShuttlePro also requires some programming to assign the buttons. As an added bonus, however, it may be programmed for use with other applications by changing its “application” setting. This may be the only radio that can do your taxes when the band is dead!

CW Operation

As McGwier, a CW operator, told me, “This is definitely not a QSK radio.” That’s quite an understatement. As Steve Ford noted in his April review, CW operation was not yet the forte of the SDR-1000. It is now much closer to a serious CW radio-albeit only in semi-break- in mode. The processing power of the Celeron chip seemed to be a limiting factor in the case of our SDR-1000 system, and FlexRadio now recommends a P4 computer for high-speed CW operation. Intel P4 processors support a high-performance motherboard timer; the Celeron does not. CW operation is now far better than with the version described in the earlier review,.

The real issue is something called latency. This is essentially the time it takes for the PC to process a command once it’s been issued; for example, sensing that the key or paddle has been pressed, switching into transmit and telling the black box to generate the necessary RF. This takes a finite period of time- almost instantaneous in human terms but lengthy in computer terms. In hisreview Steve called it “maddening delay.”

Our PowerSDR version incorporates a “new keyer” design that, while it lacked some important features of the “old keyer,” makes it possible to transmit serious CW. I’ve been operating CW for many years now, and I found with a little practice I got to the point where I was able to send passable CW at a fairly good clip-on the order of 30 WPM or greater-once I got used to the delay. Setting the Delta 44’s buffer size to 512 (that is, 512 samples per audio buffer) while using the new keyer made key closure and the appearance of the corresponding sidetone in my headset very close to instantaneous. Although I could not altogether eliminate the delay, I was able to train my brain to work with it.

The “old keyer,” which the user “selects” by unchecking the NEW KEYER in the software, includes CW memories into which you can type text, plus the ability to send text from a keyboard buffer at speeds up to the keyer’s limit. If you’re so inclined, you can send CW using the left and right mouse buttons or by via the “.” and “/” characters on the keyboard.

On the plus side, the software keyer permits a wide range of adjustment in weighting, rise time and debouncing.

FlexRadio has developed a hardware workaround to make CW operation more like “normal,” although QSK operation is down the road. The workaround involves hard-wiring a keyer paddle to three pins on a serial port, but our software revision did not support this feature. For now, an external keyer is one option to obtain excellent CW results from the SDR-1000.

Listening on CW is superb. As Steve noted in his review, the radio’s ability to generate binaural audio (provided you have a stereo headset) gives the bands-on both CW and phone-a new presence. The software filtering is fantastic. You can click your choice of preset filters or shape your own. Being able to narrow the bandwidth to 25 Hz essentially obviated the need for a manual notch, but there is an automatic notch. You can readily switch from the lower side to the upper side of a signal.

When changing from one mode to another, the filter shifts to the setting selected the last time you were in the new mode. There are no default filter settings for a given mode. This offers a level of flexibility not found in many conventional radios, particularly those that depend on crystal filters.

There’s a passband shift slider, too (the SDR-1000’s version of an IF shift). Very helpful. Don’t like the default AGC settings? Set your own via the menu.

SSB Operation

SSB operation is a bit more routine, but, just as there’s no QSK for CW, the SDR-1000 doesn’t yet have provision for VOX (voice operated transmit). This is another feature on the wish list to the developers.

Nonetheless, I was able to easily interface my Heil ProSet Plus headset to the Delta 44 sound card’s break-out box, although it did require some adapters. For the microphone input, a readily available 3.5 mm to inch adapter plug into one input jack did the trick (it’s also possible to configure a four-pin microphone connector to the jack on the front panel of the black box). For stereo audio output, I jiggered up my own adapter using two mono plugs to a inch stereo jack.

Although the front-panel microphone input allows for push-to- talk, I was not able to hook up my Heil headset without going directly into the sound card-unless I wanted to devise my own adapter. Otherwise, you must either click the MOX (manually operated transmit) box on the console or hard wire some kind of foot (or hand) switch. If you’re using the ShuttlePro 2, you can program one of its buttons to enable MOX. Holding down the “dit” side of the keyer paddle also switches to transmit, I discovered.

Table 1

FlexRadio SDR-1000

Table 1

FlexRadio SDR-1000

The audio reports I received were uniformly positive. When I opened up the 12-octave graphic equalizer (see Figure 6) to further polish the transmit audio, the results invariably drew additional praise.

To improve transmitted audio efficiency, the SDR-1000 lets users set something called feed forward compression. Unlike the typical audio or RF level audio compressor, the feed-forward design anticipates the compression level required rather than, as the manual put it, “simply following the signal around.” Upping the value gives higher average power output without peaks, pumping or popping.

Additionally, version 1.4.3 of PowerSDR incorporates AGC leveling and a limiter to replace the clipper in earlier revisions. While you’re transmitting and using the panadaptor setting to view the received (see Figure 7) and transmitted signal, you can view your signal’s waveform, noting its overall bandwidth and its audio emphasis right there on the screen as shown in Figure 8. You can also view a signal histogram as shown in Figure 9.

While you can see your signal, listening to it by enabling the onboard monitor is not advisable, at least if you’re using a 2.4 GHz Celeron or lesser PC. Remember the latency issue? The same thing occurs in voice modes, so when you speak, it takes a few milliseconds for the audio to appear in your headset. This “echo box” effect can be very disconcerting. Again, this is a PC issue, not really a radio issue, per se; sometimes fiddling with buffer settings yields better results. Faster computers and superior processors will conquer these latency issues. It made us again wish we had selected the faster P4 machine.

Digital Mode Operation

The SDR-1000 does not include out-of-the-box, integrated capability to operate on digital modes-something on Steve’s wish list last April. FlexRadio says you should be able to use almost any soundcard-based digital application with the unit, but at this stage of development, you’ll need a second sound card.

In fact, the Dell PC already has one that’s not really being used. Since the Delta 44 handles the needs of the SDR-1000, the Dell sound card is available to serve digital-mode software. You’ll also need a third-party vCOM virtual serial port driver developed by Phil Covington, N8VB, to create a nocable-needed COM port for communication between the digital mode software and the PowerSDR software..

A virtual sound card that FlexSystems says is just around the bend will eliminate the need for a “real” (second) sound card to use digital mode software.

Some Feature Notes

Like almost any modern transceiver, the SDR-1000 offers memories- their number undoubtedly only limited by the size of your hard drive. These let you save frequency, mode, filter setting, tuning step size, call sign (if appropriate), squelch setting and AGC setting. Checking a box makes that memory available for scanning purposes.

The easy-to-read frequency readouts for the two VFOs display out to six decimal places, which some users might consider overkill. It was not possible to alter this to, say, five decimal places, with our software version.

Frequencies (and corresponding information) are saved in a table that you bring up by clicking the RECALL button. Click on a frequency you’ve saved and the SDR1000 takes you right to it. Ooops! It doesn’t close the table at the same time!

There are several band-stacking registers for each band. These save frequency, filter and mode settings. Very nice!

The sky’s the limit as filter settings are concerned, both for transmit and receive. If you set the transmit bandwidth beyond 3 kHz, however, a little dialog box pops up: Warning: Transmit Bandwidth. The transmit bandwidth is being increased beyond 3 kHz. As the control operator, you are responsible for compliance with current rules and good operating practice. The FCC’s Riley Hollingsworth couldn’t have said it any better.

Figure 3-Worst-case spectral display of the SDR-1000 transmitter during two-tone intermodulation distortion (IMD) testing on HF. The worst-case HF third-order product is approximately 26 dB below PEP output, and the worst-case fifthorder is approximately 37 dB down. The transmitter was being operated at 100 W output at 1.85 MHz.

Figure 4-CW keying waveform for the SDR-1000 showing the first two dits in semi break-in mode using external keying. Equivalent keying speed is 60 WPM. The upper trace is the actual key closure (first closure starting at left edge of figure); the lower trace is the RF envelope. Horizontal divisions are 20 ms. The transceiver was being operated at 100 W output on 14.02 MHz.

Figure 5-Worst-case tested HF spectral display of the SDR-1000 transmitter output during composite-noise testing at 14.02 MHz. Power output is 100 W. The carrier, off the left edge of the plot, is not shown. This plot shows composite transmitted noise 2 to 22 kHz from the carrier. Note the numerous spurs that are not part of the noise output.

Figure 6-The PowerSDR Transmit setup tab permits adjustments to the 12 octave transmit audio equalizer, transmit compression, transmit filter and the “tune” power level.

Figure 7-Receiving a 20 dB over S9 SSB signal on 75 meters.

Click OK and the SDR-1000 lets you set the transmit bandwidth as wide as you’d like anyway. This might be great for tailoring AM audio or for “enhanced SSB” experimenters.

You can pick the preset filters: 6.0, 4.0, 2.6, 2.1 and 1.0 kHz and 500, 250, 100, 50 and 25 Hz, plus two user-settable filters, VAR 1 and VAR 2, that you can adjust using the WIDTH slider. The results can be astounding.

Youngblood notes that there’s no analog AGC ahead of the final “brick wall” receiver filter. “This means that it is not possible for signals outside the passband to modulate the AGC system,” he says. The same filters are the final step in the transmit audio chain as well.

Figure 8-The PowerSDR console during an SSB transmission into a dummy load. The audio waveform is clearly visible within the green column representing the signal bandwidth, 2.6 kHz in this case. The “Out of Band” legend can be seen on VFO B.

Figure 9-The “histogram” display on 75 meters. Setting the buffers at too low a value whi\le using this display can chop “holes” in the received signal. This is an apparent computer processing issue.

There are two noise blankers in the SDR-1000. NB2 is not a noise blanker in the traditional sense. Instead of chopping noise out of the signal-which can lead to distortion-Youngblood said it replaces noise impulses with something called a “sliding rank order median” estimate of the original signal.

It’s possible to customize the console colors and even some of the design features. Don’t like the default yellow frequency readout numerals? Change them to red oras I did-to cyan. There’s a palette of choices.

By the way, there’s a label below each Amateur Radio band frequency that tells you where you are in terms of the ARRL band plan. For example, 40M EXT/ADV SSB if you’re listening between 7.150 and 7.225 MHz, or 75M AM CALLING FREQUENCY if you’re on 3.885 MHz. On general coverage, you’ll usually get a hard-tomiss OUT OF BAND message on a bright red background. This jarring alert made me feel I was doing something I shouldn’t be whenever I tuned through the HF shortwave broadcasting bands.

Obtaining audio from the SDR-1000 still means hooking up a headset or a set of amplified speakers to the sound card’s break- out box. You certainly could use the amplified speakers that come with the Dell, although you’ll need an adapter to connect to the Delta 44 break-out box. Under most circumstances, though, there’s plenty of audio at least to drive a headset. Again, as Steve suggested back in April, FlexRadio might consider some means of being able to drive a regular speaker or speaker pair.

Some Performance Notes: Thinking Outside the Box

The professional-quality Delta 44 sound card has become the standard for the SDR-1000 because of its vastly superior dynamic range compared to the consumer-quality unit in use during the original review. This move is especially important when you consider that once the black box provides the 11.025 kHz signal to the computer, the PowerSDR software does the rest at that intermediate frequency. So the sound card is paramount to good performance, and this shows in the numbers we measured in the ARRL Laboratory (see Table 1).

Two-tone, third-order (TT3O) intermodulation distortion (IMD) dynamic range is a great receiver performance benchmark. With the setup Steve Ford reviewed in April, this figure was in the modest mid-80s on 14 MHz-whether the preamp was on or off and whether the spacing was 20 kHz or the much more critical 5 kHz.

For this review, using the “medium” preamplifier setting as the factory default, the TT3O IMD dynamic range was 99 dB on 14 MHz, about as good as we’ve seen, and ever so slightly worse with the preamp on its highest setting-which actually was the point where the receiver’s minimum discernable signal (MDS), or sensitivity, at 14 MHz was comparable to that of most conventional HF transceivers- that is, in the vicinity of-130 dBm.

Another popular benchmark is thirdorder intercept (TOI), which is derived from the receiver’s sensitivity and its two-tone, third- order IMD dynamic range. At 14 MHz and using the medium preamplifier setting, we calculated the TOI for the SDR-1000 at a very respectable +26 dBm (it was +17 dBm at the high preamp setting).

Here’s the thing, though. The ARRL Laboratory found that two- tone, thirdorder IMD dynamic range was essentially the same at 2 kHz as it was at 20 kHz and beyond. With a conventional receiver, you’d expect dynamic range at 50 kHz spacing, for example, to be much better, especially since it’s well outside the passband of the typical 20 kHz roofing filter.

Consider, though, that the IF for what’s essentially a single- conversion receiver in the SDR-1000 is 11.025 kHz-still in the audible range for most of us. This is what the sound card sees from the black box. The superiority of the Delta 44 sound card compared to the sound card we used in the previous review seems to account for this seeming dynamic range incongruity. In short, the sound card’s inherent dynamic range becomes the receiver’s, so it exhibits essentially the same dynamic range across its entire passband, which can be considerable.

The first IF rejection figure of 114 dB on 14 MHz tops my ICOM IC- 756PROIII. The image rejection figure of 75 dB on the same band, due to the very low IF frequency no doubt, leaves a bit to be desired, however.

FM numbers were not as good as the typical FM radio. The 29 MHz FM adjacent channel rejection at 20 kHz channel spacing and using the high preamp setting was only 36 dB. FM two-tone, third-order IMD dynamic range was just 37 dB. Measurements on the order of twice these values would be more acceptable. Let’s just say that this nice radio was reaching a bit too far when it tried to do FM. When informed of this, FlexRadio identified the problem as a software issue that they would address in the next release.

I encountered some birdies at odd places across the spectrum, some in the vicinity of -95 dBm (S5). In once case, the birdie was almost on top of a station I was trying to copy (around 7.02858 MHz), but when I tuned, the birdie shifted as well, and I was able to tune in the station in the clear.

A User-Defined Radio

The FlexRadio folks and those who are helping to develop the open- source software that defines their radio already are hinting at what lies ahead for their particular piece of gear. They invite-indeed, encourage-developers and users to cast their own ideas into the pot via the FlexRadio reflector, weekly TeamSpeak VoIP community forums and the source code that’s the very heart (or brain) of the radio.

One might say that Amateur Radio SDR technology, as represented by the pioneering SDR-1000, is where SSB was in the years just after World War II. Then it was the subject of articles in technical journals and in QST, but not at a point where the average radio amateur was prepared-on a number of levels-to jump into the fray. Do you have to be a software engineer to own and operate an SDR-1000? No, but as Steve Ford suggested in his review last April, familiarity with the operation of personal computers and their potential to interface with radio equipment is a major plus.

FlexRadio encourages the more technically inclined to tinker with the open-source code. Wachsmann says the graphic user inlerface/ Windows interface code is written in C# (pronounced “C sharp”), while the DSP is written in C (shared source with a Linux version). The PowerSDR source code is available free from the FlexRadio Web site’s download page.

The Future is Now

Some plans already on the drawing board call for “a totally new look and feel with changeable ‘skins,'” Youngblood told us. “We will be working on integrated remote operation, quad receivers in the passband, SO2R (single operator, two radios), real-time spots on the spectrum display, virtual sound cards for digital modes, ad infinitum.” Youngblood says FlexRadio is in the process of adding support for the universal controller board that provides a 16×16 relay matrix for antenna and transverter control.

Manufacturer: FlexRadio Systems, 8900 Marybank Dr, Austin, TX 78750; tel 512-250-8595; [email protected]; www.flex-radio.com. Price: Model SDR-ASM/TRA (fully assembled transceiver with 100 W amplifier and RF expansion board-no PC or sound card), $1375; SDR- ATU automatic antenna tuner module, $235; M-Audio Delta 44 professional sound card, $159; Shuttle-Pro controller, $99; Dell Optiplex 170L with software and hardware integrated and calibrated; 2.4 GHz Celeron, $769; 2.8 GHz Pentium 4, $899; 3.2 GHz Pentium 4, $1065; Dell E153FP, 15 inch flat panel display, $235.

Bottom Line

The newest and fully integrated SDR-1000 system avoids most of the earlier start-up issues, resulting in a top performing radio “out of the boxes.” New software updates will continue to add new features and further improve performance.

Joel R. Hailas, W1ZR * QST Technical Editor * [email protected]

Rick Lindquist, N1RL

ARRL Senior News Editor

Copyright The American Radio Relay League, Incorporated Oct 2005

Assessing Nutritional Risk of Long-Term Care Residents

By Bowman, Jennifer J; Keller, Heather H

Abstract

The validity was determined for Minimum Data Set (MDS) 2.0 oral/ nutrition status (Section K) items, used to identify long-term care residents at nutritional risk. A registered dietitian assessed 128 long-term care residents using standardized procedures, and used clinical judgment to provide a nutritional risk rating. Registered nursing staff completed the MDS assessments. Bivariate tests of association were used to assess the relationship between the dietitian rating and each Section K item. The sensitivity (Se) and specificity (Sp) of specific and combinations of variables were also determined. The MDS variables of dietary prescription (diet rx), supplement use, and swallowing problems were significantly associated with nutritional risk rating. Body mass index (BMI), calculated from MDS data, also was significantly associated with nutritional risk rating. The MDS trigger system, however, had poor Se and Sp. The best combination of variables included the presence of one or more of diet rx, supplement use, swallowing problem, or BMI

(Can J Diet Prac Res 2005;66:155-161)

Rsum

On a dtermin la validit des items relatifs l’tat nutritionnel (section K) de l’ensemble minimal de donnes (Minimum Data Set – MDS 2.0) utilis pour reprer les rsidents d’tablissements de soins de longue dure risque nutritionnel. Une dittiste professionnelle a valu 128 rsidents l’aide de mthodes normalises et a utilis un jugement clinique pour fournir une valuation du risque nutritionnel. Des infirmires professionnelles ont aussi effectu les valuations l’aide du MDS. Des tests d’association bivaris ont t utiliss pour valuer la relation entre l’valuation de la dittiste et chaque item de la section K. La sensibilit (Se) et la spcificit (Sp) de chacune des variables et des combinaisons de variables ont galement t dtermines. Les variables du MDS relatives la prescription dittique, l’usage de supplments et aux problmes de dglutition ont t associes significativement au risque nutritionnel. L’indice de masse corporelle (IMC), calcul partir des donnes du MDS, tait galement associ significativement au risque nutritionnel. Le systme de signaux d’alarme du MDS prsentait toutefois de faibles Se et Sp. La meilleure combinaison de variables s’est avre la prsence de l’un ou de plusieurs des lments suivants : prescription dittique, usage de supplments, problme de dglutition ou IMC

(Rev can prat rech ditt 2005;66:155-161)

INTRODUCTION

Since 1996, the Minimum Data Set (MDS) 2.0 has been mandated for use in all Ontario chronic-care facilities. It also is used in Saskatchewan and across the United States. The oral/nutrition status portion, Section K, and specific nutrition trigger variables (Table 1) have been designed to stimulate a referral to a registered dietitian (RD) (1). An RD uses the triggers to guide care planning and interventions. The validity of the entire MDS tool in assessing nutritional risk was evaluated m one other study (2); however, this study did not validate the specific trigger mechanism within Section K. The following were evaluated in the current study: the validity of single items, the recommended trigger system, and combinations of variables from the MDS 2.0 Section K compared with clinical judgment in determining nutritional risk.

METHODS

All residents (n=215) occupying a continuing care unit (CCU) or nursing home (NH) bed in St. Joseph’s Hospital and Home in Guelph, Ontario, were invited to participate in this study. The St. Joseph’s Hospital research ethics board reviewed and accepted the study protocol, and all residents or a designated family member consented to study participation. Participants underwent a comprehensive nutritional assessment, which included a review of their medical chart for weight, medical history, diagnoses, problems, and medication use (3).

Anthropometry and body composition

A trained dietitian completed a standardized anthropometric assessment, including triceps and subscapular skinfold measurements, knee-height measurement, and wrist, calf, and mid-upper-arm circumference measurement. A Lange caliper (Cambridge Instruments, Cambridge, MD) was used for skinfold measurement. Weight was obtained from medical charts, provided that the most recent weight had been recorded within 30 days. Otherwise, weight was measured with ward scales on the assessment day, using standard procedures where minimal clothing was worn (3). Calibration of scales was not controlled. Standing height was estimated from knee-height measurement with a Ross knee-height caliper (3,4), and calculated using recommended formulas (5).

Table 1

Minimum Data Set 2.0 trigger variables suggesting malnutrition risk

Biochemical indicators

The biochemical indicators of nutritional status included serum cholesterol level, albumin and hemoglobin testing, hematocrit, and total lymphocyte count (TLC).

Food intake and eating problems

An RD observed each participant during one random meal period. Length of time required to eat, type and degree of assistance required, texture of meal provided, behaviour during the meal, number of adaptive feeding tools required, and percentage of meal consumed were recorded.

The comprehensive nutritional assessment, summarized above, occurred within four weeks of each resident’s quarterly MDS review. The dietitian rated nutritional risk on a ten-point scale where each interval indicated approximately a 10% increase in risk (1=lowest risk, 10=highest risk). To provide standard criteria for the dietitian’s clinical judgment rating, criteria were modified from a validation study on use of clinical judgment of nutritional status in community-dwelling seniors (6) and an assessment of nutritional status in long-term care facilities (7,8) (Table 2).

Completion of Minimum Data Set

Trained nursing staff completed MDS Section K for continuing care and nursing home participants. In the NH section of the facility, one nurse completed all MDS forms. In the CCU, two nurses completed the forms. Inter-rater reliability of MDS data was not assessed. The MDS data, including the most recent weight (within 30 days) and height (measured on admission), were collected from patient charts. The dietitian performing the assessments and rating was blinded to data from the MDS appraisal.

Statistical analysis

Bivariate tests of association (t-tests, correlation and analysis of variance) were used to assess the relationship between the RD’s rating of degree of nutritional risk for malnutrition (1 to 10) and each MDS 2.0 Section K variable. Sensitivity (Se) and specificity (Sp) of each of the top three individual predictor variables, based on strength of association and all combinations of the three variables, were determined at a cut-point at or above five, indicative of a moderate or higher level of nutritional risk (9). To determine the precision of the Se and Sp estimates in the sample population, the 95% confidence interval (CI) based on the standard error of the estimate was considered (10). The Statistical Package for the Social Sciences (SPSS Inc., version 10, Chicago, IL) was used for all statistical analyses, and associations were considered statistically significant at p≤0.05.

RESULTS

Of the 215 residents, 129 (60%) agreed to participate. One resident died during the study period, before assessment was completed. Descriptions of participants stratified by bed location are shown in Table 3; data were not collected for non-participants.

The RD’s assessment revealed a mean overall nutritional risk rating of 6.1 (standard deviation 1.8), indicative of moderate risk; 15.7% of the study participants were classified as being at a low level of nutritional risk (rating 7).

The range m prevalence of Section K items was wide, from 1.6% to 44.5% (Table 4). The most frequent nutritional indicators, as indicated by the RNs’ completion of Section K, were supplement use between meals (44.5%), a diet prescription for parenteral nutrition (PN) or enteral nutrition (EN), a mechanical diet, or syringe feeding (36.7%), a chewing problem (29.7%), and a swallowing problem (22.7%). Associations between the RD’s rating of degree of nutritional risk and each of the Section K variables are shown in Table 4. Independent sample t-tests revealed that the only MDS variables significantly associated with nutritional risk rating were

* a swallowing problem (t=-2.013, p

* a diet prescription for PN, EN, or a mechanically altered or syringe diet (=-4.249, p

* supplement use (a nutritional supplement provided between meals) (t=-2.862, p

Because of the low prevalence of several trigger items, a loss of power was observed in the bivar\iate analysis.

Weight change and risk

Participants who had lost weight had a higher mean risk rating than those who had not, and those who had gained weight had a lower mean risk rating than those who had not (Table 4). However, weight loss or gain was documented by the MDS in only 2.3% of participants (n=3). Conversely, the RD documented that 34.4% of participants had experienced some weight loss in the previous three months – 29.7% in the previous six months and 30.5% in the previous 12 months. Because of this discrepancy and suspected problems with the MDS-documented percentage weight change, the association between weight loss and nutritional risk was determined using the RD’s assessment. Any degree of weight loss, as determined by the dietitian, was significantly associated with degree of , nutritional risk (t=- 2.47, p

Table 2

Standardized criteria for nutritional risk rating by dietitian (6)

Table 3

Selected demographic and health characteristics of study participants

Body mass index calculation

Completion of the MDS 2.0 Section K assessment does not require calculation of body mass index (BMI); however, BMI was calculated from height and weight recorded on the form by nursing staff and was included in the bivariate analysis. Typically, the nurse used the admission height and most recent weight recorded on the chart. The dietitian did not use this BMI from the MDS form, as she estimated height from knee-height measurements, rather than relying on the more questionable charted height. However, correlation between the MDS BMI and the dietitian’s calculated BMI was high (Spearman’s rho=0.876, p

According to MDS-recorded height and weight, approximately 51% of the sample had a BMI at or below 24 kg/m^sup 2^ and 28% had a BMI at or below 20 kg/m^sup 2^. A BMI at or below 24 kg/m^sup 2^ (calculated from MDS data) was significantly associated with a higher level of nutritional risk (t=-3.845 and t=-3.751, respectively; p

Documentation suggests that malnutrition risk is indicated through MDS 2.0 assessment if any one of the eight “trigger” variables in Table 1 is present. Seven of these triggers are present in Section K. With the current trigger method, at the moderate risk cut-point (rating ≥5 on the dietitian’s nutritional risk scale), Se and Sp were modest (Se=0.56 and Sp=0.75) (Table 5). This analysis indicates that any one of the seven trigger variables recommended for use by MDS 2.0 in Section K exhibits only modest Se for risk screening.

Swallowing problem, diet prescription, or supplement effects

The next step in the analysis was determining the Se and Sp for the three variables shown in the previous bivariate analysis to be significantly associated with nutritional risk – a swallowing problem, a diet prescription for PN, EN, or mechanical or syringe diet (diet rx), and a nutritional supplement between meals. Individually, the Se and Sp of the variables were poor (data not shown). The highest Se and Sp were seen for the combination including any or all of the three variables (Se=0.69, Sp=0.60, at the moderate [cut-point 5] risk level) (Table 5).

Because the bivariate analysis showed that BMI calculated from MDS-recorded height and weight was significantly associated with nutrition risk, the BMI was included in the Se and Sp analysis. A BMI at or below 24 kg/m^sup 2^ had greater Se than did any other single variable; Se was 0.56 at the moderate nutritional risk cut- point of five. The best overall Se and Sp (0.81 and 0.50, respectively) for BMI at or below 24 kg/m^sup 2^ were observed in combination with a diet rx, supplement use, and/or a swallowing problem.

Weight loss and body mass index analysis

To determine the Se and Sp of Section K further, in an attempt to be as inclusive as possible, MDS-indicated weight loss (either 5% in the previous 30 days or 10% in the previous 180 days) and BMI also were compared with the dietitian rating. Weight loss was included in this analysis despite the nonsignificant association found with the bivariate analysis, as it seemed to be an intuitively important indicator of nutritional risk. On its own, the Se of weight loss as an indicator of nutritional risk was extremely low: 0.03 at the moderate risk cut-point of 5. When evaluated in combination with other variables, the Se improved, ranging from 0.25 to 0.83. The best overall Se and Sp (0.68 and 0.70, respectively) with the weight loss variable were seen in combination with a diet rx and/or a supplement.

Confidence intervals for key variables

The 95% confidence intervals for Se and Sp estimates for key variables also are presented in Table 5. Confidence intervals for these estimates suggest that alternative trigger variable combinations are more useful than the current system for nutritional risk screening. However, Sp confidence intervals are wide, and overlap for all mam indicator combinations assessed, indicating that false-positives are a consistent problem.

Table 4

Descriptive and bivariate analysis of MDS characteristics compared with dietitian risk rating

Positive and negative predictive values

The positive predictive value (PPV) and negative predictive value (NPV) were calculated for each of the MDS variables listed in Table 5. For screening purposes, NPV, or the probability of not having the disease when the test result is negative (normal), is the main concern: a high NPV is desirable (9). Calculated NPVs are low to modest, ranging from 0.20 to 0.33, for the variables indicated by Se and Sp analysis to be best for screening. These NPV values confirm Se and Sp analysis-based results that the best set of variables to use as triggers includes diet rx, supplement use, swallowing problems and/or BMI

SUMMARY

When compared with the nutritional risk rating at or above five, which indicates moderate or higher risk, the best set of indicator variables includes the variable representing a BMI below 24 kg/ m^sup 2^, calculated from Section K height and weight, with the current trigger variables diet rx, supplement use, and/or swallowing problem (Se=0.81, Sp=0.50).

DISCUSSION

The Se of individual MDS 2.0 Section K variables was poor; however, greater Se and Sp were observed when combinations of variables were used. This finding is consistent with the current MDS trigger mechanism. The Se and Sp of the variables currently used in this trigger mechanism were poor, at 0.56 and 0.75 respectively. This indicates that the current mechanism is unable to differentiate adequately between individuals who are at nutritional risk and those who are not. Bivariate analyses found that only three Section K items were significantly associated with an RD’s rating of nutritional risk. The combination of diet rx, supplement, swallowing problem, and BMI less than 24 kg/m^sup 2^ provided the best Se for screening purposes (0.81). Only diet rx (which consists of parenteral/intravenous feeding, enteral feeding, and mechanically altered or syringe diet) is currently used as a trigger on the MDS 2.0. Notably, this four-component combination had greater Se than the current seven trigger variables in Section K.

Table 5

Sensitivity, specificity, and positive and negative predictive values (and 95% CI) of key variables and combinations of variables using the moderate risk (≥5) cut-point

In comparison with the RD’s assessment of nutritional risk and specific nutritional status indicators, the current MDS 2.0 Section K did not adequately document nutritional risk elements within the sample population. The prevalence of MDS variables in the study participants ranged from 1.6% for complaints about hunger, to 44.5% for a supplement between meals. The overall prevalence of MDS items differs from the estimation of nutritional risk (84% at moderate to high risk) and the prevalence of similar characteristics assessed by the dietitian. For example, the prevalence of weight loss (either 5% in 30 days or 10% in 180 days) was 2.3% according to the MDS assessment completed by nurses. In contrast, the dietitian assessment documented the prevalence of any weight loss to be 34.4% in the previous three months, and 29.7% in the previous six months. Although they are not a direct comparison, these results suggest a large discrepancy between the nurses’ and the dietitian’s assessments, even though they used the same raw data from the medical chart. In addition, missing information meant that weight change at three, six, and 12 months could not be determined for all residents. Although weight is supposed to be recorded for each resident monthly, apparently this is not done consistently.

As indicated by the high proportion of participants with a BMI below 24 kg/m^sup 2^ (51%), many study participants already are below their optimal body weight. Perhaps the calculation of percent weight change therefore is unnecessary and is contributing to documentation errors. Beck and Ovesen (11) reviewed several studies of weight change in older adults and suggested that even a small weight loss (i.e., 1%) was associated with increased mortality. A simpler and perhaps more effective Sectio\n K indicator than percent weight change would be an indicator detecting any degree of weight loss.

Discrepancies between nurses’ and the RD’s weight loss assessments indicate the importance of training. Previous work has identified accuracy issues with height and weight recorded by nurses on the MDS (12). In the Ontario census MDS data collection, Keller and Hirdes eliminated 638 patients (approximately 5%) with a missing or inconceivable weight or height, a finding that suggests measurement or recording problems (12). Improved implementation and training conceivably may have led to MDS data more consistent with the dietitian’s assessment.

No other researchers have examined the ability of MDS 2.0 Section K trigger variables to identify nutritional risk. Currently, one other group has attempted to establish the validity of the MDS 2.0 for assessing nutritional status in NH residents. Blaum et al. (2) used convergent and construct validity to determine how MDS 2.0 items were associated with biomedical measures of nutritional status, and how the anthropometric measures (weight and BMI) recorded on the MDS were associated with other MDS clinical characteristics, some of which are not included in Section K. Like the current study, the Blaum et al. study showed that BMI was a useful measure of nutritional status because it was significantly correlated with other anthropometric measures not available on the MDS, such as mid-arm muscle area, percent body fat, and fat-free mass (2). In addition, Blaum et al. found that the lowest quartile of BMI measures was significantly associated with poor oral intake, weight loss, advanced cognitive impairment, and pressure ulcers. The best overall combination of MDS variables in the current study included BMI, a variable not currently calculated from the MDS data. However, low Sp and NPVs (Table 5) remained a problem with the “best combination,” which indicates the MDS 2.0 has poor efficiency as a screening tool.

A limitation of the study design is the introduction of criterion combination bias, which is inevitable, secondary to the nature of the gold standard used for comparison. The best available gold standard is a comprehensive nutritional assessment, which inherently includes evaluation of some items that may be familiar to both instruments.

RELEVANCE TO PRACTICE

These results suggest that the addition of BMI to Section K, as well as the use of BMI, supplement use, and swallowing problems with the current trigger variables, would improve the MDS as a nutritional risk-screening tool. The number of variables used as triggers could possibly be reduced to those shown to be significantly associated with nutritional risk. Because of the low prevalence of some trigger items in the sample population, this study lacks sufficient evidence to indicate precisely which trigger variables should be removed. In addition, other research has suggested that cognitive impairment is related to lower nutritional status (2,12-14); however, cognitive impairment is not included in Section K. To determine conclusively the usefulness of Section K as a nutritional risk screening tool, continued research and development are necessary.

Acknowledgement

The St. Joseph’s Hospital Foundation and InterRAI provided financial support for this research.

References

1. Canadian Institute for Health Information. Minimum Data Set v 2.0 user’s manual. Toronto; 1996.

2. Blaum CS, O’Neil EF, Clements KM, et al. Validity of the Minimum Data Set for assessing nutritional status in nursing home residents. J Clin Nutr 1997;66:787-94.

3. Gibson RS. Principles of nutritional assessment. New York: Oxford University Press; 1990.

4. Chumlea WC, Roche AF, Steinbaugh ML. Estimating stature from knee height for persons 60-90 years of age. J Am Geriatr Soc 1985;33:116-20.

5. Chumlea WC, Guo S, Wholihan K, et al. Stature prediction equations for elderly non-Hispanic white, non-Hispanic black, and Mexican-American persons developed from NHANES III data. J Am Diet Assoc 1998;98:137-42.

6. Keller HH, McKenzie JD, Goy R. Construct validation and test- retest reliability of SCREEN (Seniors in the Community: Risk Evaluation for Eating and Nutrition). J Gerontol 2001;56A(9):M552- 8.

7. Kerstetter JE, Holthausen BA, Fitz PA. Malnutrition in the institutionalized older adult. J Am Diet Assoc 1992;92:1109-16.

8. Keller HH. Use of serum albumin for diagnosing nutritional status in the elderly – is it worth it? Clin Biochem 1993;26:435-7.

9. Sackett DL, Haynes RB, Tugwell P. Clinical epidemiology. A basic science for clinical medicine. Boston: Little, Brown and Co; 1985.

10. Fletcher RH, Fletcher SW, Wagner EH. Clinical epidemiology. The essentials. 2nd ed. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins; 1988.

11. Beck AM, Ovesen L. At which body mass index and degree of weight loss should hospitalized elderly patients be considered at nutritional risk? Clin Nutr 1998;17:195-8.

12. Keller HH, Hirdes JP. Using the Minimum Data Set to determine the prevalence of nutrition problems in an Ontario population of chronic care patients. Can J Diet Prac Res 2000;61:165-71.

13. Keller HH. Malnutrition in institutionalized elderly: how and why? J Am Geriatr Soc 1993;41:1212-8.

14. Ortega RM, Requejo AM, Andres P, et al. Dietary intake and cognitive function in a group of elderly people. Am J Clin Nutr 1997;66:803-9.

JENNIFER J. BOWMAN, MSc, RD, HEATHER H. KELLER, PhD, RD, Department of Family Relations and Applied Human Nutrition, University of Guelph, Guelph, ON

Copyright Dietitians of Canada Fall 2005

Barbeau Pharma Appoints Charles N. Blitzer President & CEO

Barbeau Pharma, Inc. (BPI), a specialty pharmaceutical company focused on applying its proprietary technologies and reformulation know-how to transform today’s problem drugs into differentiated value-added medicines, announced that Charles N. Blitzer has been appointed to the position of President and CEO.

“Barbeau has made significant progress in advancing its development pipeline towards commercialization, and Chuck Blitzer has a proven track record leading and transitioning specialty pharmaceutical companies for product driven growth,” said John T. Spitznagel, Barbeau’s Chairman of the Board. “Having a strong, highly experienced Chief Executive Officer like Chuck onboard to oversee day-to-day operations reflects a major milestone in Barbeau’s growth strategy.”

Commenting on today’s announcement, Mr. Blitzer said, “I am very excited about joining Barbeau and share in John’s and the Company’s enthusiasm regarding BPI’s prospects for success.”

The Company’s lead development drug, BPI-103, is a proprietary reformulated highly pure and stable intravenous form of the hypertensive agent hydralazine hydrochloride. Barbeau has obtained Orphan Drug Designation for hydralazine to treat severe preeclampsia and eclampsia in pregnancy, conditions currently treated by “off-label” use of the drug. “A 505(b)(2) New Drug Application for use of BPI-103 for this indication could be submitted to the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) as early as mid-year 2006, and Orphan Drug Designation would provide seven years marketing exclusivity upon approval,” noted Mr. Blitzer.

“Moreover, there are currently five drugs in the development pipeline, including BPI-107 for Crohn’s Disease and BPI-205 for nocturnal enuresis which, respectively, utilize the Company’s proprietary, ground-breaking MADDS(TM) and ECLYPS(TM) prodrug technology platforms,” said Mr. Blitzer. “In addition, BPI-202, for bipolar disease and epilepsy, and BPI-204, for 1) chemotherapy induced nausea/vomiting, 2) delayed onset emesis and 3) gastroparesis, exemplify the Company’s overall dedication to prodrug design. I applaud Barbeau for these achievements and am delighted to have the opportunity to participate in moving the Company forward to the next level, commercialization.”

“I am also proud to be part of an executive management team of exceptionally talented professionals, including Donald L. Barbeau, the Company’s founder and Chief Scientific Officer, George Conbeer, Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer, and Jack Jiang, Ph.D. who recently joined the Company to serve as Vice President, Research and Development.”

Mr. Blitzer further noted, “The accumulated wealth of experience of this management team, coupled with the vast experience of our board in the areas of marketing, sales and business development, stands as a testimony to our commitment to enrich the breadth and depth of the development pipeline while continuing to fuel the momentum toward the marketplace.”

He concluded saying, “We are well along the path toward adding a senior-level sales and marketing professional to build our in-house capabilities and examine out-licensing opportunities to maximize the commercial success of anticipated product launches. We are highly optimistic that this key management milestone will be met in the very near term.”

Charles N. Blitzer, President & CEO and Director

Mr. Blitzer has been a pharmaceutical executive for almost 30 years and, during the early phase of his career held key management positions ranging from General and Patent Counsel to Vice President-Licensing and Business Development for Marion Laboratories and Marion Merrell Dow Pharmaceuticals, predecessor companies of Sanofi-Aventis SA (NYSE:SNY). At Marion, he in-licensed products that produced over $1 billion in US sales and later played a key role in the merger and integration of the company into Merrell Dow Pharmaceuticals.

From 1996 to mid-2003, Mr. Blitzer served as President and CEO of MGI Pharma, Inc. (NASDAQ:MOGN), a public biopharmaceutical company with 2004 revenues approximating $200 million. During his tenure at MGI Pharma, he oversaw an expansion in the company’s market capitalization from $42 million to more than $1 billion.

Prior to joining Barbeau, Mr. Blitzer served as President and CEO of Fulcrum Pharmaceuticals, Inc., a privately held drug design and development company. He received a B.S. in Pharmacy from the University of Toledo, a J.D. in law from American University, and a Masters in Business Administration from Rockhurst College.

Donald L. Barbeau, Chief Scientific Officer, Director & Founder

Mr. Barbeau possesses over 32 years of proven business and scientific expertise as a healthcare professional, principally in pharmaceutical development. Prior to BPI, he founded Biomega Corporation, a medical information consulting firm specializing in the pharmaceutical and biotechnology industries. For more than 15 years, Biomega provided comprehensive information to decision makers, particularly with regard to patent and scientific literature analyses, preparation of strategic technology assessments, and publishing drug monographs describing the latest clinical information on new drugs awaiting FDA approval. A medical publishing firm acquired this drug monograph business.

Previously, Mr. Barbeau conducted cardiovascular research at the University of Chicago and was employed as a scientific expert and patent agent for American Hospital Supply Corporation which was acquired in 1985 by Baxter International, Inc. (NYSE:BAX). He is the recipient of B.S. and M.S. degrees in Biochemistry and Biophysics and was a graduate research fellow in Biochemistry at the University of Chicago under a grant from the National Institutes of Health. Mr. Barbeau is a registered patent agent.

George Conbeer, Executive Vice President & Chief Financial Officer

Mr. Conbeer’s background encompasses over 20 years of experience in financial services and the medical industry. He has served in executive management and business development positions with companies that include eCredit.com, Copelco Capital, Inc., which has since been acquired by Citigroup, Inc. (NYSE:C), Comdisco Inc., and the equipment financing subsidiaries of the Bank of Boston and the Bank of America (NYSE:BAC).

Mr. Conbeer has demonstrated strong entrepreneurial skills in his ability to organize and manage new business ventures. While at Comdisco, he founded and served as President of Comdisco Medical Equipment Group and Comdisco Medical Exchange, two subsidiary companies that financed, remanufactured and sold high-technology medical devices. He also co-founded and served as President of the Medical Capital Company, a provider of healthcare finance, and currently serves on the advisory board of SalesChain LLC, an organization founded in 2001 to improve the operational and sales processes of small to mid-sized companies.

Mr. Conbeer is a graduate of Princeton University and attended New York University’s Graduate School of Business.

Jack Jiang, Ph.D., Vice President, Research & Development

Jack Jiang, Ph.D. has worked in the pharmaceutical and biotechnology industries for over 15 years. He brings to Barbeau diversified experience consisting of increasing responsibilities in research and development, operations, and business development. Dr. Jiang has led teams of professionals involved in a broad spectrum of research and development programs, ranging in scope from new drug discovery, pre-clinical and human clinical studies to the submission of Investigational and New Drug Applications and initiating cGMP compliant pilot plant production of drug candidates.

Dr. Jiang is also experienced with establishing licensing deals, arranging collaborative partnerships, and raising capital for start up companies. He has held senior management and executive level positions with broad-base multinational corporations such as Johnson & Johnson (NYSE:JNJ) as well as specialty companies as Sphinx Pharmaceuticals, now a division of Eli Lilly and Company (NYSE:ELY), and Genta Pharmaceuticals (NASDAQ: GNTA).

With more than 20 patents to his credit, Dr. Jiang received his Ph.D. in organic chemistry from Michigan State University. He has served as an adjunct professor for the University of North Carolina and the University of Massachusetts, and is currently on the faculty of the School of Pharmacy at Lake Erie College of Osteopathic Medicine.

About Barbeau Pharma, Inc.

Barbeau Pharma, Inc. is a specialty pharmaceutical company focused on the development of differentiated, value-generating therapeutics for market segments of unmet medical need. Led by a highly experienced management team, the Company’s growth strategy centers on its ability to reformulate in-the-market therapies into new proprietary versions, representing the potential for enhancing the medical and market value of these therapeutics.

Barbeau’s development programs and reformulation techniques aim at generating improved product characteristics, including efficacy, safety, dosing, ease of administration, or biodistribution of a drug, which can lead to approval of a therapeutic for an entirely new indication. In addition to product specific reformulation programs, Barbeau’s development pipeline is supplemented by two leading-edge proprietary technology platforms. One is a prodrug platform, designated ECLYPS(TM), that has the potential to reduce adverse side effects, particularly cardiotoxicity, of many currently marketed drugs. The second platform is a Mucosal Adhesive Drug Delivery System, or MADDS(TM), that is designed to allow certain drugs to be delivered in site specific, site adhering and site retention form to inflamed tissues in various mucous membranes throughout the body. In addition, Barbeau maintains a tremendous degree of expertise in prodrug design which it plans to utilize in its continued expansion of its research programs. While enjoying patent and proprietary protection, drug therapies developed with the ECLYPS(TM), MADDS(TM) and general prodrug technology platforms are expected to be granted five-years marketing exclusivity under the Drug Price Competition and Patent Term Restoration Act of 1984 (Waxman-Hatch Act) upon receiving FDA approval.

In almost all instances, the Company intends to pursue regulatory approvals through the submission of 505(b)(2) New Drug Applications (NDA), partly based on data contained in a previously approved NDA or data generated by third parties. In many cases Barbeau plans on augmenting its regulatory filings with its own data from preclinical and, sometimes, clinical studies. Such studies would be confirmatory in nature and, therefore, involve less risk, lower cost, and speeder time to market than is typical of the more traditional drug discovery and development process.

FedEx Suspends Jumpseating — Personal Privilege is Stopped After Internal Security Review

By Jane Roberts robertsj@commercialappealcom

For the third time since Sept. 11, 2001, FedEx Express has suspended personal jumpseat privileges, citing an internal security review.

In an internal memo dated Aug. 15, Express executive vice president Dave Rebholz said the company had “made the difficult decision” to suspend personal jumpseating, and could not say when it would be reinstated.

Pilots, mechanics and corporate employees may still use the jumpseat for business travel.

“We suspended personal jumpseating after an intermittent review of our security procedures,” said Maury Lane, spokesman.

“We don’t discuss security reviews or how they’re done.”

Free personal travel in company planes has been a perk at FedEx nearly since the company began. It has one of the most generous jumpseating policies in aviation, allowing any Express employee to use the jumpseat for leisure travel to any destination it flies.

While Lane says “no single event” brought about the change, pilots for weeks have said “three suspicious” passengers raised concerns on a flight from California to Memphis this summer.

An August message on Jetflyer – an online newsletter for FedEx pilots – says they were allowed to fly, even though they had no luggage and acted suspiciously.

The message was posted by Memphis-based Airbus-300 first officer Mark Koszalka.

He had no comment Wednesday about the allegations.

In his entry, Koszalka said the incident was so suspicious, the plane’s pilot, Memphis-based Capt. Mike Mullally, copied details to the FBI and Transportation Security Administration details.

Mullally could not be reached.

Neither the FBI nor TSA is investigating a jumpseat incident in Memphis.

Nor is the Federal Aviation Administration involved, according to spokeswoman Kathleen Bergen. The agency was also not part of a recent security review at FedEx.

“The company decided to make some changes,” she said. “I’m not sure any specific incident targeted it.”

Dave Webb, chairman of the FedEx unit of the Air Line Pilots Association master executive council, said he’d heard other versions of the story, but said, “Everyone has told me they have no information.”

FedEx suspended jumpseat privileges for the first time immediately following 9/11.

It briefly resumed them for business travel in August 2002 before suspending again in 2003 for six months while the company installed metal doors between the cabin and cockpit.

Nonpilot “stagers” – people with company permission to jumpseat to work from their homes – now must have approval from two layers of management to fly.

“The point is they can still get on the jumpseat. They really haven’t stopped people from using it,” Webb said.

Jumpseating has been a touchy issue with FedEx pilots since April 7, 1994, when a jumpseater, fellow pilot Auburn Calloway, attempted to hijack a FedEx plane bound for San Jose, Calif.

Calloway boarded the plane as a jumpseat passenger, and soon after takeoff attacked the three crew members with a hammer he carried aboard the DC10 in a guitar case.

He severely injured his colleagues in the ensuing fight and was gravely injured in the process.

The crew subdued Calloway and returned to Memphis International Airport without loss of life or property.

Since 9/11, company policy now requires criminal background checks every six months for employees who wish to use the jumpseat. They must also pass a certification test and be screened for non- approved items before boarding.

FedEx now also limits jumpseating to domestic flights on wide- body jets where the seat is outside the cockpit.

Although the suspension eliminates personal travel for all FedEx employees, its pilots may still travel for free on other airlines through the TSA’s national Cockpit Access Security System, a program engineered by a coalition of pilot unions that allows ticketing agents to verify a pilot’s identity and employment status before being admitted on board.

-Jane Roberts: 529-2512

Managing Primary Care Using Patient Satisfaction Measures/ PRACTITIONER APPLICATION

By Otani, Koichiro; Kurz, Richard S; Harris, Lisa E; Byrne, Frank D

Koichiro Otani, Ph.D., assistant professor, School of Public and Environmental Affairs, Indiana University-Purdue University, Fort Wayne, Indiana; Richard S. Kurz, Ph.D., professor, Saint Louis University School of Public Health, St. Louis, Missouri; and Lisa E. Harris, M.D., associate professor, Indiana University School of Medicine, Indianapolis, Indiana

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

Our study1 aimed to identify which attributes of a primary healthcare experience have the most impact on patient satisfaction as well as which aspects of each attribute are most significant in patients’ response to the services they receive. The three attributes examined in this study were access, staff care, and physician care. Analyses of the aspects of each attribute controlled for age, gender, and race. Data used in this study were obtained through a survey questionnaire with random sampling, resulting in the sample size of 8,465. The psychometric properties of the questionnaire were also examined and showed appropriate reliability and validity. The multiple regression analysis showed that among the three attributes, physician care was most influential, closely followed by staff care, with access having much less influence.

Further analyses revealed that specific aspects of each attribute were more influential on patient satisfaction. Within the physician care attribute, patients were found to be rational consumers who were looking for surrogate indicators of correct diagnosis and treatment options among the measures available to them. They were much less likely to be influenced by so-called bedside manner. Within the staff care attribute, willingness and compassionate behaviors of staff and prompt service were most important. Within the access attribute, patients sought caring interaction with appointment personnel. After considering the findings, we discuss possible actions for healthcare managers.

For more information on the concepts in this article, please contact Dr. Otani at [email protected]. To purchase an electronic reprint of this article, go to www.ache.org/pubs/jhmsub.cfm, scroll down to the bottom of the page, and click on the purchase link.

Patient satisfaction is a subjective judgment of the quality of care, but it is a driving force when patients have a choice of providers or the opportunity to recommend a provider to others. Satisfied patients return when they need a healthcare service and recommend their provider to friends and relatives when those individuals are searching for an appropriate healthcare provider. Dissatisfied patients seldom return when they have other choices, and they relate their negative experiences to others. Thus, it is very important to improve patient satisfaction levels, especially in today’s competitive healthcare environment in which managed care companies use patient satisfaction as a tool in determining their reimbursement rates.

There have been many patient satisfaction studies, the earliest of which attempted to identify patient characteristics such as age, gender, and race to predict patient satisfaction levels (Andersen, Kravits, and Anderson 1971; Apostle and Oder 1967; Bertakis, Roter, and Putnam 1991; Dolinsky 1997; Dolinsky and Caputo 1990; Fox and Storms 1981; Hulka et al. 1975; Kaim-Caudle and Marsh 1975; Linn 1975; Meng et al. 1997; Sullivan 1984). Another group of research analyzed healthcare attributes-such as nursing care, physician care, admission process, and discharge process-to identify attributes that influence overall patient satisfaction (Dansky and Brannon 1996; Marr and Greengarten 1995; Oswald et al. 1998; Ross, Steward, and Sinacore 1993; Ware, Snyder, and Wright 1976; Ware et al. 1975). A third group analyzed the psychometric properties of patient satisfaction instruments (Marshall et al. 2001; Zaslavsky et al. 2000).

A new group of patient satisfaction studies focuses on the noncompensatory and nonlinear relationship between healthcare attributes and overall patient satisfaction, with the intention of increasing patient satisfaction in an efficient manner. These studies indicate that interventions aimed at reducing negative effects are more efficient for increasing patient satisfaction than those directed at improving positive effects (Otani, Harris, and Tierney 2003; Otani and Harris 2004; Otani and Kurz 2004; and Otani et al. 2003).

Beyond identifying influential patient characteristics, these latter studies found attributes of healthcare experiences that improve patient satisfaction. However, they fell short of specifically identifying what aspects of these attributes are important to improve patient satisfaction. Our study attempts to specifically determine not only the attributes of a healthcare experience (in this case, a primary care visit) that have the most impact on patient satisfaction but also the aspects of each healthcare attribute that are most significant to the patient’s response to the services they receive.

METHODOLOGY

Site

The study site included five university-affiliated practices of Indiana University Medical Group-Primary Care in Indianapolis, Indiana. These practices serve mostly managed care populations and use a centralized electronic medical record (McDonald et al. 1999; Harris et al. 1999). Each primary care practice is, in general, managed autonomously. These sites use patient satisfaction data in continuous quality improvement as well as physician evaluation and compensation.

Data Collection

Data used in this study were obtained through a survey questionnaire (Harris et al. 1999). The patient satisfaction survey was mailed within three days of the patients’ primary care visit, and follow-up telephone calls were placed to patients who did not respond after two mailings. This study used a random sampling method for patient visits between October 1996 and November 2000 such that 25 surveys were obtained per physician every six months. Approximately 15 board-certified general internists provided primary care to adults at the five sites. Patients who were younger than 18 years of age were excluded from the analysis, resulting in the sample size of 8,465. The total response rate was 53.9 percent.

The survey questionnaire included the Medical Outcomes Study Visit-Specific Questionnaire (which contains nine items that assess satisfaction with a specific outpatient visit) (Rubin et al. 1993) and a modified version of the American Board of Internal Medicine’s Patient Satisfaction Questionnaire (which contains 12 items that address physician encounters) (PSQ Project CoInvestigators 1989). In addition, the survey included other items developed by the quality improvement committee of Indiana University Medical Group-Primary Care. Those items measured access to care and satisfaction with office processes and personnel. The survey instrument is available on request from the authors.

Variables

Independent variables. Multiple items were used to measure each of the three primary care attributes (access, staff care, and physician care). A composite index (CI) was created for each attribute as the mean of the items that measure that attribute. If more than 25 percent of the items were missing for a patient, the CI was not computed and the missing value was assigned. When less than or equal to 25 percent of the items were missing, the mean score of the valid items was computed. The instrument used a five-point Likert scale that ranged from poor ( 1 ) to excellent (5); thus, the higher numbers indicated higher attribute reactions (higher satisfaction). Summary statistics for all variables are presented in Table 1.

The validity of questionnaire items in the survey was assessed. A structural equation measurement model was built to confirm the convergent and discriminant validity of the satisfaction instrument. Specifically, confirmatory factor analysis was conducted to analyze the factor structure of the instrument. The goodness-of-fit statistics showed a good model fit (root mean square error of approximation (RMSEA) = 0.12, goodness-of-fit index (GFI) = 0.90). The reliability of each attribute was examined by the Cronbach’s alpha coefficient. The obtained values of the reliability estimates were all greater than 0.89, which indicates a strong internal reliability among items in the same attributes. All lambda weights (factor loadings) were statistically significant at α = 0.05, which indicates that all selected items loaded highly on the corresponding constructs, or attributes. After the analyses, the final model was determined to include three constructs with 27 items (see Table 1).

TABLE 1

Descriptive Statistics and Coefficients of Survey Items

TABLE 1

Descriptive Statistics and Coefficients of Survey Items

Dependent variable. The overall satisfaction variable included one item in the questionnaire that asked the patient’s overall satisfaction with the quality of care and service of the visit. Descriptive statistics are presented in Table 1.

Control variables. Control variables used in the analysis included individual patient characteristics, including age, gender, and race, as predisposingvariables. The mean age of the patients was 49.54 years, and the standard deviation was 16.24 years for this adult sample of 8,465. Female patients accounted for 67.8 percent of the participants. As for race, 46.2 percent were white; 26.6 percent were African American; 1.3 percent were Asian; 0.3 percent were Hispanic; and 25.6 percent were other ethnic origins, including unknown. There were no missing values for the age variable and very few for the gender variable. Descriptive statistics for control variables are presented in Table 2.

Analysis

The analysis of this study consisted of two parts. The first part examined three attributes, using multiple regression analysis, to determine the effect of each attribute on patient satisfaction. The three attribute variables (access, staff care, and physician care) were entered together with control variables. The second part examined the items that comprised each attribute to identify what aspects (items) of the attribute were critical in increasing patient satisfaction. All aspects in each of the influential attributes were simultaneously analyzed using multiple regression analysis, with overall patient satisfaction as a dependent variable. The statistical significance for each coefficient of the aspects was examined, and the sizes of the coefficients that showed statistical significance were compared. The larger the coefficient was, the greater the influence on overall patient satisfaction.

RESULTS

Table 3 shows the result of the multiple regression analysis, with the three attributes (access, staff care, and physician care) and the control variables as independent variables and overall patient satisfaction as a dependent variable. Each attribute showed a positive relationship with overall patient satisfaction and was statistically significant at α = 0.05. For control variables, age was positively related to overall patient satisfaction and was statistically significant. Female gender showed a positive relationship but was not statistically significant. Regarding race, African-American patients showed a positive relationship that was statistically significant; in other race categories, however, the relationships were not statistically significant. Among the three attributes, physician care showed the largest parameter estimate (0.468), followed by staff care (0.443) and access (0.141).

TABLE 2

Descriptive Statistics of Control Variables

TABLE 3

Parameter Estimates of Three Attributes and Control Variables on Overall Satisfaction

Because the physician care attribute showed the largest parameter estimate, the next question became, what aspects of the physician attribute are most influential? The 14 aspects in the physician care attribute were simultaneously analyzed, using multiple regression analysis that included control variables, to determine how much each aspect was related to overall patient satisfaction. Of the 14 aspects in the physician care attribute, two aspects showed far- larger coefficients, followed by another aspect that showed a larger coefficient than the others. Seven aspects were statistically significant and were positively related to overall patient satisfaction. The two most influential aspects in this attribute were “explanation of what was done for you” and “length of time spent with the doctor or physician assistant,” with coefficients of .241 and .212, respectively. Another aspect that showed the third largest coefficient was “the technical skills (thoroughness, carefulness, competence) of the doctor or physician assistant,” with a coefficient of .109. Other coefficients were much smaller than these three.

The staff care attribute that showed the second largest parameter estimate was analyzed to compare eight aspects within that attribute. Of the eight aspects in the staff care attribute, six aspects were statistically significant and positively related to overall patient satisfaction. The most influential aspect was “the personal manner of the nurse or staff member who assisted the doctor or physician assistant with your visit,” with the largest coefficient of .207, followed by “the efficiency of the office staff at check out,” with .199. The third aspect, with a coefficient of .173, was “length of time waiting at the office.” The next three aspects-“the technical skills of the nurse (drawing blood, taking blood pressure, giving shots),””the efficiency of the office staff at check in,” and “the personal manner of the office staff at check out”-showed somewhat smaller coefficients, at .113, .097, and .063, respectively.

The third attribute-access, which had a much smaller parameter estimate than staff care and physician care attributes-was also analyzed. The attribute had five aspects, and all of them were statistically significant and positively related to overall patient satisfaction (see Table 1). The aspect “the personal manner (courtesy, respect, sensitivity, friendliness) of the person with whom you spoke when you made the appointment” had the largest coefficient, at .243. The second aspect, “how long you waited to get an appointment,” and the third, “the helpfulness of the person with whom you spoke when you made the appointment,” showed smaller coefficients (.160 and .132, respectively) than the first one. The last two aspects, “getting through to the office by phone” and “length of time waiting on the phone,” showed much smaller coefficients (.084 and .063, respectively) than the first one.

DISCUSSION

Patients are anxious about their uncertain conditions when they visit doctors. They expect the physician to make the right diagnosis and provide the right treatment. However, patients are not able to directly assess whether the physician’s diagnosis and treatment options are correct. Thus, patients have to rely on other aspects that they can assess, and they believe those aspects are related to the correct diagnosis and treatment option.

Our results clearly support this assumption. Patients in the study were most influenced by the very reason that they visited their physicians-that is, to receive care from the physician and his or her staff. With regard to the physician care attribute, the most influential aspect, “explanation of what was done for you,” indicated that patients need physicians to help solve their health problems. The second influential aspect, “length of time spent with the doctor or physician assistant,” implied that within the visit timeframe the doctor did everything needed for the patient and that the patient had time to ask questions and express concerns; thus, the patient would be led to believe that the diagnosis and treatment must be correct.

These aspects are not direct measures by which patients can assess the appropriateness of their diagnosis and treatment, but they are good proxy measures that are available to patients. The third aspect, “the technical skills (thoroughness, carefulness, competence) of the doctor or physician assistant,” was also likely to be viewed by patients as directly related to correct diagnosis and treatment. Unless providers are perceived as having competent technical skills, the patient will not view the visit as satisfactory.

The less influential aspects of the physician attribute are associated with dimensions that may be described in general as bedside manner. Although these aspects did influence patient satisfaction in our study, their impact was much smaller than for factors related to the reason for the visit-to receive the right diagnosis and treatment.

Interaction with staff members, including nurses at primary care practices, showed the second largest parameter estimate. The difference between this attribute and the leading attribute of physician care was very small, which indicates that this attribute is also veiy influential for increasing patient satisfaction. Our examination of the aspects of this attribute also produced important results: The personal manner of the staff was more important in the examination room than in other activities. This finding may indicate that patients are most anxious in the examination room; thus, compassionate care from the staff does influence patients’ comfort levels. Patients would probably have less anxiety regarding checking in, walking through the practice setting, or checking out. However, our findings suggest that patients were concerned with the efficiency of the staff during the check-out process, which includes receiving additional instructions after the physician visit, clarifying billing or insurance issues, and making another appointment. The reasons for the importance of this aspect of the visit were not entirely clear but may include the patient’s desire to leave and act on the physician’s advice immediately. The third influential aspect was the length of waiting time at the office. This result is not surprising as it is a frequent concern of patients (Kurz and Scharff 2003) and has been addressed by process improvement experts (Nolan et al. 1996; Murray and Berwick 2003).

The access attribute was the third most influential in overall patient satisfaction, but its impact was much smaller than the other two attributes. To visit physicians, patients typically made a phone call for an appointment. Our results suggest that patients pay attention to the way that the person in charge of scheduling appointments responds to them. The first aspect, “the personal manner (courtesy, respect, sensitivity, friendliness) of the person with whom you spoke when you made the appointment,” and the third aspect, “the helpfulness of the person with whom you spoke when you made the appointment,” both indicate the importance of the appointment personnel’s interaction with patients. The second aspect, “how long you waited to get an appointment,” can be very critical, as patients may get upset if they have to wait before they see a doctor. The length of time that patients need to wait for an appointme\nt is affected by characteristics of the medical practice and the patient’s medical condition or personal and family demands. However, patients with overt symptoms from an acute or a chronic illness may perceive an immediate need for medical attention, heightening this aspect’s influence on patient satisfaction.

CONCLUSION

This study shows that in primary care settings, physician characteristics affect patient satisfaction more than other attributes of care do. Previous studies conducted on hospital discharged patients demonstrate that nursing care has the most influence on patient satisfaction (Otani and Kurz 2004; Otani et al. 2003). In a hospital setting, patients interact with nurses much more than with other hospital personnel, including physicians. In outpatient settings, as in this study, the physician is the focus of the patient’s experience. Thus, the physician becomes key to patients, and those aspects of physician care that most directly affect the patient’s medical concern are most influential on patient satisfaction.

This study also specifically examined the aspects of the physician care attribute that had the most positive impact on overall patient satisfaction. Two items, “explanation of what was done for you” and “length of time spent with the doctor or physician assistant,” were found to be the most important and influential aspects in the physician care attribute. Other aspects-bedside manner and a physician’s caring demeanor-did influence overall patient satisfaction, but their impact was much smaller. Thus, to increase overall patient satisfaction, it is important to improve the aspects of the physician attribute that are related to the nature of the patient-physician interaction-that is, the physician making sure that the patient understands the services provided and the physician spending appropriate length of time with the patient.

The staff care attribute, including nursing care, showed the second largest impact on overall patient satisfaction. Even though this attribute only placed second, its difference from the leading attribute of physician care was not large; thus, it is worth investigating and improving. The most influential aspect was “the personal manner of the nurse or staff member who assisted the doctor or physician assistant with your visit,” which indicates that patients seek caring and compassionate behaviors from the staff, including nurses. Considering the patients’ feelings of anxiety and dependency while in the doctor’s office, it is logical that the staffs behavior in alleviating patient’s anxiety and comforting them would be viewed as the most important aspect of the staff care attribute. The second and third aspects, “the efficiency of the office staff at check out” and “length of time waiting at the office,” are also under the control of management. Process improvement in these aspects of the visit have been addressed, as noted earlier; thus, models for immediate interventions by the managers of primary care practices are available and can be implemented without extensive research. Developing and using a protocol and providing guidelines regarding these aspects would help staff members work more efficiently. Changing the workflow or reducing the waiting time is difficult, but informing patients of the reasons for the wait can improve patients’ perception.

The third most influential attribute was access. Although this attribute played a less significant role in patient satisfaction, it nonetheless requires attention. The most influential aspect of this attribute, “the personal manner (courtesy, respect, sensitivity, friendliness) of the person with whom you spoke when you made the appointment,” focused on the positive interaction between patients and scheduling staff. The third aspect, “the helpfulness of the person with whom you spoke when you made the appointment,” also revolved around such interaction. Thus, it seems that patients look at how appointment personnel respond to their requests. With this in mind, the appropriate training of appointment personnel may be warranted.

The second aspect of the access attribute, “how long you waited to get an appointment,” is a complex issue and may require more study to address. However, patients with immediate symptoms undoubtedly perceive a need for medical attention. Hence, a referral system or assessment of the patient condition at the appointment time may be instituted to address this situation.

Our detailed analyses revealed that patients are rational consumers. They look for surrogate indicators of correct diagnosis and treatment options, which were the only measures of satisfaction they could use. The results from this study indicate that patients may find these surrogate indicators in their perceptions of the feedback they receive from their physicians and the amount of time their physicians spend with them. Because managed care and other factors influence the time spent with patients, this aspect of care should receive careful attention in patient satisfaction improvement efforts. The study found that patients also consider how staff members and other personnel interact with them. These aspects consistently showed that patients were influenced by the willingness and compassionate behaviors of staff members. Improvement of staff behavior may come from providing adequate training and may result in employee satisfaction with their work.

This study also revealed that certain aspects of the three attributes were more important for intervention than were others. An analysis that identifies influential attributes is important but is only the first step to improving patient satisfaction. Through the detailed analysis of each attribute, it is possible to find important aspects that would provide primary care managers with more information to increase patient satisfaction more efficiently. With increasing competition and uncertainty in healthcare, it may be necessary for providers to make an extra effort to put themselves in the patients’ shoes, analyzing patients’ as well as staffs behavior.

Healthcare providers routinely collect patient satisfaction data. However, many of them spend little time in analyzing these data, which would provide managers with valuable information to improve the quality of care they provide. The data are often underutilized. Also important are the psychometric properties (validity and reliability) of the patient satisfaction questionnaire, which should measure healthcare-specific issues and should provide consistent (reliable) outcomes. The psychometric properties of the patient satisfaction questionnaire used in this study were confirmed.

Focusing the intervention strategy on certain aspects of the attributes examined is much more cost efficient than attempting to improve all aspects of the three attributes. Such a strategy will encourage patients to choose those facilities with which they are most satisfied.

LIMITATIONS AND SUGGESTIONS

First, this study used a comprehensive patient satisfaction questionnaire that was carefully developed to ensure reliability and validity of the measurement. Patients are increasingly becoming better educated about their Healthcare, so their expectations and opinions about healthcare are changing as well. Thus, some aspects of the three attributes measured here may not be adequately included in future measurements because patients’ views are changing.

Second, this is a cross-sectional study. The cross-sectional study design can claim an association but does not establish a causal relationship. However, previous research into this topic indicates that patients combine their reactions to attributes to form their overall satisfaction. Thus, it is recommended that should a researcher implement an intervention program that improves some aspects of three attributes, the researcher should observe the change in overall satisfaction levels to establish the causal relationship.

Third, the data were collected from five primary care practices in Indianapolis, Indiana. Even though Indianapolis is a major city with a diverse population and even though the sample size for this study is large, the study’s generalizability to other geographic areas is limited.

Note

1. This study has been approved by Institutional Review Board at Indiana University-Purdue University, Fort Wayne (Rf. #00-358E) and by Institutional Review Board at Indiana University-Purdue University, Indianapolis (IRB #9906-42, EX0008-11B).

References

Andersen, R., J. Kravits, and O. Anderson. 1971. “The Public’s View of the Crisis on Medical Care: An Impetus for Changing Delivery Systems.” Economic and Business Bulletin 24 (1): 44-52.

Apostle, D., and F. Oder. 1967. “!’actors that Influence the Public’s View of Medical Care.” JAMA 202 (7): 592-98.

Bertakis, K. D., D. Roter, and S. M. Putnam. 1991. “The Relationship of Physician Medical Interview Style to Patient Satisfaction.” The lournal of Family Practice 32 (2): 175-81.

Dansky, K. H., and D. Brannon. 1996. “Discriminant Analysis: A Technique for Adding Value to Patient Satisfaction Surveys.” Hospital & Health Services Administration 41 (54): 503-13.

Dolinsky, A. L 1997. “Elderly Patients’ Satisfaction with the Outcome of their Health Care Complaints.” Health Care Management Review 22 (2): 33-40.

Dolinsky, A. L, and R. K. Caputo. 1990. “The Role of Health Care Attributes and Demographic Characteristics in the Determination of Health Care Satisfaction.” Journal of Health Care Marketing 10 (4): 31-39.

Fox, J. G., and D. M. Storms. 1981. “A Different Approach to Sociodemographic Predictors of Satisfaction with Health Care.” Social Science & Medicine 15 (5): 557-64.

Harris, L. U., R. W. Swindle, S. M. Mungai, M. Weinberger, and W. M. Tierney. 1999. “Measuring Patient Satisfaction for Quality Improvement.” Medical Care 37 (12): 1207-13.

Hulka, B. S., 1. L Kupper, M. B. DaIy, ). C. Cassel, and F. Schoen. 1975. “Correlates ofSatisfaction and Dissatisfaction with Medical Care: A Community Perspective.” Medical Care 13 (8): 648- 58.

Kaim-Caudle, P. R., and G. N. Marsh. 1975. “Patient-Satisfaction Survey in General Practice.” British Medical lournal 1 (5952): 262- 64.

Kurz, R. S., and D. Scharff. 2003. A Crisis of Care: Community Report on the Impressions of St. Louis City Residents on their Access to Care. St. Louis, MO: EpiscopalPresbyterian Charitable Health and Medical Trust.

Linn, L. S. 1975. “Factors Associated with Patient Evaluation of Health Care.” Milbank Memorial Fund Quarterly – Health & Society 53 (4): 531-48.

Marr, J-A., and M. Greengarten. 1995. “Patient Satisfaction: A Customer Service Approach.” Healthcare Management FORUM 8 (3): 52- 56.

Marshall, G. N., L. S. Morales, M. Elliott, K. Spritzer, and R. D. Hays. 2001. “Confirmatory Factor Analysis of the Consumer Assessment of Health Plans Study (CAHPS) 1.0 Core Survey.” Psychological Assessment 13 (2): 216-29.

McDonald, C. J., J. M. Overhage, W. M. Tierney, P. R. Dexter, D. K. Martin, J. G. Suico, A. Zafar, G. Schadow, L. Blevins, T. Eemmon, J. Warvel, B. Porterfield, ). Warvel, P. Cassidy, D. Lindbergh, A. Belsito, M. Tucker, and B. Williams. 1999. “The Regenstrief Medical Record System: A Quarter Century Experience.” International Journal oj Medical Informatics 54 (3): 225-53.

Meng, Y-Y., D. K. Jatulis, J. P. McDonald, and A. P. Legorreta. 1997. “Satisfaction with Access to and Quality of Health Care Among Medicare Enrollees in a Health Maintenance Organization.” Western Journal of Medicine 166 (4): 242-47.

Murray, M., and D. M. Berwick. 2003. “Advanced Access: Reducing Waiting and Delays in Primary Care.” /AMA 289 (8): 1035-40.

Nolan, T, M. Schall, D. M. Berwick, and J. Roessner. 1996. Reducing Delays and Waiting Times Throughout the Healthcare System. Boston: Institute for Healthcare Improvement.

Oswald, S. L., D. E. Turner, R. L. Snipes, and D. Butler. 1998. “Quality Determinants and Hospital Satisfaction. Perceptions of the Facility and Staff Might Be a Key Influencing Factors.” Marketing Health Services 18 (1): 18-22.

Otani, K., L. E. Harris, and W. M. Tierney. 2003. “A Paradigm Shift in Patient Satisfaction.” Medical Care Research and Review 60 (3): 347-65.

Otani, K., and L. E. Harris. 2004. “Different Integration Processes of Patient Satisfaction Among Four Groups.” Health Care Management Review 29 (3): 188-95.

Otani, K., R. S. Kurz, T E. Burroughs, and B. Waterman. 2003. “Reconsidering Models of Patient Satisfaction and Behavioral Intentions.” Health Care Management Review 28 (1): 9-22.

Otani, K., and R. S. Kurz. 2004. “The Impact of Nursing Care and Other Healthcare Attributes on Hospitalized Patient Satisfaction and Behavioral Intentions.” Journal of Healthcare Management 49 (3): 181- 97.

PSQ Project Co-investigators. 1989. Final Report on the Patient Satisfaction Questionnaire Project. Washington, DC: American Board of Internal Medicine.

Ross, C. K., C. A. Steward, and J. M. Sinacore. 1993. “The Importance of Patient Preferences in the Measurement of Health Care Satisfaction.” Medical Care 31 (12): 1138-49.

Rubin, H. R., B. Gandek, W. H. Rogers, M. Kosinski., C. A. McHorney, and J. E. Ware, Jr. 1993. “Patients’ Ratings of Outpatient Visits in Different Practice Settings: Results from the Medical Outcomes Study.” /AMA 270 (7): 835-40.

Sullivan, G. L. 1984. “Role of Referent Selection in Primary Care Provider Choice and Satisfaction.” Journal of Health Care Marketing 4 (3): 27-36.

Ware, J., M. K. Snyder, and W. R. Wright. 1976. Development and Validation of Scales to Measure Patient Satisfaction with Health Care Services: Volume 1 of a Final Report. Carbondale, IL: Southern Illinois University School of Medicine.

Ware, J. E., W. R. Wright, M. K. Snyder, and G. C. Chu. 1975. “Consumer Perceptions of Health Care Services: Implications for Academic Medicine.” tournai of Medical Education 50 (9): 839-48.

Zaslavsky, A. M., N. D. Beaulieu, B. E. Landon, and P. D. Cleary. 2000. “Dimensions of Consumer-Assessed Quality of Medicare Managed Care Health Plans.” Medical Care 38 (2): 162-74.

PRACTITIONER APPLICATION

Frank D. Byrne, M.D., FACHE, president, St. Marys Hospital Medical Center, Madison, Wisconsin

Achieving exceptional patient satisfaction is a process, not the result of random acts of kindness and good intentions. Much has been written about attributes that correlate with overall patient satisfaction in the inpatient setting. Common, proprietary survey tools used to assess satisfaction with the inpatient experience typically include a correlation index that ranks attributes based on their impact on satisfaction. Otani, Kurz, and Harris have studied attributes of the primary healthcare experience and have correlated the impact of specific aspects of each attribute to overall patient satisfaction.

Knowledge of attributes and aspects of attributes is essential to the development of specific processes to achieve patient satisfaction. Increasingly, patients have service expectations because of the general trend toward consumerism, their financial stake in their healthcare expenses, and other factors. Many healthcare organizations have elegant service recovery programs to address patient complaints, but such programs are not adequate to ensure high levels of satisfaction. Consumer studies in non- healthcare settings estimate that only 1 in 20 dissatisfied customers makes a formal complaint; most dissatisfied customers just do not return.

Increased public reporting of patient satisfaction data underscores the importance of making and maintaining patients happy. One large employer found that sharing health plan satisfaction data with its employees led to a 27 percent swing in health plan enrollment, from the lowest ranked to the highest ranked plan, in just one open-enrollment period. As it is with inpatient care, effective communication is a major component of patient satisfaction efforts in the outpatient setting. This is evidenced by the high correlation of communication factors, such as “explanation of what was done for you” in the study.

A few words of caution in interpreting the results of this study are in order. First, the finding that access attributes did not correlate more strongly with patient satisfaction was surprising. Recent satisfaction data from other settings suggest a high correlation between ease of access and overall satisfaction, and outpatient settings that ease access by using techniques such as same-day scheduling of appointments report significant improvement in satisfaction. Perhaps access has increased in importance since the authors collected their data. This attribute warrants further study. second, the authors correctly state that patients frequently use the quality of their service experience and the courtesy with which they are treated as surrogates for clinical competence and quality. This trend should dissipate as patients increasingly obtain access to clinical quality data. Patients will have clear quality expectations from both the service and clinical dimensions of their healthcare experience.

The authors should be commended for their diligence in achieving a 53.9 percent response rate. Their confirmation that specific aspects of attributes of the primary care patient experience correlate with overall satisfaction will help organizations develop plans with defined outcome measures to help achieve patient satisfaction. Follow-up research into this topic could involve (1) repeating this study to see if aspect and attribute rankings have changed and (2) conducting a before-and-after study that assesses the impact of a process improvement that is designed to positively influence key attributes.

Copyright Health Administration Press Sep/Oct 2005

Ali-Frazier fight extracts dreadful price

By John Mehaffey

LONDON (Reuters) – Every element illustrating the heroism,
fascination and moral ambiguity of prize fighting fused in the
incandescent world title clash between Muhammad Ali and Joe
Frazier in the punishing humidity of Manila 30 years ago.

After 14 rounds of unremitting brutality and with the two
heavyweights on the verge of collapse, Frazier’s corner told
their man it was time to quit.

Frazier’s left eye was closed, he could barely see out of
his right and nothing he was likely to produce in the final
round was going to change the result.

Ali, slumped in his corner and drenched in sweat, had won
the third and most brutal fight against an opponent who forced
him to draw on resources his detractors believed he did not
possess.

A year after he astonished the world by vanquishing the
fearsome George Foreman, Ali was again king, indisputably the
greatest of his era and possibly of all time.

Victory in the ‘Thriller in Manila’ came with a literally
crippling price.

“He’s still beautiful outside,” said one of Ali’s medical
team at the time. “But what has it done to him inside?.”

The answer is chillingly apparent today as the man whose
wit and repartee matched the speed of his fists is imprisoned
in the mask of Parkinson’s syndrome, the mind still active but
the body irrevocably slowed after the impact of too many
punches.

Ali’s win over Foreman in Zaire, the famed ‘Rumble in the
Jungle’, still astounds after repeat viewings.

Resisting the urgent entreaties of his corner, Ali rested
on the ropes absorbing the punches of his increasingly
frustrated opponent on his arms and shoulders before a sudden,
savage assault floored the startled Foreman.

At 33, Ali had already passed the age when any boxer should
retire.

Driven by the twin imperatives of financial demands from
his expanding entourage and a healthy ego he agreed to a third
fight with Frazier, the man who beat him in 1971 after Ali had
lost his best years to a ban following his refusal to be
drafted into the army during the Vietnam war.

ELECTRIC ATMOSPHERE

Frazier, a proud and decent man who became world champion
by default when Ali was forced into exile, had won the Madison
Square Garden contest on merit.

Maybe something still rankled with Ali four years later
when he taunted Frazier before their Manila fight by comparing
him to a gorilla, a slur resented not only by his opponent but
also by many of Ali’s supporters.

When the pair finally stepped into the ring on October 1,
1975, the tension was palpable and the atmosphere electric in
one of the last great heavyweight fights of the 20th century.

Ali dominated the early rounds before Frazier hit him with
a left hook in the sixth which would have floored anybody else
on the planet.

Any lingering doubts among the onlookers about Ali’s
caliber as a boxer were extinguished when the fastest and
classiest heavyweight of any era showed he could take as well
as give a punch.

Frazier dominated the middle section of the bout as the two
men traded a lightning series of punches in the suffocating
humidity which made even breathing an effort.

But he could not land a decisive blow and in the 12th round
the incredibly resilient Ali counter-attacked, closing
Frazier’s left eye.

At the end of the penultimate round, Frazier’s corner had
seen enough.

“Joe, the fight’s over, I’m stopping it,” said his chief
cornerman Eddie Futch. “You’re taking too much punishment and I
don’t want you to take any more.”

Ali later paid a gracious tribute to the man who had forced
him to the limit.

“Of all the men I fought in boxing, Sonny Liston was the
scariest, George Foreman was the most powerful, Floyd Patterson
the most skilled.

“But the roughest and toughest was Joe Frazier. He brought
out the best in me and the best fight we fought was in Manila.”

Pakistan laments shifting sands of frontier battle

By Simon Cameron-Moore

PESHAWAR, Pakistan (Reuters) – “Lieutenant Seagoon,” barked
the commanding officer. “We have it on good authority from our
milkman that the besieged garrison at Fort Thud on the frontier
of Waziristan has lost its Union Jack.”

“You mean our troops don’t know what side they’re on?”
replied Seagoon in “Shifting Sands,” a 1957 episode of the
seminal BBC radio comedy “The Goon Show” set in the days of the
British Raj.

“They know which side they’re on, they just can’t prove
it!” countered the officer, Grytpype-Thynne, in Peter Sellers’
best stiff-upper-lip accent.

Seagoon: “Gad! It must be hell out there.”

Half a century on, in the real world, it still is. Loony
though the sketch is, it bears odd parallels to often heated
exchanges between Pakistani, U.S. and Afghan forces hunting al
Qaeda and Taliban insurgents along the rugged border between
Afghanistan and Pakistan’s restive tribal region of Waziristan.

Nearly 50 U.S. troops have been killed on the Afghan side
this year, while the Pakistan Army has lost almost 270 men and
killed more than 350 militants since deploying to the region in
late 2001.

The dangers posed by friendly fire and unauthorized
incursions only make it worse.

NO TRESPASSING

At the headquarters of the Pakistan Army’s 11th Corps in
Peshawar, Lt.-Gen. Safdar Hussain said he finally blew his top
this summer when artillery fire from U.S. coalition forces
exploded in the vicinity of his own troops.

“I told them straight: “Next time I’ll shoot at you,”
Hussain, who commands the army on the frontier, told Reuters.

Indeed, one Afghan soldier was shot dead by Pakistani
troops in the Angor Adda area of South Waziristan in recent
months, forcing a U.S. soldier to shout out to stop the firing.

“They trespassed into my territory and, despite a warning
shot, they kept penetrating into Pakistani territory and we had
no option but to shoot to kill,” Hussain said.

Soldiers in the frontier region have never known where the
next shot might come from, which the Goons also touched upon
with absurdist poignancy.

“Through the long night the Waziris attacked, firing their
bullets from the hidden positions inside their rifle barrels.”

It’s not just ground violations and friendly fire that
peeves Pakistan. U.S. aircraft loop over the border with such
frequency that Hussain doubts it is inadvertent, although the
number of incidents has tailed off since Pakistan protested in
August at a meeting of the Tripartite Commission on border
security.

Hussain says he gave the U.S.-led coalition forces a clear
message: “You take care of your area. We are quite capable of
taking care of our area.”

A U.S. Army spokesman in Kabul said he could not speak
about the past but added that there were concerted efforts to
improve communications on the ground in order to avoid
problems.

“We do everything in our power to coordinate with the
Pakistan military. But we will respond in kind to enemy firing
on us from across the border. The Pakistan military commanders
understand that,” Colonel James Yonts said.

On July 14, U.S. fire from Afghanistan killed 24 suspected
militants near Lawara Mandi, a North Waziristan village.
Thousands of tribesmen protested at funerals for the dead, and
some clerics never miss a chance to stoke bad feeling.

“If the Pakistan government gives us permission, we are
ready to wipe out the Americans from Afghanistan, because they
are enemies of Islam,” Maulana Abdul Khaliq told followers at
Madrasa Gulshan-e-Ilm in Miranshah, the main town in North
Waziristan.

Such incidents make it harder to keep a lid on sentiment in
North Waziristan, where the Pakistan Army is trying to fight
terrorism through stealth rather than the direct offensives
that led to heavy casualties in South Waziristan last year.

INACCURATE MAPS

About 80,000 Pakistani troops are deployed along the
frontier and Pakistani border posts easily outnumber those
established by the 20,000-strong U.S.-led coalition force and
Afghan army.

“The upsurge in Afghanistan — this is because of lack of
grip by the coalition forces and Afghan National Army,” said
Hussain, who has imposed a nightly curfew within 3 miles of the
border.

Stung by complaints that Pakistan could have done more to
stop the Taliban this summer, President Pervez Musharraf
proposed erecting a fence along parts of the 1,500-mile border
when he met U.S. Secretary of State Condoleezza Rice this
month.

Afghan President Hamid Karzai says it is impractical. The
frontier, known as the Durand Line after the colonial
administrator who drew the line on a map separating British
India from Afghanistan in the 19th Century, is disputed.

“So far it not clear where our border is. The demarcation
should be established first through international laws, for in
several places there have been violations of our territory,”
Afghan Interior Ministry spokesman Lutfullah Mashal said.

Hussain said part of the problem is that Afghan troops use
inaccurate Russian maps even though, if they do not trust
Pakistani maps, they could refer to global positioning systems.

The disorienting qualities of Waziristan’s desert and
mountains is the stuff Goons’ material was made of.

Lieutenant Seagoon: “Sorry I’m late, gentlemen, but your
fort is 20 miles further north than it says on the map.”

Colonel Chinstrap: “Twenty miles north? Then it’s happened
again. This fort was built on shifting sands…”

Official report slams Canada over environment

By David Ljunggren

OTTAWA (Reuters) – Canadians are being forced to drink
unsafe water, fish stocks are endangered and national parks are
under threat because Ottawa is doing a very poor job of
protecting the environment, according to an official report
issued on Thursday.

The stinging document by Johanne Gelinas, Canada’s
environment commissioner, makes grim reading for a Liberal
government already under fire for what critics say is its
patchy environmental record.

Gelinas said government initiatives on ensuring sustainable
development were regularly undermined by bad management.

“A recurring theme throughout this year’s report is that
the federal government suffers from a chronic inability to see
its own initiatives to completion. It starts out but rarely, if
ever, reaches the finish line,” she wrote.

“This is not good news, given the mounting evidence that we
are on an unsustainable path.”

Gelinas blamed government mismanagement for serious
problems with water quality, especially among aboriginals
living on reserves where living conditions are poor.

“Not all Canadians can assume that their drinking water in
always safe. The government is not working hard enough to
protect Canadians from unsafe drinking water,” she said.

Budget cuts meant that health inspectors were no longer
examining water on board airliners, which posed a potential
risk to millions of passengers, she added.

The report is bad publicity for Ottawa as its prepares to
host an international meeting in November on how to draw up a
successor to the Kyoto accord on climate change.

The existing agreement obliges Canada to cut the output of
greenhouse gases by 6 percent from 1990 levels by 2012 but
Canada’s overall emissions in 2003 were in fact 24 percent
above 1990 levels.

Rick Smith, director of the Environmental Defense group,
said that in the course of a decade Canada had become an
international environmental delinquent.

“Canada is at the bottom of the barrel when it comes to
environmental performance among industrialized nations,” he
told Reuters.

“The federal government is completely out of step with
where Canadians are at on the environment… Canadians have let
(Ottawa) get away with talk as opposed to action.”

Environment Minister Stephane Dion is due to comment on the
report later on Thursday.

Gelinas was particularly critical of Ottawa’s long-standing
failure to follow its own plans to set up marine areas to
protect shrinking fish stocks.

She also said inadequate planning for an increased number
of visitors meant “the health of Canada’s national parks is in
danger,” while the federal government — which spent C$13
billion on goods and services in 2003 — should insist
suppliers were committed to sustainable development.

“It is astounding that the government has been promising a
policy to direct departments to green their procurement for
over a decade — and the policy is still not ready,” she said.

Parents Right to Say ‘Don’t Jump on Bed’

NEW YORK — The case of a 9-year-old boy whose foot was pierced by a mattress wire while jumping on the bed gives parents another good reason to tell their children not to do it.

“All of us who have children try to keep kids from jumping on beds for fear of them falling, but this is an additional reason to try to stop kids from jumping on beds,” Dr. Dante Pappano, of the University of Rochester in Rochester, New York, told Reuters Health.

While only limited research is available, it suggests that serious injury from jumping on the bed is rare. In one of those rare instances, however, a young child fractured the sternum and in another, a child died by accidental hanging when a lanyard worn around the neck caught on a bedpost as the child jumped on the bed.

Traumatic injuries related to falls from the bed, however, are well reported in scientific literature. Further, such injuries, including dislocations and lacerations, are similar to those experienced by children jumping on a trampoline or on a bed, Pappano writes in the medical journal Pediatric Emergence Care.

In his report, Pappano describes the case of a boy who was brought to the emergency department with a “wire caught in his foot.” The wire, from the mattress, had become embedded in his right foot as a result of his jumping on the bed, and at-home attempts to remove it had been unsuccessful.

An X-ray revealed that the wire’s resistance to removal was due to its hook-like shape in the end embedded under the skin. The wire was later successfully removed by surgery.

This type of injury has not previously been reported, Pappano writes, and it is unique to the particular activity of jumping on the bed.

The way older mattresses were made allows wires to break under stress. “Newer mattresses will not allow this sort of injury,” Pappano told Reuters Health.

“Modern mattress construction obviates the possibility of this kind of injury such that as old mattresses continue to be discarded the risk of this sort of injury will disappear,” he explained.

“However,” Pappano added, “other injuries, especially head, neck and limb injuries may occur from jumping, then falling from beds.”

SOURCE: Pediatric Emergence Care, August 2005.

Nursing the Unconscious Patient

By Geraghty, Max

Summary

Unconscious patients are nursed in a variety of clinical settings and therefore it is necessary for all nurses to assess, plan and implement the nursing care of this vulnerable patient group. This article discusses the nursing management of patients who are unconscious and examines the priorities of patient care.

Keywords

Head injuries; Nursing: role; Patient assessment; Unconsciousness

These keywords are based on the subject headings from the British Nursing Index. This article has been subject to double-blind review. For related articles and author guidelines visit our online archive at www.nursing-standard.co.uk and search using the keywords.

Aim and intended learning outcomes

The aim of this article is to explore the long-term care needs of the unconscious patient and the related nursing management. It will also discuss the emergency priorities that may arise. After reading this article you should be able to:

* Define consciousness and have an understanding of the related anatomy and physiology.

* Discuss the various levels of impaired consciousness.

* List the causes of unconsciousness.

* Identify the needs of the unconscious patient.

* Prioritise patient care, recognising the skills required for the assessment, planning and implementation of nursing care.

* Reflect on how the nursing skills needed to care for the unconscious patient can be used to enhance practice in other areas of nursing.

Introduction

Nursing the unconscious patient can be a challenging experience. Unconscious patients have no control over themselves or their environment and thus are highly dependent on the nurse. The skills required to care for unconscious patients are not specific to critical care and theatres as unconscious patients are nursed in a variety of clinical settings. Nursing such patients can be a source of anxiety for nurses. However, with a good knowledge base to initiate the assessment, planning and implementation of quality care, nursing patients who are unconscious can prove highly rewarding, and the skills acquired can promote confidence in the care of all patients.

Unconsciousness spans a broad spectrum (Hickey 2003a), from momentary loss of consciousness as seen with fainting, to prolonged coma that may last weeks, months or even years. The causes of unconsciousness will dictate the length of the coma and the prognosis. Yet the immediate and ongoing needs of the unconscious patient are similar, whatever the underlying cause.

Defining consciousness and aspects of anatomy and physiology

To understand consciousness it is necessary to have an appreciation of the complexity of the related anatomy and physiology, as normal conscious behaviour is dependent on an intact and fully functioning brain (Pemberton 2000). Therefore, the manifestation of impaired or absent consciousness points towards an underlying brain dysfunction.

Consciousness is a function of the reticular formation (RF), which has its origins in the brainstem (Barker 2002). The RF is a network of neurones that connect with the spinal cord, cerebellum, thalamus and hypothalamus. All sensory pathways link into the RF (Fitzgerald 1996). The reticular activating system (RAS) is a feature of the RF and is responsible for arousal from sleep and maintaining consciousness (Fitzgerald 1996). The RAS has a large number of projections that are linked to the cerebral cortex (Pemberton 2000) and are concerned with the arousal of the brain during sleep and wakefulness (Fitzgerald 1996) (Figure 1). Awareness is the result of the combined activity of the RF, RAS and higher cortical function. The two main identified parts of the RAS are the mesencephalon (upper pons and mid-brain) and the thalamus. Signals from specific parts of the thalamus initiate activity in specific parts of the cerebral cortex, as opposed to the diffuse flow of impulses from the mesencephalon that causes generalised cerebral activity (Pemberton 2000). This process of selection prevents the cerebral cortex from receiving too much information at once, thus possibly playing a part in directing an individual’s attention to specific mental activities (Hickey2003b).

The arousal reaction is dependent on the stimulation of the RAS. The RAS receives input signals from a wide range of sources, including the senses (Pemberton 2000). The RAS serves as a point of convergence for signals from our external environment and our internal thoughts and feelings. For example, when an individual is in a deep sleep the RAS is in a dormant state. However, a loud noise or noxious stimulus will wake us. Our emotional response and reasoning to such a stimulus will ‘modify’ the RAS positively or negatively as the RAS is also stimulated by the cerebral cortex (Pemberton 2000).

There are many pathways from the cerebral cortex that concern sensory and motor function, as well as emotions and reasoning. Whenever these areas become excited impulses are transmitted to the RAS, further increasing the level of activity, and in turn the RAS stimulates the cerebral cortex, thus increasing the excitation of both regions. The number of pathways that become activated is also related to the level of consciousness. If one pathway is activated the degree of consciousness may be minimal, however, if many pathways are activated simultaneously then this may result in a high level of consciousness. Consciousness demonstrates that the RAS is functioning and is capable of the screening and discrimination of information (Pemberton 2000).

Consciousness can be defined as a state of awareness of one’s self and the environment (Barker 2002). A conscious person is capable of responding to sensory stimuli. Alternatively, coma is a total absence of awareness of one’s self and the environment. A person in a coma is unrousable and unresponsive to external stimuli. For example, when a person is asleep he or she can be aroused by external stimuli, but this does not occur when a person is in a coma. This suggests that consciousness depends on whether the individual can be aroused to wakefulness. However, between the poles of consciousness and unconsciousness there is a continuum of differing states of impaired consciousness.

Impaired consciousness

There are acute and chronic states of impaired consciousness. Acute states are potentially reversible, whereas chronic states indicate underlying brain damage and hence are irreversible (Pemberton 2000). Acute states are generally caused by metabolic upsets, such as hypoglycaemia or drug intoxication, which alter brain function.

FIGURE 1

A mid-sagittal view of the reticular activating system and related structures

A clouding of consciousness suggests interference with the integrity of the RAS, with a resultant effect on the arousal response. This can cause unusual behaviour, ranging from irritability and confusion, to poor concentration and drowsiness (Pemberton 2000). The changes can be subtle at first and difficult to recognise. Delirium is similar to clouding of consciousness, although a person who is delirious may also present with psychological manifestations, such as illusions, hallucinations and delusions.

A shadow on the wall that takes the form of an animal, or a noise that is misinterpreted as a stranger coming to cause harm, are examples of illusional states (Pemberton 2000). Hallucinations are defined as the sight or sound of something in the absence of any sensory stimuli, such as hearing voices or seeing objects that do not exist. Delusions are more persistent misperceptions that are held to be real, however illogical they may seem (Hickey 2003b). Lethargy is characterised by slow and sluggish speech, mental processes and motor activities. The obtunded patient may be readily reusable but can only respond verbally with a word or two, and can only follow simple commands. Stupor describes a state of near unrousability that requires vigorous or repeated stimulus to illicit a response (Hickey 2003b).

The categorisation of the different graduations of coma is not universally accepted. The difference between each definition is the degree and presentation of response to painful stimuli (Hickey 2003b). However, terms such as semi-coma and deep coma are still used in clinical practice.

Assessment of consciousness

A variety of scales have been devised to describe patients’ level of consciousness (Barker 2002). However, the Glasgow Coma Scale (GCS) (Jennett and Teasdale 1977) is the most universally accepted tool, which decreases the subjectivity and confusion associated with assessing levels of consciousness (Hickey 2003b). The GCS has been used as a prognostic device during immediate assessment following a head injury. The lower the score the poorer the prognosis. The GCS gives practitioners an internationally accepted format that assists communication, minimises user interpretation, and rapidly detects change in the patient’s condition (Howarth 2004). National guidelines indicate that the GCS should be used to assess all brain- injured patients (National Institute for Clinical Excellence (NICE) 2003).

The GCS forms a quick, objective and easily interpreted mode of neurological assessment, avoiding subjective terminology, such as ‘stupor’ and ‘semi-coma’. As it is the internationally agreed common language in neurological assessment, it is essential that it is completed accurately, and that any uncertainties are reported immediately (Hickey 2003b). The GCS meas\ures the degree of consciousness under three distinct categories, and each category is further subdivided and given a score as shown in Box 1 (see also the version adapted by NICE 2003).

The regularity with which observations should be undertaken is determined by the severity of the patient’s condition (Cree 2003). Guidelines for the head-injured patient are geared towards identification of any potentially rapid deterioration and suggest that observations should be undertaken every 30 minutes until the GCS reaches 15 or the patient’s condition stabilises (NICE 2003). After this, observations should continue hourly for four hours, returning to every 30 minutes if the patient’s condition deteriorates. If the patient remains stable on hourly GCS assessment for four hours, the observations can be reduced to every two hours (NICE 2003). However, these recommendations cannot be generalised and each patient needs to be individually assessed. The GCS may be misleading in patients who are hypoxic, haemodynamically shocked, fitting or post-ictal, showing little or no response. Therefore, it is important to re-evaluate patients once any underlying acute condition has been corrected (Dawson2000).

BOX 1

The Glasgow Coma Scale

The accuracy of the GCS is dependent on the assessor using and interpreting it correctly. The nurse must become familiar with the tool and studies suggest that its use should be taught in detail to ensure accuracy of rating by nurses (Heron et al 2001). The reader should refer to the referenced literature for more information and seek to gain practical experience in the clinical environment (Shah 1999, Cree 2003,Howarth2004).

Causes of unconsciousness

There are many different causes of unconsciousness. Some examples are shown in Box 2; however, these are by no means exhaustive. The causes of unconsciousness may dictate the length of the coma and the prognosis (Mallett and Dougherty 2000). Unconsciousness occurs when the RAS is damaged or inhibited, thus affecting the normal arousal mechanism (Pemberton 2000). Intrinsic factors that affect the nervous system directly can be seen as primary causes. secondary causes most often involve other body systems compromising metabolic and endocrine homeostasis. Unconsciousness may be sudden, for example, following an acute head injury, or it may be gradual, for example, with the onset of poisoning or a deranged metabolism, as in hypoxia or hypoglycaemia.

It is also important to remember that unconsciousness may be induced, for example, the use of anaesthetics for surgical or medical intervention. Another example of this is in critical care units, such as intensive care, where an anaesthetist will intervene and induce unconsciousness pharmacologically to allow for emergency intervention to stop a decline in a patient’s condition.

Emergency priorities

The unconscious patient will require skilled emergency management. As a patient starts to become unconscious he or she loses control of his or her ability to maintain a safe environment. It cannot be stressed enough that the nurse has a crucial responsibility to anticipate, where possible, deterioration in a patient’s condition (Nursing and Midwifery Council (NMC) 2004). Thus, in relation to consciousness, the nurse has an essential role in the assessment of the central nervous system using the GCS, monitoring vital signs, pupillary reaction and limb movements. Such skills will provide information that can allow for interventions to arrest a life-threatening deterioration and potentially avert a decline to unconsciousness. The A (airway), B (breathing), C (circulation), D (disability) approach to resuscitation should be adopted, and the maintenance of a clear airway is the first priority (Colquhoun et al 2004). Noisy snoring or harsh breathing sounds may be a sign that the airway is being compromised.

If the patient is still breathing spontaneously and does not require further resuscitation then appropriate positioning of the patient, using the recovery position, will prevent vomit or any secretion from obstructing the airway, potentially causing aspiration (Colquhoun et al 2004). The use of an artificial airway, such as a Guedel, and the removal of secretions through suction will ensure that the airway remains patent (Pemberton 2000).

The unconscious patient is a medical emergency (Pemberton 2000). The nurse needs to work closely with the medical team to ensure that the right pathways of medical management are applied appropriately. The possible underlying cause will dictate immediate medical management which may include: the administration of oxygen to maintain tissue perfusion; fluids to support cardiovascular function and correct metabolic derangement; and the administration of intravenous (IV) medications, such as phenytoin in the presence of seizures. The nurse skilled in phlebotomy will be required to take blood for laboratory tests that will ascertain the presence of drugs if overdose is suspected.

BOX 2

Causes of unconsciousness

Physical examination can give many clues as to the cause of unconsciousness. For example, a bitten tongue may indicate an epileptic seizure, or needle marks on the lower limbs or abdomen could be because the patient has insulin-dependent diabetes (Fuller 2004). A patient’s medical history is of vital importance and, if not already known, friends and relatives can be of assistance in this endeavour. Many people who have life-threatening conditions that can precipitate unconsciousness, such as epilepsy or allergies to penicillin, may be wearing bracelets that inform medical practitioners (Fuller 2004).

Anyone accompanying an unconscious patient to hospital will require support and information. Witnessing the events leading to someone losing consciousness can be very distressing. A nurse not involved in the immediate care of the patient should be allocated to take responsibility for providing this support (Pemberton 2000).

If the patient does not regain immediate consciousness then his or her ongoing needs will need to be assessed. This may demand that the patient be moved to an intensive care unit (ICU) to allow for critical management. Whether the patient is in a critical care bed or on the ward, the ongoing needs and priorities remain unchanged.

BOX 3

Case study 1

Ongoing nursing management

The human body is designed for physical activity and movement; thus, physiological changes will occur in the unconscious patient, which will be exacerbated by the length of immobility, cause of unconsciousness and the quality of care (Dougherty and Lister 2004). Thus, in addition to managing the underlying cause of unconsciousness, the nurse should also implement a framework of care that seeks to prevent further complications. To do this he or she needs to understand the effects of prolonged immobility on the main systems of the body.

Effects of prolonged immobility The morbidity of immobility is directly associated with the length of time the patient is immobile and other underlying patient risk factors (Hickey 2003a), such as incontinence, poor nutrition, hypotension, infection, obesity, old age and organ failure (Wunderlich 2002a, Hickey 2003a). Older patients in particular are vulnerable to the detrimental effects of prolonged immobility. Physiological changes that occur over short periods of immobility are less severe and potentially reversible. Prolonged periods result in increased pathophysiological changes associated with increased morbidity and permanent disabilities (Hickey 2003a). Thus, the effects of immobility give rise to many of the complications in the unconscious patient, hence the need for the implementation of a broad range of nursing skills.

Respiratory function Maintaining a patent airway and promoting adequate ventilation are nursing priorities. Assessment of the mouth and teeth is also important. Dentures should be removed and note made of any loose teeth or crowns that may become dislodged and compromise the airway. The inability to maintain a patent airway means that aspiration of fluids, from oral secretions, blood in the presence of trauma, or vomit is a potential risk that may cause further complications, for example, chest infection. The insertion of a nasogastric tube in the early stages of unconsciousness will allow removal of gastric contents, thus reducing the risk of aspiration.

Oropharyngeal airways, such as the Guedel airway, have many benefits (Pemberton 2000). They are easy to insert, prevent the tongue from obstructing the airway, provide a passage that allows the patient to breathe, and allows the nurse to remove secretions from the trachea through suctioning. A nasopharyngeal airway also allows the clearance of secretions using suction (Moore 2004), can be inserted if the use of an oropharyngeal airway is contraindicated, for example, in patients with trauma to the mandible or oral cavity. Suctioning should be undertaken with care, following appropriate patient assessment to establish the need for intervention. Suctioning has associated contraindications and unwanted effects, for example, a rise in intracranial pressure (Moore 2004). The reader should refer to the article by Moore (2004) to gain a better understanding of this skill.

Positioning the patient is important and will facilitate the drainage of secretions. The supine position compromises the mechanics of breathing and lung volumes (Hickey 2003a). Tidal volumes -the volume of air that passes in and out of the lungs during normal quiet breathing- may not be compromised, depending on any underlying respiratory pathology, but generally lying flat causes a reduction in the residual volume and functional residual capacity of the lungs (Hickey 2003a). This can lead to partial or complete collapse of parts of the lung (atelectasis), as well as poor ventilation, which can result in hypoxia. The accumulation of secretions over time can contribute to the development o\f atelectasis and hypostatic pneumonia (Hickey 2003a). Correct positioning of the unconscious patient also minimises the risks associated with immobility in terms of circulation and the musculoskeletal system (Wunderlich 2002b).

To maintain a patent airway the lateral recumbent position is advised (Allan 2002) with the head of the bed slightly tilted upwards, about 10-30 degrees (Pemberton 2000) (Figure 2). It is important to recognise that such positioning is the ideal and may be contraindicated by an underlying condition, for example, a spinal or an underlying brain injury. Wherever there is a threat to the airway that cannot be resolved by repositioning and the clearance of secretions, the insertion of an endotracheal tube will be necessary, to protect the airway from aspiration and the associated risk of infection (Pemberton 2000). If unconsciousness is prolonged and an artificial airway is still required then a tracheostomy should be considered (Hooper 1996).

The patient may require the administration of oxygen therapy. Oxygen can be delivered using different types of equipment and humidification is advised, where possible, to warm and moisten its delivery and to prevent drying of secretions (Dougherty and Lister 2004). Physiotherapy is important to encourage lung expansion, assist the removal of secretions and help in the prevention of complications. Atelectasis and pneumonia are long established consequences of prolonged bedrest (Hickey 2003a). The pooling of secretions leads to hypostatic pneumonia which creates an ideal environment for the growth of bacteria (Hickey 2003b). The collapse of lung tissue and the effects of secretions will impair gaseous exchange.

Pulse oximetry will aid the ongoing monitoring of respiratory function. Oxygen saturation is a measure of the percentage of haemoglobin molecules that combine with oxygen. Pulse oximetry assists in monitoring the effectiveness of oxygen therapy (Dougherty and Lister 2004 ). Changes in the pattern of breathing may indicate a developing respiratory failure, or a disorder of the respiratory control centre in the brain (Dawson 2000). Close monitoring of the patient’s respiratory function is important and any changes should be reported.

Cardiovascular function Monitoring the cardiovascular function in unconscious patients is of high importance. Alterations in blood pressure need to be viewed in relation to pulse rate, pulse quality and pulse pressure (Hickey 2003a). For example, a low blood pressure in the presence of a tachycardia with a pulse that feels weak on palpation may indicate hypovolaemia. Change can be indicative of neurological deterioration and such observations need to be balanced with neurological assessment to obtain a more accurate evaluation. Hypotension is rarely characteristic of brain injury alone, except in the terminal stages of herniation (Dawson 2000), and changes in vital signs can be related to other physiological factors, for example, hypovolaemia, sepsis or cardiogenic shock. However, the effects of immobility can cause changes in cardiovascular function with increased cardiac workload and central fluid shifts from the legs to the thorax and head (Dougherty and Lister 2004).

The risk of venous thromboembolism and pulmonary emboli from the effects of immobility is well recognised (Dougherty and Lister 2004). The use of antiembolic stockings should be considered once the risk of venous thromboembolism has been identified (Bryne 2002). Thrombus formation is caused by venous stasis, decreased vasomotor tone, pressure on the blood vessels and a hypercoagulable state (Hickey 2003a). Antiembolic stockings increase the velocity of flow not only in the legs but also in the pelvic veins and inferior vena cava, particularly when thigh-length stockings are used (Hayes et al 2002). Liaison with the physiotherapist will also be of benefit, as the introduction of passive limb movements will encourage blood flow back to the heart as well as having positive musculoskeletal effects. The administration of an anticoagulant will also reduce the risks of venous thromboembolism (Casey 2003).

Nutrition and hydration Nutrition is a fundamental human need and yet evidence suggests that up to 40 per cent of hospital patients remain malnourished (Pearce and Duncan 2002). The unconscious patient is dependent on the healthcare team to deliver the correct nutritional requirements. Therefore, regular blood and urine tests to monitor electrolyte and metabolic changes are essential to promote accurate assessment of each individual patient.

Obtaining a 24-hour urine collection is an important means of assessing the protein needs of the unconscious patient. Nitrogen is lost from the body when protein is broken down. If nitrogen loss exceeds supply then catabolism (muscle breakdown) occurs. If uncorrected this will compromise breathing by wasting respiratory and skeletal muscles (Woodrow 2004).

Immobility also alters glucose-insulin intolerance. An IV insulin sliding-scale regimen may be required to maintain blood glucose levels within the normal range of 4-7mmol/l (Cowan 1997). Close monitoring of glucose levels is essential to ensure that this range is maintained. Another example of altered metabolism is the increased excretion of calcium from bones as a result of reduced weight bearing and inactivity (Hickey 2003a).

The delivery of nutritional requirements is best achieved enterally as the parenteral route has the disadvantages of expense, increased risk of infection from IV cannulation, and gut atrophy and translocation of gut bacteria from non-use of the digestive tract (Woodrow 2004). Enterai feeding can prevent this by averting atrophy of the villi that absorb nutrients and produce protective mucus and immunoglobuhns. Any enterai feeding regimen should encompass a rest period to allow for gastric acidity to return to its normal level (approximately pH 4.0), thus reducing the risks of bacterial colonisation (Woodrow 2004).

Enterai feeding can be administered in a variety of ways and the most appropriate means needs to be decided following assessment of the unconscious patient. Nasogastric feeding is the most commonly used method and is recommended for short-term feeding (less than four weeks) (Dougherty and Lister 2004). Fine bore tubes should be used where possible as they are associated with a lower incidence of complications, such as rhinitis, oesophageal irritation and gastritis, than wide bore tubes (Payne-James et al 2001). It is important to remember that unconscious patients will not be able to communicate whether a feeding tube is in the wrong place. Therefore, care must be taken to ensure that it has been inserted correctly. A chest X-ray is required to confirm the position of the guide wire, to confirm that it has not been inadvertently inserted into the lungs (Dougherty and Lister 2004).

Nasoduodenal, nasojejunal, percutaneous endoscopie gastrostomy or jejunostomy tubes may be indicated if the patient’s condition contraindicates direct gastric feeding, for example, acute pancreatitis (Pearce and Duncan 2002). A gastrostomy may be more appropriate if enterai feeding is required for longer periods, thus removing the risks associated with nasally inserted tubes. Percutaneous endoscopically guided gastrostomy tubes are the most common of this type (Payne-James et al 2001).

Nutritional requirements may be affected by underlying conditions that increase normal metabolic demand or require further supplements, for example, sepsis, loss of fluids and electrolytes from diarrhoea or drainage, or tissue repair following trauma ( Woodrow 2004). Liaison with dieticians will assist in the ongoing assessment and planning the patient’s nutritional needs.

Water has many functions within the body that are essential to maintaining health and sustaining life, for example, giving form to body structures and acting as a medium for nutrients and electrolytes. Therefore, accurate fluid balance should be monitored and recorded to allow the identification of potential fluid or electrolyte imbalances (Gobbi and Torrance 2000).

Gastrointestinal function Bowel action is likely to become irregular in the unconscious patient, thus monitoring and observation are important. Loose stool can be a result of poorly tolerated enterai feeding. Diarrhoea is caused when there is more fluid entering the bowel than the bowel can absorb during transit. Increased water in the gut or a decreased ability to absorb fluid can result in diarrhoea. Antibiotics can exacerbate this by destroying gut commensals (Woodrow 2004).

Constipation and faecal impaction are also common in immobile, unconscious patients as normal stimulants to peristalsis, such as physical activity, are absent. Constipation not only causes discomfort, but also increases intra-abdominal pressure which will result in an unwanted rise in intracranial pressure and the potential of further neurological impairment (Cree 2003). Enterai feeding will not stimulate peristalsis (Hickey 2003a). Consequently, the introduction of a regular laxative is often required to assist evacuation of the bowel contents (Pemberton 2000).

Monitoring bowel function with the use of a chart will help to assess the need for intervention. Enterai laxatives on their own may not be sufficient and the introduction of rectal preparations such as suppositories and enemas may be necessary. Manual evacuation (the digital removal of faecal matter) is an invasive intervention that is now considered a nursing role. However, it is not without risks. For example, stimulation of the vagus nerve in the rectal wall can slow the patient’s heart (Powell and Rigby 2000). There is minimal information on this invasive procedure in the nursing literature. However, Fader ( 1997) suggests that manual evacuation should only be undertaken when other methods of bowel evacuation have failed. Nurses are accountable for their practice and a\ppropriate training should be undertaken before this procedure is carried out.

Genitourinary function An unconscious patient will be incontinent of urine. A urinary catheter should be considered if the state of unconsciousness is not resolved quickly. This helps to retain patient dignity, allows close monitoring of urinary output and prevents skin breakdown. However, introduction of a urinary catheter increases the risk of infection (Getliffe 1996). Bed rest also increases urinary stasis in the renal pelvis and urinary bladder further exacerbating the risk of urinary tract infection (Hickey 2003a). Alternatives to managing incontinence should be considered, for example, the use of a urinary sheath or incontinence pads. However, it is important that the benefits of these interventions are considered against the associated risks of compromised skin integrity and poor fluid monitoring.

Hygiene needs and skin care Attending to the hygiene needs of the unconscious patient should never become ritualistic, and despite the patient’s perceived lack of awareness, dignity should not be compromised. Personal hygiene is considered part of The Essence of Care (Department of Health (DH) 2001a) and needs to be carried out to an uncompromising standard. Involving the family – whether to assist with hygiene practices or in helping to gain an understanding of the patient’s personal hygiene requirements – can help to turn the routine of bed bathing into an opportunity to reflect on the patient’s individual needs.

The skin forms a protective barrier against infection and regulates body temperature. It also provides some cushioning to bony prominences. Sustained pressure from immobilisation remains the most important cause of skin breakdown (Hickey 2003a). Correct positioning, regular turning and use of a pressure-relieving mattress will help to reduce these risks (Dougherty and Lister 2004). Incontinence, perspiration, poor nutrition, obesity and old age also contribute to the formation of pressure ulcers. Therefore, an assessment tool, such as the Waterlow scale, should be used to aid early identification of the risks (Waterlow 1991, 1998).

Care should be taken to examine the skin properly, noting any areas which are red, dry or broken. Following any washing procedure, it is important to ensure that the skin is dry as this will minimise the risk of loss of skin integrity. Fingernails and toenails also need to be assessed for length and cleanliness, and ongoing care may require consultation by a chiropodist. Ensuring that the skin is dry between the toes will help to minimise fungal infection. It is important to remember that chronic illnesses, such as diabetes, can increase the risk of ulceration in the extremities (Tyrrell 2002).

Minimum standards and methods of oral hygiene have been debated in the literature (Evans 2001). Research focusing on oral problems associated with cancer suggests a minimum of four-hourly interventions to reduce the potential of infection from micro- organisms. Hourly interventions will help to moisten the membranes of patients who mouth breathe or require oxygen therapy (Krishnasamy 1995). The literature suggests that using a toothbrush and toothpaste is the most effective way of removing dental plaque but care should be taken not to damage the gingiva by using excessive force (Dougherty and Lister 2004).

The delicate surfaces and structures of the eye are protected by tears that maintain moisture, however, the unconscious patient is at risk of drying of the eye. In assessing the eyes, observe for signs of irritation, corneal drying, abrasions and oedema. Gentle cleaning with gauze and 0.9% sodium chloride should be sufficient to prevent infection. Artificial tears can also be applied as drops to help moisten the eyes (Dougherty and Lister 2004).

Gentle cleaning of the nasal mucosa with gauze and water will help remove the build up of debris and maintain a moist environment. If a nasogastric tube is inserted attention should be paid to the surrounding area as damage to the mucosa from pressure can occur (Bonomini 2003). Gauze and water can also be used to clean around the aural canal, although care must be taken not to push anything inside the ear. The nurse should give proper attention to the hygiene needs of the unconscious patient to promote comfort. In so doing the nurse should be able to provide a clear rationale for all care procedures.

BOX 4

Case study 2

Communication The NHS Plan (DH 200Ib) calls for the further development of communication skills among healthcare professionals as the need for effective communication is increasingly recognised. Communication between individuals is a broad and varied experience. Active listening is one of the most important communication skills in the healthcare setting (Bailey and Wilkinson 1998, McConnell 2001).

Although verbal communication with an unconscious patient is a one-sided experience, the nurse needs to be perceptive of the patient’s nonverbal signals. Elliott and Wright ( 1999) concluded from their studies of nurse-patient communication that the nurse’s level of interaction with patients is determined by the level of the patient’s responsi veness. They encourage healthcare practitioners to maintain verbal communication with the unconscious patient.

Studies exploring the recollection of the unconscious patient following a return to consciousness are predominantly concerned with sedated critical care patients, for example, Green (1996). However, there is evidence that patients can recall with accuracy conversations that have taken place while unconscious (Pemberton 2000). Nurses should be verbally reassuring and explain all procedures to unconscious patients.

It is not only the content of what is said that is important but also how it is said. Tone of voice conveys the emotion that is behind what is being communicated. The nurse should be aware of betraying, through his or her tone of voice, feelings and opinions that may intimidate or diminish the patient (Webb 1994). Non-verbal communication, such as facial expression, eye contact, posture, personal space and bodily contact, is important in social interaction. Non-verbal cues are often the first elements of communication that help us to form immediate impressions about someone (Webb 1994). For patients with impaired consciousness touch, combined with kind and comforting words, can be a valuable means of providing reassurance. However, as with any aspect of care, this needs to be assessed individually as touch can also be interpreted as invasive or threatening (Woodrow 2000).

Understanding a patient’s perception and interpretation of his or her experience when consciousness is impaired is not always possible. However, reported experiences describe threatening and frightening hallucinations. This may explain why patients with impaired consciousness sometimes display inappropriate behaviour such as fear and/or aggression ( Woodrow 2000). Gauging appropriate communication requirements demands an understanding of the patient, hence the patient’s family can be a valuable resource in helping the nurse to become more informed about the patient’s life, his or her personality, and his or her wishes and desires. Communicating with relatives can aid and enhance the nurse-patient relationship by fostering understanding and empathy. A brief summary of the nursing management of the unconscious patient is provided in Box 5.

BOX 5

Nursing management of the unconscious patient

Conclusion

The unconscious patient places a demand on resources, notably time and staff. Juggling such demands while ensuring that a safe and caring environment is maintained are managerial challenges. Completion of a risk assessment may help to highlight any potential compromise to the maintenance of a safe environment.

Depending on the underlying condition, the unconscious patient may never fully recover or may die from complicating factors. This can be demoralising for the nurse, especially after a long period of committed nursing care. However, the patient may recover fully which can be a rewarding and uplifting experience. Either way, a committed focus on maintaining a high standard of care and promoting dignity throughout, regardless of the outcome, remain paramount

NS309 Geraghty M (2005) Nursing the unconscious patient. Nursing Standard. 20, 1, 54-64. Date of acceptance: July 18 2005.

Time out 1

In your own words describe the function of the reticular activating system and define consciousness.

Time out 2

Think of a patient with impaired consciousness you have nursed. Reflect on your experience and the underlying causes that led to impairment in that patient’s consciousness. Describe the patient’s physical and emotional behaviour. What did you find challenging about nursing this patient?

Time out 3

Reflect on your experience of the Glasgow Coma Scale. How confident do you feel in using the tool in practice? What policies are available in your workplace to assist and guide its application? Do they meet the NICE (2003) guidelines?

Time out 4

Read the case example in Box 3. List the immediate nursing priorities.

FIGURE 2

Positioning the unconscious patient

Attention is given to good body alignment, to help prevent contractures, foot and wrist drop, muscle strain, joint injury and interference with circulation and chest expansion.

Care needs to be taken to ensure that the head and neck are aligned with the spine. The arm that is uppermost is flexed at the elbow and rested on a pillow to prevent drag on the shoulder and wrist drop. The arm that is down is drawn slightly forward from under the body, bent at the elbow to lie on the bed parallel with the neck and head, or across the chest. The lower limb that is uppermost is flexed at the hip and knee, and supported by a pillow with the other lower limb slightly flexed.

To avoid foot drop the feet are positioned at a 90 degree angle to the leg with caretaken to avoid any unnecessary pressure. A pillow at the foot of the bed can facilitate this position (Allan 2002, Wunderlich 2002b).

Time out 5

Read the case study in Box 4. Using a nursing model familiar to your clinical area write a care plan that addresses Beatrice’s needs. Try to be holistic in your approach. You may wish to refer to Box 5.

Time out 6

Reflect on what you have learnt about the nursing management of unconscious patients. Discuss how such skills could be used to enhance the general nursing care of conscious patients in your clinical area.

Time out 7

Now that you have completed this article, you might like to write a practice profile. Guidelines to help you are on page 68.

References

Allan D (2002) Caring for the patient with a disorder of the nervous system. In Walsh IVl (Ed) Watson’s Clinical Nursing and Related Sciences. Sixth edition. Baillire Tindall, London, 665-745.

Bailey K, Wilkinson S (1998) Patients’ views on nurses’ communication skills: a pilot study. International Journal of Palliative Nursing. 4, 6, 300-305.

Barker E (2002) The adult neurological assessment. In Barker E (Ed) Neuroscience Nursing. A Spectrum of Care. second edition. Mosby, Missouri MO, 51-97

Bonomini J (2003) Effective interventions for pressure ulcer prevention. Nursing Standard. 17 52, 45-50.

Bryne B (2002) Deep vein thrombosis prophylaxis: the effectiveness and implications of using below-knee or thigh-length graduated compression stockings. Journal of Vascular Nursing. 20, 2, 53-59.

Casey G (2003) Haemostasis, anticoagulants and fibrinolysis. Nursing Standard. 18, 7, 45-51.

Colquhoun M, Hadley A, Evans T (2004) ABC of Resuscitation. Fifth edition. BMJ Books, London.

Cowan T (1997) Blood glucose monitoring devices. Professional Nurse. 12. 8, 593-596, 599.

Cree C (2003) Acquired brain injury: acute management. Nursing Standard. 18,11, 45-54.

Dawson D (2000) Neurological care. In Sheppard M, Wright M (Eds) Principles and Practice of High Dependency Nursing. Baillire Tindall, London, 145-182.

Department of Health (2001a) Essence of Care: Patient-focused Benchmarks for Clinical Governance. The Stationery Office, London.

Department of Health (200Ib) The NHS Plan: A Plan for Investment. A Plan for Reform. The Stationery Office, London.

Dougherty L, Lister S (2004) The Royal Marsden Hospital Manual of Clinical Nursing Procedures. Sixth edition. Blackwell Science, Oxford.

Elliott R, Wright L (1999) Verbal communication: what do critical care nurses say to their unconscious patients? Journal of Advanced Nursing. 29, 6, 1412-1420.

Evans G (2001) A rationale for oral care. Nursing Standard. 15, 43, 33-36.

Fader M (1997) Tlie promotion and management of continence in neurological disabilities. In Dolman M, Getliffe K (Eds) Promoting Continence. A Clinical and Research Resource. Baillire Tindall, London, 375-409.

Fitzgerald M (1996) Neuroanatomy: Basic and Clinical. Third edition. WB Saunders, London.

Fuller G (2004) Neurological Examination Made Easy. Third edition. Churchill Livingstone, London.

Getliffe K (1996) Care of urinary catheters. Nursing Standard. 11, 11, 47-54.

Gobbi M, Torrance C (2000) Fluid and electrolyte balance. In Alexander M, Fawcett J, Runciman P (Eds) Nursing Practice, Hospital and Home: The Adult. second edition. Churchill Livingstone, London, 637-656.

Green A (1996) An exploratory study of patients’ memory recall of their stay in an adult intensive therapy unit. Intensive and Critical Care Nursing. 12, 3, 131-137

Hayes JM, Lehman CA, Castonguay P (2002) Graduated compression stockings: updating practice, improving compliance. Medsurgical Nursing. 11, 4, 163-167.

Heron R, Davie A, Gillies R, Courtney M (2001) Inter-rater reliability of the Glasgow Coma Scale scoring among nurses in sub- specialities of critical care. Australian Critical Care. 14, 3, 100- 105.

Mickey J (2003a) Management of the unconscious patient. In Hickey J (Ed) The Clinical Practice of Neurological and Neurosurgkal Nursing. Fifth edition. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, Philadelphia PA, 133-162.

Hickey J (2003b) Neurological assessment. In Hickey J (Ed) The Clinical Practice of Neurological and Neurosurgical Nursing. Fifth edition. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, Philadelphia PA, 277-293.

Hooper M (1996) Nursing care of the patient with a tracheostomy. Nursing Standard. 10, 34, 40-43.

Howarth V (2004) Neurological assessment. In Moore T, Woodrow P (Eds) High Dependency Nursing Care: Observation, Intervention and Support. Routledge, London, 115-123.

Jennett B, Teasdale G (1977) Aspects of coma after severe head injury. The Lancet. I. 8017, 878-881.

Krishnasamy M (1995) Oral problems in advanced cancer. European Journal of Cancer Care. 4, 4, 173-177

McConnell EA (2001) Communicating to get results: an interview with Jacob Weisberg. Dimensions of Critical Care Nursing. 20, 6, 24- 27.

Mallett J, Dougherty L (2000) The Royal Marsden Hospital Manual of Clinical Nursing Procedures. Fifth edition. Blackwell Science, Oxford.

Moore T (2004) Suctioning. In Moore T, Woodrow P (Eds) High Dependency Nursing Care: Observation, Intervention and Support. Routledge, London, 290-300.

National Institute for Clinical Excellence (2003) Head Injury, Triage, Assessment, Investigation and Early Management of Head Injury in Infants, Children and Adults. NICE, London.

Nursing and Midwifery Council (2004) The NMC Code of Professional Conduct: Standards for Conduct, Performance and Ethics. NMC, London.

Payne-James J, Grimble G, Silk D (2001) Enterai nutrition. In Payne-James J, Grimble G, Silk D (Eds) Artificial Nutritional Support in Clinical Practice. second edition. Greenwich Medical Media, London.

Pearce C, Duncan H (2002) Enterai feeding: nasogastric, nasojejunal, percutaneous endoscopie gastrostomy, or jejunostomy: its indications and limitations. Postgraduate Medical Journal. 78, 918, 198-204.

Pemberton L (2000) The unconscious patient. In Alexander M, Fawcett J, Runciman P (Eds) Nursing Practice, Hospital and Home. The Adult. second edition. Churchill Livingstone, London, 851-871.

Powell M, Rigby D (2000) Management of bowel dysfunction: evacuation difficulties. Nursing Standard. 14, 47, 47-51.

Shah S (1999) Neurological assessment. Nursing Standard. 13, 22, 49-56.

Tyrrell W (2002) The causes and management of foot ulceration. Nursing Standard. 16, 30, 52-62.

Waterlow J (1991) A policy that protects. The Waterlow Pressure Sore Prevention/Treatment Policy. Professional Nurse. 6, 5, 258- 264.

Waterlow J (1998) The treatment and use of the Waterlow card. Nursing Times. 94, 7, 63-67

Webb P (1994) Communication. In Alexander M, Fawcett J, Runciman P (Eds) Nursing Practice, Hospital and Home. The Adult. First edition. Churchill Livingstone, London, 757-774.

Woodrow P (2000) Intensive Care Nursing: A Framework for Practice. Routledge, London.

Woodrow P (2004) Nutrition. In Moore T1 Woodrow P (Eds) High Dependency Nursing Care: Observation, Intervention and Support. Routledge, London, 46-55.

Wunderlich R (2002a) Exercise and ambulation. In Perry A, Potter P (Eds) Clinical Nursing Skills and Techniques. Fifth edition. Mosby, Missouri MO.

Wunderlich R (2002b) Body mechanics, transfer and position. In Perry A, Potter P (Eds) Clinical Nursing Skills and Techniques. Fifth edition. Mosby, Missouri MO.

Author

Max Geraghty is senior staff nurse, Intensive Care Unit, North Middlesex University Hospital, London.

Email: [email protected]

Copyright RCN Publishing Company Ltd. Sep 14-Sep 20, 2005

Cancer Patients Increasingly Augment Treatment With Holistic Therapies Such As Essiac Tea

By ASHLEY KINDERGAN THE GAZETTE

Sandra Hunter of Pueblo accepted that her husband, Edward Moya, was going to die. What she wouldn’t accept was the doctors’ prediction that endstage pancreatic cancer would kill him three weeks to a month after his diagnosis in May 2002.

Desperate, Hunter researched cancer remedies online. She added supplements to her husband’s chemotherapy treatments, including an herbal tea called Essiac. That tea, she thinks, was one of the most important reasons her husband lived 19 months longer than doctors expected, though she has no way to know for sure.

“I knew it wouldn’t hurt him,” she said of the tea. “There is a point where you say, what do you have to lose?”

Studies suggest that a growing number of cancer patients supplement their treatment with alternative remedies, and Essiac is high on the list. In a study at the M.D. Anderson Cancer Center in Texas, 4.9 percent of participants said they used the tea in addition to their traditional treatment. In a similar study at the Mayo Clinic Comprehensive Cancer Center, nearly 10 percent of cancer patients involved in a chemotherapy trial said they were using Essiac as well.

Only one Canadian company can use the trademarked name Essiac, but a four-herb formula for the tea has been widely published in books and on the Internet. Local stores such as Wild Oats, Mountain Mama Natural Foods, Rocky Mountain Nature Store, Whole Foods and Vitamin Cottage carry one or more brands of the tea.

“We don’t know how many people take it. If you take 500 cancer patients, and only one of them is taking Essiac, that’s still a lot of people taking Essiac,” said Dr. Andrew Vickers, a researcher at Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center in New York City.

For cancer patients and families searching for answers in unlikely places, wading through claims amid a relative paucity of scientific data can be daunting. That’s why the Federal Trade Commission fined Michael D. Miller of Crestone, who was making an Essiac tea, $17,500 in 2000. The Federal Trade Commission, which regulates the advertising of herbal remedies, prohibits claims that such products can treat, fight or cure cancer. Miller claimed on his company Web site that Essiac could cure cancer and HIV/AIDS.

Although Essiac has at least an 80-year history, there have been only a few controlled studies of its effects, and their results have not conclusively proven or disproven the claims of proponents and users that the herbal mixture works as a detoxifier and natural immune stimulant.

“There’s no particular reason to believe it’s harmful,” Vickers, the Sloan-Kettering researcher, said. “There’s no reason to believe it’s going to be helpful.”

Although recent research has found some evidence that the tea can inhibit cancer growth in certain kinds of cancer in cell cultures, one animal study suggested that certain kinds of estrogen-positive cancers, including some breast cancers, might get worse when treated with one brand of Essiac. Scientists are hindered by the fact that they do not understand how the human body metabolizes the substance. The concentrations that cause an effect in a test tube may be higher than what a person taking the recommended dose of the tea actually consumes.

Vickers put it more bluntly: “The fact that you can take an herb that’s found in Essiac, and mix it with cancer cells, and mix it in a test tube and show that it kills some cancer cells is completely unsurprising.”

That’s because test tube, or in-vitro, testing is the first stage of medical testing. The second step tests on animals, but those tests give scientists only clues about how a substance may act in humans. The real test, clinical trials on human subjects, is always the last stage to determining a product’s efficacy and safety.

Because the Food and Drug Administration classifies Essiac as a dietary supplement, manufacturers do not have to show the tea effectively fights cancer — only that it’s safe.

The history of the tea began in 1922. A Canadian nurse named Rene Caisse encountered an elderly female patient who said she had cured her breast cancer with an herbal tea recipe given to her by an Indian chief. Caisse experimented with the herbs, and soon established a clinic to treat cancer patients with a four-herb version of Essiac — Caisse spelled backward.

Some books and Internet sites point to Caisse’s results as proof that the tea works, but many details from the time are difficult to verify. In an article she wrote before her death in 1978, Caisse claimed that her personal files contained “hundreds of documented cases concerning the proven efficacy of ESSIAC with cancer patients.” Internet accounts say those files were burned — some say by family members, who didn’t realize what the papers contained.

Even the original composition of the formula remains uncertain. Caisse kept the formula secret for most of her life, and stories conflict regarding with whom she shared it. Caisse sold the recipe to the Canadian firm Resperin Corp., now Essiac Canada International, which sells a trademarked product called Essiac.

Today, more than 25 products purport to derive from the original Essiac formula, including ready-made brewed tea, powdered tea, tinctures, salves, capsules and tea bags. The products are available online and from local naturopaths and health food stores.

Buying a year’s supply of the tea in powdered form can cost up to $1,000. A year’s supply of ready-brewed liquid Flor-Essence, a popular brand produced by Flora Inc., from Whole Foods costs more than $4,800. Others buy herbs and, following the published recipe, make their own tea.

For those who believe in the tea, a few inconclusive studies do not tell the whole story.

“If I was told, ‘You can only do one thing in the complementary arena,’ I would do the tea,” said Sandra Hunter, looking back on her decision to administer Essiac to her husband. If she were given the choice between the tea and chemotherapy, however, she said she would choose chemotherapy.

The tea’s most passionate endorsements come from naturopaths and herbalists such as Michelle Kelavik, also known as “The Tea Lady,” for her four-herb brew of Essiaclike tea, Ojibwa Tea of Life. Kelavik, of Denver, credits Essiac with her own recovery from a urethral growth in 1994.

Kelavik said she spent four years studying herbs with Ojibwa Indian tribal elders and in the library of Bastyr University, a college in Washington state specializing in natural medicine. The facility in which she processes herbs is an FDAinspected clean room.

For her, the tea must be part of a holistic, spiritual approach to health, and believing in it is as important as drinking it. She makes no promises and wants people to make their own decisions.

“You never, ever, say the word ‘cure,'” Kelavik said. “It’s against the law to use the word ‘cure.’ Doctors are legally allowed to use the word cure, but doctors don’t cure anybody either. God, nature, spirit is what cures.”

According to naturopaths and herbalists, the restrictions on the tea and the lack of research are part of a conspiracy meant to protect pharmaceutical companies. Because herbal remedies can be difficult to patent, some claim, pharmaceutical companies don’t want to waste time researching a remedy that can’t earn money.

“When people are getting well by using nature — they can’t patent these things, so it’s taking away from the mega money coming from the drug companies,” said Sharon Schulman, a local naturopath and herbalist who treated her breast cancer with Essiac tea.

She tells clients her story and that the tea is thought to stimulate the immune system and aid in general detoxification, but does not explicitly recommend the tea.

Generally, oncologists advise patients to talk to their physicians before trying any herbal remedy, and some recommend discontinuing herbs while receiving radiation or chemotherapy, or before surgery. Herbs with antioxidant properties can interfere with the oxidative reactions that kill cells during chemotherapy.

Dr. James Young of Penrose Cancer Center said he doesn’t discourage patients from taking alternative or complementary medicines like Essiac unless he has good reason to think them unsafe.

“What I’ve come to realize in my maturity is that some of these things can empower patients to feel like they’re doing something for themselves — that they’re not so out of control in the process,” he said.

OTHER OPTIONS

Complementary and alternative medicine, defined as any nontraditional approach to treating a disease, includes several popular remedies for cancer.

The M.D. Anderson Cancer Center in Houston lists some nonherbal approaches:

Homeopathy: Medicines designed to help the body start healing, not to eliminate symptoms.

Tai chi and qigong: Chinese exercises.

Massage therapies: These include reiki massage, healing touch and therapeutic touch, which claim to channel a healing energy through the practitioner’s hands onto the patient.

Mind-body approaches:

These include support groups, storytelling, expressive writing, meditation and guided imagery, in which patients picture positive or healing images. These approaches are based on the theory that the mind influences the recovery of the body.

DETAILS

No large-scale human tests of any brand of Essiac tea have been performed. Thomas Geither, owner of Flora Inc., which manufactures Flor-Essence, said the company is planning a human trial of cancer patients in Mexico City and is negotiating a second trial at the University of Kentucky.

In the late 1970s and early 1980s, Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center in New York City and the National Cancer Institute tested two samples from Rene Caisse and two from Resperin Corp. on sarcoma, leukemia and other cancer cells. They found no evidence that Essiac caused tumors to regress or grow more slowly. Here are some sites with information about Essiac and other herbal remedies:

The National Cancer Institute: www.cancer.gov/cancertopics/pdq/ cam/essiac/healthprofes sional/allpages

M.D. Anderson Cancer Center: www.mdanderson.org/depart ments/ CIMER

Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center’s About Herbs database: www.mskcc.org/mskcc/html/11571.cfm? RecodID=441&tab=HC

National Center for Complementary and Alternative Medicine: nccam.nih.gov

Children whose parents smoked are twice as likely to begin smoking between 13 and 21

Twelve-year-olds whose parents smoked were more than two times as likely to begin smoking cigarettes on a daily basis between the ages of 13 and 21 than were children whose parents didn’t use tobacco, according to a new study that looked at family influences on smoking habits. The research indicated that parental behavior about smoking, not attitudes, is the key factor in delaying the onset of daily smoking, according to Karl Hill, director of the University of Washington’s Seattle Social Development Project and an associate research professor of social work.

Hill said other elements that influenced whether or not adolescents began daily smoking were consistent family monitoring and rules, family bonding or a strong emotional attachment inside the family, and parents not involving children in their own smoking behavior. The later includes such activities as asking their children to get a pack of cigarettes from the car or having them light a cigarette for the parent.

“All of these factors are important in delaying or preventing daily smoking, but parental smoking is the biggest contributor to children initiating smoking,” said Hill. “It really is a matter of ‘do as I do’ not ‘do as I say’ when it comes to smoking.” The study is one of the first to look at the initiation of daily smoking rather than the experimental use of tobacco. It defined daily smoking as smoking between one and five cigarettes daily in the previous 30 days at the time of each interview.

The research is part of the ongoing Seattle Social Development Project supported by the National Institute on Drug Abuse that is tracking the development of positive and antisocial behaviors among 808 individuals. They originally were recruited as fifth-grade students from elementary schools in high-crime Seattle neighborhoods.

For this study, the individuals were interviewed at ages 13, 14, 15, 16, 18 and 21. The group was nearly equally divided among males and females. Forty-six percent were white, 24 percent were black, 21 percent were Asian Americans, 6 percent were American Indians and 3 percent were from other ethnic backgrounds.

The study found differences in daily smoking rates both by gender and racial background.

Over all, 37 percent of the individuals reported daily smoking by age 21 ““ 42 percent of the males and 32 percent of the females.

Whites (43 percent) were more likely to have begun regular smoking by 21 than were blacks (35 percent) and Asian Americans (24 percent). However, Indians (54 percent) were the group most likely to have begun daily smoking by age 21.

Smoking rates predictably increased as the individuals got older. Just a little more than 2 percent had ever smoked daily at 13. That rate increased to 5 percent at 14, 12 percent at 15, 18 percent at 16, and 27 percent at 18.

“Parents may feel that they don’t matter to their teens, but this study indicates, they really do,” said Hill. “It shows that such factors as not smoking, having good family management skills in setting rules and monitoring behavior, and having a strong emotional relationship with their children matter until the end of adolescence.”

Smoking prevention programs, he said, need components focused on parents, something they generally ignore, to help reduce adolescent smoking. Such programs are important since tobacco use is the leading preventable cause of death in the United States, accounting for about 440,000 deaths annually, according to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.

“Keeping children from smoking starts with parents and their behavior. Some parents say they disapprove of teenage smoking, but continue to smoke themselves. The evidence is clear from this study that if parents don’t want their children to start smoking, it is important for them to stop or reduce their own smoking,” Hill said.

On the World Wide Web:

University of Washington

The Importance of Recycling Paper

The raw material for making paper is predominantly trees; but it is a common misconception that recycling waste paper saves trees!

Trees for paper making are grown and harvested as a long term crop with new trees planted to replace those cut down. Nearly all paper is made from wood grown in these “sustainable” forests.

The more important environmental issues are:

1. The nature of forests and where they are situated. As the demand for paper has increased, more timber has been needed to meet the demand for wood pulp. In some cases this has meant the loss of valuable wildlife habitats and ecosystems, as old forests have been replaced by managed plantations, usually of fast-growing conifers. The lack of tree species diversity in managed forests has a direct impact on the biodiversity of the whole forest.

2. By using waste paper to produce new paper disposal problems are reduced.

3. Producing recycled paper involves between 28 – 70% less energy consumption than virgin paper and uses less water. This is because most of the energy used in papermaking is the pulping needed to turn wood into paper.

4. Recycled paper produces fewer polluting emissions to air and water. Recycled paper is not usually re-bleached and where it is, oxygen rather than chlorine is usually used. This reduces the amount of dioxins which are released into the environment as a by-product of the chlorine bleaching processes.

5. Paper is a biodegradable material. This means that when it goes to landfill, as it rots, it produces methane, which is a potent greenhouse gas (20 times more potent than carbon dioxide). It is becoming increasingly accepted that global warming is a reality, and that methane and carbon dioxide emissions have to be reduced to lessen its effects.

Recycling 1 tonne of paper saves:

At least 30000 liters of water.

Between 3000 4000 kWh electricity which is enough for an average 3 bedroom house for a whole year.

2005 Al Bawaba (www.albawaba.com)

Levofloxacin Treatment of Active Tuberculosis and the Risk of Adverse Events*

By Marra, Fawziah; Marra, Carlo A; Moadebi, Susanne; Shi, Peilin; Et al

Background: Fluoroquinolones are commonly used in the treatment of tuberculosis (TB) for drug-sensitive patients who are intolerant to first-line antituberculous agents or who are infected with drug- resistant organisms. Despite increasing use of these agents, there is little information on their tolerance outside of clinical trial settings.

Objectives: To compare overall rate of major adverse events associated with levofloxacin-containing regimen to standard therapy.

Methods: Cases (levofloxacin-containing regimen) were matched by age and sex to their control subjects (standard first-line TB drugs). Eligible patients were identified from the provincial TB database from 2001 to 2004. Drug safety was assessed by evaluation of the nature of the adverse event, the likelihood of association with the study medications, and severity. Only major side effects, that is, those who had a severe or moderate adverse event that was categorized to be definitely, probably, or possibly related to the TB medications, were considered for the analysis.

Results: During the 3-year study period, 102 patients received levofloxacin, and 358 patients received first-line agents for treatment of active TB. There were no significant differences between the two groups except for indication (82% of patients in the levofloxacin group had an antecedent adverse event to first-line TB drugs, whereas 18% received levofloxacin because of resistance) and concurrent use of first-line drugs (majority of patients in the levofloxacin arm were not receiving concurrent isoniazid or rifanipin). The rate of any major adverse event was almost half among those using levofloxacin as among those on standard therapies (rate ratio, 0.60; 95% confidence interval [CI], 0.44 to 0.82). After adjustment for the differences in exposure of concomitant medications, the rate of any major adverse event was similar between the levofloxacin and control arms (adjusted rate ratio, 0.83; 95% CI, 0.66 to 1.03). Furthermore, there was no difference between the levofloxacin and control arms with respect to CNS (adjusted rate ratio, 0.94; 95% CI, 0.61 to 1.43), GI tract (adjusted rate ratio, 0.81; 95% CI, 0.58 to 1.13), skin (adjusted rate ratio, 0.65; 95% CI, 0.38 to 1.10), or musculoskeletal (MSK) [adjusted rate ratio, 0.87; 95% CI, 0.48 to 1.60] related adverse events when adjusted for concomitant drugs. The results of the secondary analysis for the rate of major adverse events within the first 100 days were similar to the primary analysis. The time to the first major adverse event was similar between the levofloxacin group and the control group (adjusted hazards ratio, 1.01; 95% CI, 0.76 to 1.34).

Conclusions: Concomitant use of a levofloxacin-containing regimen resulted in a similar rate of adverse events compared with conventional first-line regimens when used for treatment of active TB, despite a history of adverse events. (CHEST 2005; 128:1406- 1413)

Key words: adverse events; fluoroquinolones; levofloxacin; tuberculosis

Abbreviations: CI = confidence interval; CNS = central nervous system; CVS = cardiovascular; GI = gastrointestinal; MSK = musculoskeletal; TB = tuberculosis

Tuberculosis (TB) accounts for 8.4 million cases worldwide and is one of the leading infectious causes of death today.1,2 Although in North America, the overall rates of TB have declined more than 10- fold since the 1950s (from 53 per 100,000 to 5.3 per 100,000), there remain significant groups at high risk of TB disease, most notably, foreign-bom individuals, who represent greater than 50% of the cases.3 Other groups who are at high risk for developing TB disease include Aboriginal persons, high-risk inner city groups (including injection drug users and the homeless), and HIV-infected persons.4 The treatment of drug-sensitive TB requires the use of conventional first-line agents for ≥ 6 months.5 Intolerance to these medications or drug-resistant disease requires the use of alternative regimens frequently containing quinolones.6-8

The second-generation quinolone antibiotics (ofloxacin and ciprofloxacin) have moderate in vitro activity against Mycobacterium tuberculosis,9,10 but the activity (both in vitro and in vivo) of the newer-generation fluoroquinolones, such as levofloxacin11,12 and moxifloxacin, is twofold to threefold greater.13,14 Prospective clinical trials of fluoroquinolones as first-line agents for the treatment of TB are limited, and the majority of clinical data6-8 are on their use as second-line agents, either for those patients infected with drug-resistant M tuberculosis or for those with drug- sensitive disease who are intolerant to the first-line agents. Since the introduction of levofloxacin in North America, it has become a commonly used fluoroquinolone because of its superior in vivo activity against M tuberculosis, as well as its more-convenient dosing schedule (levofloxacin is administered once daily compared with the twice-daily schedule for ciprofloxacin/ofloxacin).15 Results from the randomized clinical trials16 evaluating moxifloxacin for the treatment of M tuberculosis are in progress, and, as such, the use of this newer fluoroquinolone is not as prevalent as levofloxacin at the present time.

In August 2001, the TB Control Service at the British Columbia Centre for Disease Control switched from ciprofloxacin to levofloxacin for the treatment of patients with drug-resistant TB infection and for patients who had TB and were intolerant to first- line medications. In order to determine the safety of the new fluoroquinolone-containing regimen, we examined the incidence of adverse events in the levofloxacin-containing regimen vs standard regimens.

MATERIALS AND METHODS

Study Design and Database

We used a case-control design wherein- all of the cases (patients on levofloxacin) were matched by age and sex to control subjects (patients on standard first-line anti-TB agents) in a 1:4 ratio. All of the individuals identified in British Columbia with active TB disease are eligible to receive treatment through a publicly funded provincial program. The treatment of these patients is assessed and followed by the Tuberculosis Control Division within the BC Centre for Disease Control, and all of the records are kept in a central computerized database. In addition, all of the mycobacteriology is completed at the provincial laboratory, based at the Centre for Disease Control, ensuring identification of all of the cases within the province. Although the information captured within the database began in 1990, the use of fluoroquinolones for the treatment of TB was not initiated in British Columbia until 2001.

Subject

All of the cases of active TB were confirmed by the isolation of M tuberculosis from culture. We evaluated medication records of patients who had received ≥ 7 days of levofloxacin (with other antituberculous agents) or standard first-line treatment (ie, isoniazid, rifampin, pyrazinamide, and ethambutol) from 2001 to 2004 for the treatment of active TB. The data collected included age, sex, weight, country of origin, comorbid conditions, other antituberculous medications, dosage, duration of treatment, hospitalizations, previous intolerances to antituberculous medications, adverse events, and reasons for discontinuation of therapy.

Outcome Definitions

In the assessment of the study outcomes, in order to be recorded as an adverse event in the TB control database, both the attending physician and the nurse practitioner at the Tuberculosis Treatment Clinics had to concur (at the time of patient assessment) that the medication was responsible for the observed reaction. These adverse events were additionally evaluated by the investigative team for severity and the likelihood of association with the study medications according to previously published criteria described below.17,18

The nature of the adverse events were categorized as those related to the central nervous system, respiratory, cardiovascular (CVS), gastrointestinal, skin, and musculoskeletal (MSK). Central nervous system events included seizures, fever, vertigo/tinnitus, paresthesia, visual disturbances, headache, and confusion. CVS events included arrhythmias, hypotension, increased heart rate, and chest pain. GI system events included nausea and vomiting, anorexia/ weight loss, dyspepsia, abdominal pain and hepatitis. Hepatitis was defined as liver transaminases more than three times the upper limit of normal in the presence of GI symptoms or transaminases more than five times the upper limit of normal without symptoms. Dermatologic system events were characterized as rash, pruritis, and swelling. MSK complaints included fatigue, weakness, joint pain, and tendonitis.

The severity of the adverse reaction was categorized as mild, moderate, or severe. Severity was considered as follows: (1) mild if the signs and symptoms did not require additional medication and the study drugs were continued; (2) moderate if the signs and symptoms did not require additional medication but were controlled on discontinuation of the study medication; or (3) severe if the signs and symptoms were potentially life-threatening, permanently disabling, resulted in extended hospital stay and/or required significant treatment (eg, systemic drugs), and required discontinuation of the study medication.

The likelihood of ass\ociation of the adverse event to the study medication was assessed as definite, probable, possible, or unlikely by using the following five criteria: (1) known adverse drug reaction; (2) temporal relationship; (3) adverse drug reaction disappeared with dose reduction or discontinuation of study drug; (4) symptoms could not be explained by any other known condition or predisposition of patient; and (5) symptoms reappeared on rechallenge, or laboratory tests showed higher-thannorrnal drug levels or metabolic disturbances, which explained tlie symptoms. An adverse drug reaction was characterized as definite if all five of the criteria were satisfied; probable if the first four criteria were satisfied; possible if the first three criteria were satisfied; or unlikely if the relevant information could not be obtained, if the temporal sequence was atypical, or if other conditions or dispositions were considered far more likely to have caused the symptoms.

For purposes of this analysis, we included only those patients who were considered to have had a major adverse event. This was defined as patients who had a severe or moderate adverse event that was categorized to be definitely, probably, or possibly related to the TB medications according to the criteria.

Statistical Analysis

The quality of the matching of the age variable was assessed using t test. Cross-tabulations and χ^sup 2^ tests of homogeneity were computed for gender. Other descriptive analyses were calculated using t tests and χ^sup 2^ tests as appropriate. All p values

The primary analysis was to determine the overall rate of any major event occurrence in the two study arms using a Poisson regression model with the logarithm (the time taking the study drug) as an offset variable.'” As such, a rate-ratio, with 95% confidence intervals (CIs), between the levofloxacin group and the control group was generated. The potential confounders were evaluated for each person-day of the follow-up, including ethnicity, baseline liver function, previous medication intolerance, and concurrent medications. An adjusted rate ratio was generated by a two-sided elimination method. Second, these Poisson regression analyses were repeated for each of the individual symptom systems (eg, CNS, GI, and skin).

Since a report regarding adverse events of first-line TB agents found that most of the events occurred in the first 3 months, we conducted another analysis looking at the rate of a major adverse event in the first 100 days.17,20 Other secondary analyses21,22 included time-to-event curves for each group that were calculated by the Kaplan-Meier method and compared by means of the log-rank test. Cox proportional hazards models were used to compare the time to the first event for the occurrence of any major event and the individual symptom systems.23 Hazard ratios and their 95% CIs were computed for these models.

RESULTS

From June 2001 to August 2004, a total of 102 patients received levofloxacin for the treatment of active TB in combination with other standard anti-TB medications. Three hundred fifty-eight control subjects were matched to the above cases. As shown in Table 1, the mean age of the patient was 53 years (range, 11 to 98 years). Fifty-nine percent of the participants were women, 57% reported their race as South-East Asian, and 64% were being treated for pulmonary TB. The results of HIV testing were in the records of 213 patients (46%), of whom 5% were positive. Similarly, the results of hepatitis testing were in the records of only 36 patients (8%), of whom 3% were positive for hepatitis B, 3% for hepatitis C, and 1% for both hepatitis B and C. There were no significant differences in the observed demographic or clinical characteristics according to the treatment group. However, there were differences between the treatment groups with respect to the indication for use and concurrent drugs. The majority of patients in the levofloxacin arm were intolerant to one of the first-line TB medications, whereas the other 18% received levofloxacin because of drug-resistant TB. The majority of patients in the levofloxacin arm were not receiving concurrent administration of isoniazid or rifampin. In addition, patients in the levofloxacin-based strategy received significantly less pyrazinamide and ethambutol. The treatment cure rates were 100% for both treatment groups, and there were no TBrelated deaths.

Table 1-Baseline Demographics*

The incidence of major adverse events was similar in both arms, with 29% of those in the levofloxacin group having at least one event compared with 28% in the control group. The number of adverse events in the levofloxacin and control arms were similar, with 16.5% of patients experiencing one major event (18% levofloxacin group vs 15% control group), 6.5% with two major events (5% levofloxacin group vs 8% control group), and 6% with three or more major events in the study (7% levofloxacin group vs 5% control group). The organ systems involved in the major adverse events were GI (17% levofloxacin group vs 15% control group), CNS (12% levofloxacin group vs 9% control group), skin (5% levofloxacin group vs 8% control group), and MSK (7% levofloxacin group vs 6% control group). The common adverse events were nausea and vomiting (n = 10 levofloxacin group vs n = 38 control group), hepatotoxicity (n = 9 levofloxacin group vs n = 24 control group), rash (n = 3 levofloxacin group vs n = 21 control group), pruritus (n = 3 levofloxacin group vs n = 15 control group), and joint pain (n = 6 levofloxacin group vs n = 12 control group). There were no respirator,’, CVS, or hematologic adverse events seen for the levofloxacin or control groups.

The rate of any major adverse event in the agematched and gender- matched sample was almost half among those using levofloxacin as among those on standard therapies (rate ratio, 0.60; 95% CI, 0.44 to 0.82) [Table 2], However, after an additional adjustment for the differences in exposure of concomitant medications (ethambutol, pyrazinamide, rifampin, and isoniazid), the rate ratio was no longer significantly different (Table 2). Similarly, for adverse events of the skin, the age-matched and gender-matched rate ratio showed that levofloxacin had a significantly lower event rate (rate ratio, 0.43; 95% CI, 0.20 to 0.92) when compared with the standard therapies. But after additional adjustment for exposure of concomitant medications, the rate ratio was no long significantly different (Table 2). Finally for the other organ systems (CNS, GI, and MSK), although all of the point estimates of the rate ratio were

Table 2-Rate Ratios for Major Adverse Events*

In the secondary analysis, when we only evaluated events within the first 100 days, the rate ratios changed slightly. The rate of any major adverse event for the first 100 days for levofloxacin was no longer statistically significant but continued to be lower for the levofloxacin group compared with the control subjects (rate ratio, 0.73; 95% CI, 0.53 to 1.02). Additional adjustment for the differences in exposure of concomitant medications gave a similar rate ratio to the primary analysis (rate ratio, 0.86; 95% CI, 0.68 to 1.08). The rate ratios for adverse events for the first 100 days were

The time to the first major adverse event was similar between the levofloxacin group and the control group (adjusted hazards ratio, 1.01; 95% CI, 0.76 to 1.34). Similarly, the results of the other Cox regression models showed that the time to a major adverse event by an organ system was similar between the two groups (Table 3). The time to any major event for the first 100 days, for the overall case (adjusted hazards ratio, 0.99; 95% CI, 0.74 to 1.33), as well as by an organ system, was no different between the levofloxacin group and the control arm. This finding is illustrated in a Kaplan-Meier survival curve (Fig 1).

DISCUSSION

In this population-based study, we evaluated the incidence of major adverse events in anti-TB regimens containing levofloxacin and compared it with matched control subjects receiving standard anti- TB regimens. There was a significantly lower adverse event rate in the levofloxacin-containing TB treatment regimens compared with the standard regimens. This is interesting, because the majority of patients receiving levofloxacin had a history of at least one adverse reaction to first-line anti-TB drugs. In the adjusted analysis (where exposure to other TB medications were controlled), levofloxacin appeared to still have a consistently lower rate of events (rate ratio

There is a suggestion in the literature that most adverse events for anti-TB agents occur in the first 100 days, and, therefore, using person-days of treatment for the analysis may underestimate the toxicity. Therefore, we conducted a secondary analysis for the rate of any major adverse event in the levofloxacin and control arms in the first 100 days of therapy. Ninety-five percent of the events occurred in the first 100 days; however, the rate of events (either overall or by individual organ system) did not differ compared with the primary analysis using persondays. Although the overall event rate ratio was no longer statistically significant (it crossed the point of unity with the upper confidence limit being 1.02), the point estimate wasstill

Table 3-Adjusted Hazard Ratios for Major Adverse Events by Organ System

FIGURE 1. Kapkn-Meier curve for the time to first major adverse event within the first 100 days.

For the primary analysis, the relevant question being addressed is whether regimens containing levofloxacin have less toxicity than those that do not. Because the influence of the major confounding factors were either controlled by the design (age and sex) or were equally distributed between the two groups, it is unlikely that this lower rate ratio was influenced by other factors. Intuitively, this observation makes sense, because those who were treated with levofloxacin appeared to have been treated with fewer medications and, thus, could be expected to have fewer adverse events. However, even when this differential exposure to anti-TB medication was controlled for in the analysis, the point estimate for the adjusted rate ratio for levofloxacin was still

Another possible limitation of the study may have been that the group receiving levofloxacin had a lower rate of adverse events because they were no longer exposed to the agents that were problematic in the first exposure, but, when we examined this in the multivariate model, we did not find an association, and this parameter was not retained in our final Poisson regression models.

Fluoroquinolones are currently being recommended as second-line agents for the treatment of multidrug-resistant TB and for those patients with intolerance to first-line agents by the World Health Organization.6 In addition, consensus guidelines from the American Thoracic Society, US Center for Disease Control and Prevention, and Infectious Diseases Society of America have suggested incorporating fluoroquinolones (or prophylaxis of those exposed to multidrug- resistant TB.5 These two recommendations have been based on prospective clinical data, which have used ofloxacin,24-27 ciprofloxacin,28-31 and levofloxacin27,32,33 in combination with other anti-TB agents for the treatment of drug-resistant or drug- sensitive TB. Despite the use of fluoroquinolones for a prolonged period in routine clinical practice, there remains little literature on their tolerance outside of a clinical-trial setting.34,35 Limited tolerance to fluoroquinolones has been described when used for preventative therapy in combination with pyrazinamide, but these are individual case reports or case series.36-40 We recognize the importance of a case series in identifying adverse events; however, the lack of a control group makes it difficult to definitively identify fluoroquinolones as the cause for the excess adverse events. Our study represents the first population-based, case- control study with a large sample size to objectively assess the adverse events associated with the use of fluoroquinolones for treatment of active TB in routine clinical practice.

The limited tolerance to the combination of ofloxacin and pyrazinamide was first described in 1994 when 14 of 16 health-care workers (87.5%) receiving prophylactic therapy (ie, treatment of latent TB) discontinued treatment in

Nonrandomized studies such as ours are susceptible to bias because of confounding by indication.41 The patients in the levofloxacin group were already intolerant to anti-TB medications (this was not adjusted for in our analysis, because a prior adverse event was one of the criteria to be placed on levofloxacin) and, thus, may have been predisposed to the development of adverse events. However, as shown by the consistently protective effect (rate ratio, 75% of the sample. Possible bias may have included a clinician’s tendency to change the therapy for relatively minor adverse events more commonly when the patient was on their first-line regimen (control subjects) compared with the second regimen (cases).

The treatment of multidrug-resistant TB involves the use of multiple second-line and toxic agents for a prolonged period of time. Compliance is stressed when counseling patients on their medication, and patients must be able to tolerate their therapeutic regimens in order to achieve a cure. In this setting, the use of an anti-TB agent with fewer side effects is desirable.

CONCLUSIONS

The concomitant use of a levofloxacin-containing regimen resulted in a similar rate of adverse events compared with the control arm when it was used for the treatment of active TB, although individuals receiving this regimen have a history of adverse events. Additional studies are required to evaluate a potential protective effect of levofloxacin and newer quinolones, such as moxifloxacin, against major adverse reactions.

ACKNOWLEDGMENT: We thank Victoria Cox and Marisa Wan for collecting the data during their student rotations. We thank the contributions of Rick White, a statistician, and Dr. Ramak Shadmani, a physician epidemiologist, for their help on study design and preliminary data analysis.

* From the University of British Columbia (Drs. F. Marra, C.A. Marra, Shi, Elwood, and FitzGerald), Vancouver, BC, Canada; and BC Centre for Disease Control (Ms. Moadebi and Mr. Stark) Vancouver, BC, Canada.

REFERENCES

1 Dye C, Scheele S, Dolin P, et al. Global burden of tuberculosis: estimated incidence, prevalence, and mortality by country. JAMA 1999; 282:677-686

2 World Health Organization. WHO report 2003: global tuberculosis control. Report WHO/CDSATB/2003-316. Available at: http:// www.who.int/gtb/publications/globrep/index.html. Accessed July 19, 2005

3 CDC. Reported tuberculosis in the United States, 2002. Atlanta, CA: US Department of Health and Human Services CDC, 2003

4 Advisory Council on the Elimination of Tuberculosis (ACET). Tuberculosis elimination revisited: obstacles, opportunities, and a renewed commitment. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep 1999; 48:1-13

5 American Thoracic Society/Centers for Disease Control and Prevention/Infectious Diseases Society of America. Treatment of tuberculosis. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 2003; 167:603-662

6 Crofton J, Choculet P, Mahcr D. WHO Report 1997: guidelines for the management of drug-resistant tuberculosis. Geneva, Switzerland: World Health Organization; WHO/TB/1996-210

7 Gleissberg V. The threat of multidrug resistance: is tuberculosis ever unbeatable or uncontrollable? Lancet 1999; 353: 998-999

8 Snider DE, Castro KG. The global threat of drug-resistant tuberculosis. N Engl J Med 1998; 338:1689-1690

9 Garcia-Rodriguez JA, Gomez Garcia AC. In-vitro activities of quinolones against mycobacteria. J Antimicrob Chemother 1993; 32:797- 808

10 Jacobs MR. Activity of quinolones against mycobacteria. Drugs 1999; 58(suppl):19-22

11 Mor N, Vanderkolk J, Heifets L. Inhibitory and bactericidal activities of levofloxacin against Mycobacterium tuberculosis in vitro and in human macrophages. Antimicrob Agents Chemother 1994; 38:1161-1164

12 Klemens SP, Sharpe CA, Rogge MC, et al. Activity of levofloxacin in a murine model of tuberculosis. Antimicrob Agents Chemother 1994; 38:1476-1479

13 Tortoli E, Dionisio D, Fabbri C. Evaluation of moxifloxacin activity in vitro against Mycobacterium tube\rculosis, including resistant and multidrug-resistant strains. J Chemother 2004; 16:334- 336

14 Nuermberger EL, Yoshimatsu T, Tyagi S, et al. Moxifloxacincontaining regimens of reduced duration produce a stable cure in murine tuberculosis. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 2004; 169:421- 426

15 Peloquin CA, Berning SE, Huitt GA, et al. Levofloxacin for drug-resistant Mycobacterium tuberculosis. Ann Pharmacother 1998; 32:268-269

16 Pletz MW, De Roux A, Roth A, et al. Early bactericidal activity of moxifloxacin in treatment of pulmonary tuberculosis: a prospective, randomized study. Antimicrob Agents Chemother 2004; 48:780-782

17 Yee D, Valiquette C, Pelletier M, et al. Incidence of serious side effects from first-line antituberculosis drugs among patients treated for active tuberculosis. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 2003; 167:1472-1477

18 Schberg T, Rebhan K, Lode H. Risk factors for side effects of isoniazid, rifampin and pyrazinamide in patients hospitalized for pulmonary tuberculosis. Eur Respir J 1996; 9:2026-2030

19 Myers RH, Montgomery DC, Vinig GG. Generalized linear model: with applications in engineering and the sciences. New York, NY: John Wiley & Sons, 2002

20 Chaisson RE. Tuberculosis chemotherapy: still a doubleedged sword. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 2003; 167:1461-1462

21 Kaplan EL, Meier P. Nonparametric estimation from incomplete observations. J Am Stat Assoc 1958; 53:457-481

22 Mantel N. Evaluation of survival data and two new rank order statistics arising in its consideration. Cancer Chemother Rep 1966; 50:163-170

23 Cox DR. Regression models and life tables. J R Stat Soc Ser B 1972; 34:187-220

24 Hong Kong Chest Service/BMJ Research Council. A controlled study of rifabutin and an uncontrolled study of ofloxacin in the retreatment of patients with pulmonary tuberculosis resistant to isoniazid, streptomycin and rifampicin. Tuber Lung Dis 1992; 73:59- 67

25 Kohno S, Koga H, Kaku M, et al. Prospective comparative study of ofloxacin or ethambutol for the treatment of pulmonary tuberculosis. Chest 1992; 102:1815-1818

26 Sirgel FA, Donald PR, Odhiambo J, et al. A multicentre study of the early bactericidal activity of anti-tuberculosis drugs. J Antimicrob Chemother 2000; 45:859-870

27 Yew WW, Chan CK, Leung CC, et al. Comparative roles of levofloxacin and ofloxacin in the treatment of multidrug-resistant tuberculosis: preliminary results of a retrospective study from Hong Kong. Chest 2003; 124:1476-1481

28 Mohanty KC, Dhamgaye TM. Controlled trial of ciprofloxacin in short-term chemotherapy for pulmonary tuberculosis. Chest 1993; 104:1194-1198

29 Kennedy N, Fox R, Kisyombe GM, et al. Early bactericidal and sterilizing activities of ciprofloxacin in pulmonary tuberculosis. Am Rev Respir Dis 1993; 148:1547-1551

30 Yew WW, Chau CH, Wong PC, et al. Ciprofloxacin in the management of pulmonary tuberculosis in the face of hepatic dysfunction. Drugs Exp Clin Res 1995; 21:79-83

31 Sirgel FA, Botha FJ, Parkin DP, et al. The early bactericidal activity of ciprofloxacin in patients with pulmonary tuberculosis. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 1997; 156:901-905

32 El-Sadr WM, Perlman DC, Matts JP, et al. Evaluation of an intensive intermittent-induction regimen and duration of short- course treatment for human immunodeficiency virusrelated pulmonary tuberculosis: Terry Beirn Community Programs for Clinical Research on AIDS (CPCRA) and the AIDS Clinical Trials Group (ACTG). Clin Infect Dis 1998; 26:1148-1158

33 Telzak EE, Chirgwin KD, Nelson ET, et al. Predictors for multidrug-resistant tuberculosis among HIV-infected patients and response to specific drug regimens: Terry Beirn Community Programs for Clinical Research on AIDS (CPCRA) and the AIDS Clinical Trials Group (ACTG), National Institutes for Health. Int J Tuberc Lung Dis 1999; 3:337-343

34 Berning SE. The role of fluoroquinolones in tuberculosis today. Drugs 2001; 61:9-18

35 Ginsburg AS, Grosset JH, Bishai WR. Fluoroquinolones, tuberculosis and resistance. Lancet Infect Dis 2003; 3:432442

36 Horn DL, Hewlett D, Alfalla C, et al. Limited tolerance of ofloxacin and pyrazinamide prophylaxis against tuberculosis [letter]. N Engl J Med 1994; 330:1241

37 Horn DL, Hewlett D, Alfalla C, et al. Limited tolerance of ofloxacin and pyrazinamide prophylaxis in health-care workers following exposure to rifampin-isoniazid-streptomycinethamhutol- resistant tuberculosis. Infect Dis Clin Praet 1995; 4:219-225

38 Ridzon R, Meador J, Maxwell R, et al. Asymptomatic hepatitis in persons who received alternative preventive therapy with pyrazinamide and ofloxacin. Clin Infect Dis 1997; 24:12641265

39 Papastavros T, Dolovich LR, Holbrook A, et al. Adverse events associated with pyrazinamide and levofloxacin in the treatment of multidrug-resistaut tuberculosis. Can Med Assoc J 2002; 167:131-136

40 Lou H-X, Shallo MA, McKaveney TP. Limited tolerability of levofloxacin and pyrazinamide for multidrug resistant tuberculosis prophylaxis in solid organ transplant population. Pharmacotherapy 2002; 22:701-704

41 McMahon AD, Approaches to combat with confounding by indication in observational studies of intended drug effects. Pharmacoepidemiol Drug Saf 2003; 12:551-558

42 Hernandez-Garduno E, Cook V, Kunimoto D, et al. Transmission of tuberculosis from smear negative patients: a molecular epidemiology study. Thorax 2004; 59:286-290

Fawziah Marra, PharmD; Carlo A. Marra, PharmD, PhD; Susanne Moadebi, BSc(Pharm); Peilin Shi, PhD; R. Kevin Elwood, MD; Greg Stark, RN; and J. Mark FitzGerald, MB, MD

None of the authors have direct financial interest in the subject matter of the manuscript. In particular, none of the authors have received funding from Jansen-Ortho, the manufacturer of Levofloxacin.

Manuscript received November 29, 2004; revision accepted February 4, 2005.

Reproduction of this article is prohibited without written permission from the American College of Chest Physicians (www.chestjournal. org/misc/reprints.shtml).

Correspondence to: Fawziah Marra, PluirinD, BC Centre for Disease Control, Vaccine and Pharmacy Services, 655 West 12th Ave, Vancouver, BC, VSL 4R4 Canada; e-mail: [email protected]

Copyright American College of Chest Physicians Sep 2005

Air Force Reviewing Troubled Space Programs

WASHINGTON — The U.S. Air Force is reviewing its space programs — many of which are behind schedule and over budget — with an eye to slowing down projects whose technologies are not yet mature, the Pentagon’s top space official said on Tuesday.

Air Force Undersecretary Ron Sega, a former astronaut and the Pentagon’s executive agent for space, also urged greater cooperation by the intelligence and defense communities on satellites, noting their importance to fighting wars abroad, as well as responding to recent hurricanes in the Gulf region.

But massive cost overruns and major schedule delays have plagued nearly every space program in recent years, prompting Congress to seek funding cuts.

“While these challenges are not necessarily new, they have become extremely serious and they do threaten our space dominance,” said Republican Sen. Wayne Allard of Colorado, who introduced Sega at a Washington Space Business Roundtable luncheon.

“Unprecedented cost growth and significant schedule delays have seriously damaged the credibility of our Air Force program management and caused some of my colleagues in Congress to push for significant reductions in the Air Force’s space programs.”

Allard is a member of the Senate Appropriations Committee, whose defense subcommittee on Monday cut funding for three key space programs by nearly $500 million for fiscal year 2006.

The House has already passed a similar level of cuts to two space programs, which makes it likely that the final defense spending bill will cut funding for at least some programs.

Sega, who directed Pentagon research for four years, stopped short of saying space programs were in crisis but said his previous work made it clear that the technological maturity of current programs differed widely.

“We would be well-served to lower the risk as we build operational systems and make sure that we have the parts we need and … make sure the technology is mature,” he said.

Opting for more mature technology would help speed up the launch of new systems because it would lower the risk of technological setbacks, he said.

At the same time, he said the Air Force needed to continue to put resources into developmental systems, advanced research projects and science and technology funding.

Sega said he would thoroughly examine each satellite program and how they would fit into an “integrated architecture in space,” as well as overall military intelligence, reconnaissance and surveillance work.

His remarks came a week after intelligence director John Negroponte recommended canceling a key part of Boeing’s contract for the Future Imagery Architecture satellite and

hiring Lockheed Martin Corp. to do the work.

Negroponte also moved to cancel a second satellite imagery program, Misty, being built by Lockheed, but defense officials said they need the new satellite for military purposes.

The Pentagon offered to pump billions of dollars into the classified project, but details are still being worked out with congressional committee that oversees intelligence and defense spending, according to sources familiar with the matter.

She’s the Sixties Icon Who Had a Child By Mick Jagger

By ISLA WHITCROFT

ICONIC Sixties singer Marsha Hunt has revealed that she is battling breast cancer. And for Marsha, 59, who has a daughter, Karis, with rock star Mick Jagger, the fight was made even tougher when she was struck down by the MRSA superbug after having her mastectomy. Here, with amazing courage and candour, she tells how she is tackling this terrible disease.

BEFORE Marsha Hunt left her house for her daily dose of radiotherapy this summer, she always made sure that she was wearing a different pair of gorgeously sexy high-heeled shoes and that her makeup was nothing short of immaculate.

Those shoes and that grooming spoke volumes about the way this feisty woman, born and brought up in the tough streets of Philadelphia, was going to deal with her breast cancer.

Marsha may have had a radical mastectomy of her right breast and been struck down with MRSA. She may have lost the mass of wonderful hair that helped make her such an icon of the Sixties and brought her famous lovers such as Mick Jagger, with whom she had a daughter, Karis.

‘But was I going to curl up and cry – was I going to say “poor me” and look for pity?’ says Marsha, 59, nearly a year on from her diagnosis. ‘Not on your life. Right from the moment I was diagnosed, back in November last year, I treated the whole thing as an adventure, a journey.

‘I don’t say that in a frivolous, facile way. I mean that I had cancer, I may live or I may die from it – but right now I am alive and I am enjoying every minute of it.

And, yes, that includes lying on a bed having radiotherapy.’

Unconventional though Marsha’s attitude may be, it seems to be working well.

Having gone through the mastectomy, chemotherapy and finally her radiotherapy, Marsha radiates energy and good humour, her shaven head accentuating her wonderful cheekbones and large, expressive eyes.

Marsha felt the first signs of cancer back in June last year. She was at her writing retreat in northern France, finishing a book on Jimi Hendrix, and as she lay on her front in bed she noticed that her right breast felt strange.

‘Nothing too odd, just a bit different,’ she recalls. ‘But I noticed it, which was weird, as I am not one to regularly check breasts. I would drive myself mad with worry if I thought that every single bump was cancer. So I put this to one side and carried on with my book.

‘By September there was a tiny lump under my right nipple, but I still didn’t feel the need to get it checked out. But in November, I was back in Dublin [she lives in Ireland most of the time] and decided to see a doctor.’

She visited St Vincent’s Private Hospital, where a breast specialist examined her, sent her for a mammogram and then for an ultrasound. Three hours later, she was told that she did indeed have a four-inch lump which was probably malignant. The plan of attack was a full mastectomy, followed by chemotherapy and high doses of radiotherapy.

Typically, Marsha’s first reaction was to call her nearest and dearest around the world and tell them that she was fine and more than happy to deal with the fallout by herself.

‘My daughter Karis lives in LA and was due to give birth to her second child in just six weeks’ time, so there was no way she could come and be by my side,’ explains Marsha. ‘But she didn’t panic: she’s a good strong woman and she knows her mom. The one thing she did insist on was that I had someone there while the surgery was going on, someone who could keep her informed of how I was.

‘So I asked my great friend Kathy Gilfilin, who is married to U2’s manager Paul McGuiness, to do the honours. She was brilliant – not just during the operation, but throughout everything. She and Paul have been true, true friends to me.’ Ten days after her diagnosis, Marsha was scheduled for surgery. She could have gone back to her native America – one of her friends offered to fund her treatment there – but Marsha was adamant that she would stay in the city that has been her home for the past 10 years.

‘I had no intention of going to some clinic in America, where I would be treated like just another middle-aged black woman and hounded for details of my health insurance,’ she explains, with some vehemence. ‘But I chose Ireland for two other main reasons.

‘The first is that the man who brought me to Ireland, my ex- partner, film director Alan Gilsenan, had colon cancer in 1999. I nursed him through it and his medical team here was so brilliant that I knew I wanted the same group of people batting on my team.

‘The second was that Irish people treat illness, and even death, in a very healthy way. They don’t hide away from it and say that they are too busy to visit you.

THE Irish embrace the fact that you are ill, and it is almost a matter of honour for them to visit you and bring you gifts. I knew that in Ireland I would have a wonderful support system. And I wasn’t wrong.’ Right from the moment of diagnosis, Marsha was determined to be in charge of her illness.

After calling her family and friends, the next thing on her to- do list was to get hold of some people she knew in TV and arrange to make a documentary about her journey. Kathy, a publisher, helped her to get a book deal.

That done, another decision was that, as far as she was concerned, losing her breast was no big deal – and she wasn’t going to hide her war wounds from anyone.

‘Everybody talked about me having a reconstruction,’ she grimaces.

‘Reconstruction – as if the breast is miraculously put back to the way it was. In fact, pretty much all you get is your cleavage back; you don’t get any feeling or sensitivity.

‘When I was making the documentary, I spoke to three women who had all had reconstructions and each one of them had had problems with it afterwards. And if you think about it, it isn’t really a surprise. They take muscles from your back, skin from your thighs, fat from your stomach.

‘You had a breast removed, but the rest of you was fine. Now half your body is hacked about – and for what?

Because you worry about how other people might react to you because you only have one breast?’ Until the day of the operation, Marsha had never wavered in her belief that cancer was going to be an adventure to enjoy. Only once did her mind betray her.

‘A few days before the operation, I was driving from a friend’s house and I suddenly realised that my face was wet with tears. I hadn’t been thinking sad thoughts, and there were no other physical signs of distress such as sobbing.

I have no idea what was happening but somewhere, deep in my brain, there must have been a need for tears.’ It was a momentary lapse and her sense of humour soon reasserted itself.

A few hours before her operation, Marsha wrote a note on her breast to the surgical team, telling them to have fun, make sure they took the right breast off and drew them a flower.

WHEN she woke up after surgery and looked down at her now flat right side, neatly sealed with a six-inch scar, far from feeling grief, she felt happiness that the cancer had been taken away.

‘Are you kidding?’ she roars. ‘I didn’t mourn my breast for a minute. I was still alive, still gorgeous, still perfect. In fact, I felt better than perfect. I felt sexier without my breast, because now I had a battle scar that showed I had faced up to what people fear more than anything – and got through it.’ For 12 days after the operation, it appeared that Marsha’s positive strategy was working. She was healing up beautifully, her scar was clean and pain-free, and the only problem she faced was how to tell the dozens of visitors she received that she was sometimes weary and needed a nap rather than to chat.

But just before she was due to be discharged, two weeks before Christmas, disaster struck. That evening, as Marsha was getting out of the bath, a couple of the strips that were keeping the dressing on the wound peeled away.

As Marsha looked into the mirror, she could see that welts had formed underneath.

‘I started to panic. I thought it was some kind of allergic reaction and ran to find the night nurse.

‘The nurse was watching TV in the day room with the lights out and she didn’t seem at all bothered by me. But when I got back to the bathroom, I saw that more welts were coming up.

I tell you, the ghetto in me took over and I scorched down the corridor and told the nurse that if she didn’t get a doctor right there and then, I wouldn’t be responsible for what I was about to do.

‘The emergency doctor came and said he thought I had an infection. He wanted to start me on antibiotics there and then, but I panicked and decided that I had to wait for my surgeon to come into work the next morning.’ Mr Arnold Hill, her surgeon, agreed that she needed penicillin but the drugs seemed to have little effect. By the following day, Marsha’s scar was oozing pus and blood and she was hooked up to a drain. More doses of penicillin and then ciproxin followed, but Marsha was getting worse.

‘Instead of looking forward to going home, I suddenly felt as if I was fighting for my life,’ she says, clearly still angry about what happened. ‘I felt so sick, I spent half the time with my head hanging over the side of the bed.

I felt leaden and frightened. The scar was dreadful, all puckered and burned, and I cried and cried because things had gone so wrong.

‘Behind the tears, I was so mad that I could have broken windows. Instead, after four days I got myself and my drip down the corridor and phoned a hotel. I thought that at least a hotel wouldn’t have these infections floating around, and if I needed a doctor they would get one for me.’ In the end, her surgeon, summoned by incredulous nursing staff, came to see his patient and talked her into a compromise. She agreed to move to the nearby private Blackrock Clinic but to keep the same medical team.

‘At the Blackrock, I was finally told that I had contracted the superbug MRSA, which did scare me,’ she admits. ‘In the end, I was given zyrox – a very expensive antibiotic – and the infection started to leave my body.’

Marsha had learned her lesson. As soon as she was declared infection free, she left hospital and went to stay in a luxury villa in the grounds of a Dublin hotel.

‘I just slept and rested, kept things quiet and walked a bit,’ she explains.

‘Christmas came and went, and by January I felt well enough to embark on the next stage of my adventure. My chemotherapy was due at the end of the month and I knew full well what the side-effects would be.’ For any woman, hair loss is a painfully traumatic process – often the most distressing part of the whole experience of having breast cancer.

For Marsha, whose entire persona and identity had been built around her iconic mass of afro hair, the loss could have been doubly difficult.

Typically, however, she decided to embrace the hair loss and turn it into an excuse to have a party.

‘I knew early on that I didn’t want to go through the whole dreary process of watching my hair fall out day by day,’ she explains. ‘I wanted to take control of my battle. If anyone was going to get rid of my hair, it was going to be me.

‘Likewise, because I didn’t want close family and friends all ringing up and being sympathetic and sorry for me, I decided that I would do the deed in front of them and they could see for themselves that I’d be fine.’ In mid-January, her oncologist cleared her to fly to LA, where her daughter Karis, now 35, lives with her husband Jonathon Watson, a film director, and their children, Mazie, three, and newborn Zachary.

‘It was wonderful to see them all,’ says Marsha. ‘One of the gifts that cancer has given me is that it has brought Karis and I much closer together.

Before cancer, we were both busy people and we often didn’t get the time to speak as much as we would have wanted to. Now we are calling or emailing each other nearly every day.

‘My haircutting party was two weeks later. My brother Dennis, a journalist on USA Today, my friends from my Berkeley University days, my friends from LA and New York, and from the Middle East, and, of course, Mick, all dropped by.’ In 1970, Marsha and Mick Jagger had a love affair which resulted in Karis’s birth. When Mick refused to accept financial responsibility for his baby, Marsha fought him through the courts and won maintenance.

But that was 30 years ago and the two have long since buried the hatchet and are good friends who talk regularly and see each other from time to time.

When Karis married Jonathon three years ago in LA, Mick and Marsha jointly hosted her wedding.

‘Mick and I have a daughter and two lovely grandchildren in common, so of course he is family now,’ explains Marsha. ‘I invited him to the hair cutting party and he was happy to come.

‘We all had champagne and the women braided my hair, then Mazie started the ball rolling by cutting off the first braid. After that, everyone at that party took turns in cutting off a lock.

‘I think people were wary at first, but when they saw how happy I was – I think I actually cheered when Mazie took her bit off – they relaxed and we had a ball.

‘Everyone was very kind and said I looked gorgeous, and Mick was the least fazed of all. He was actually with me back in the Sixties when I had my afro cut off to be photographed by Norman Parkinson.’ Her hair gone, Marsha flew home to carry on with her treatment.

Although happy to indulge in homeopathy in the past for minor complaints, she knew that conventional medicine, no matter how gruelling, was her best chance of survival.

‘You have to listen to what your instincts are telling you,’ she explains.

‘I am a vegetarian, but after my operation I woke up and craved a lamb chop. So I had one. Likewise, I know that for cancer you fight the battle with every medical advancement known to man.’ Her chemotherapy lasted from January until June, two sessions every three weeks, followed by a month of radiotherapy. Her sideeffects turned out to be minimal, although she did lose what remained of her hair – her eyebrows and most of her lashes. Each morning, her pillow would be covered with the tiny dots that was the stubble from her shorn head.

But right from the start, Marsha loved her baldness. ‘It felt so liberating not having to worry about how my hair was looking, to be styling it or drying it or pinning it,’ she explains. ‘I love the way I look now. I think it suits me. I get compliments all the time, and even if my hair grows back I may keep the shaven look.

‘I really wish that more women who are bald – for whatever reason – would feel comfortable walking around without wearing a wig. We don’t notice when men are bald. Why should women have to feel that hair loss is something to be ashamed of?

ONE treatment that Marsha refused was Tamoxifen, the drug which has proven to be effective in treating hormonally receptive breast cancer.

‘I was acting on instinct again,’ she says. ‘Rightly or wrongly, I just felt that I didn’t want my hormones to be messed around with on top of everything else.’ Instead, Marsha has been lucky enough to be put on to Herceptin, the rationed breast cancer drug that is proving extremely effective at shrinking tumours but is also, as in Marsha’s case, used as a preventative measure against the return of tumours after surgery.

‘Since the end of July I have had Herceptin every three weeks intravenously and I will continue to do so until the middle of next year.

‘It is so expensive that every time I am due into the clinic, they ring up to check I am coming in before they open the drug. I know how lucky I am to be able to have it. It’s a crying shame it isn’t available to everyone.’

Medical treatment apart, Marsha is also attributing some of her recovery to the fact that she is madly, giddily in love. Early this year she made cyber contact with an old friend from university and now the two of them have progressed to exchanging sweet nothings over the internet.

Giggling like a schoolgirl, Marsha shows me her computer inbox and there, sure enough, is a stack of messages from her beau. She hopes that they will meet soon.

‘I asked my doctor if he thought being in love would help me to get better,’ she grins. ‘He looked at me as if I was mad. But I’m not so sure.’

Undefeated: Am I The Same Girl?

by Marsha Hunt(paperback, Pounds 7.99) is published by Mainstream in October.

A Grocery Store Price Comparison

By Karen Spiller, The Telegraph, Nashua, N.H.

Sep. 25–NASHUA — Ever wonder which grocery store has the best prices?

I did.

So, armed with laundry list of common grocery items, I recently paid a visit to the area’s five supermarket chains to compare prices.

My list included items such as ground beef, chicken breast, milk, yogurt, bread, cheese, bottled water — common items that might be found on a grocery list. I considered both store and name brands, and if anything was on sale, I noted the sale price.

Wal-Mart Supercenter won for cheapest store on the entire basket of 21 items, with a total price of $41.40.

Market Basket was a close second, with the bill totaling $43.96.

Hannaford came in third at $45.77. My total at Shaw’s was $46.62, and the most expensive total bill was at Stop & Shop, where the groceries came to $46.97 – 13 percent more than at Wal-Mart.

Of the five stores, both Stop & Shop and Shaw’s have a “loyalty card” that allows you to get deeper discounts on some items. Meanwhile, shoppers who don’t have the card are charged more.

For instance, a 64-ounce carton of Tropicana orange juice was cheapest at Shaw’s about two weeks ago, but that was only if you used your Shaw’s card.

With the card, the Tropicana was $2, compared with Shaw’s regular price of $2.69. Stop & Shop and Market Basket both sell Tropicana for $2.50, while it’s $2.48 at Wal-Mart and $2.79 at Hannaford.

While Wal-Mart was the cheapest for the overall food basket, it was the most expensive for bananas, charging 54 cents per pound. Hannaford had them on sale about a week ago for 33 cents. Shaw’s, Stop & Shop and Market Basket all sell bananas for 49 cents per pound.

The cheapest pint of Ben & Jerry’s ice cream can be found at Market Basket for $2.50. Wal-Mart has it for 17 cents more, and Shaw’s and Hannaford both sell it for $2.99. It is most expensive at Stop & Shop, where it sells for $3.29.

Bottled water was another interesting item where price varied quite a bit. A six-pack of 24-ounce “sport pack” bottles of Poland Spring water was cheapest at Market Basket, which sells it for $2.49. It was just a penny more ($2.50) at Stop & Shop — the store that happened to have the most expensive total basket bill.

Hannaford sells the Poland Spring for $2.99, while Wal-Mart charges $3.73 and you’ll pay the most at Shaw’s, where it’s $3.99 for the six pack.

Some items only varied by pennies, such as store brand 2 percent milk.

Stop & Shop, Market Basket and Hannaford all charge $2.49 for a half gallon. Wal-Mart is 13 cents cheaper, and Shaw’s is 20 cents more than the trio of competitors.

Of course, what you buy week to week varies, and so will the shopping cart and totals. Here are what some Nashua area residents say about where they shop, and why:

— Suze Scholl, of Nashua, says her food costs are considerably less when she shops at Market Basket rather than Hannaford.

“The only exception is that Hannaford sells soda for 99 cents a liter, where Market Basket is more typically $1.39. I also like the way I am treated at Market Basket and feel that my business is appreciated.

Hannaford’s, however, definitely has a much better fish selection and I believe, the quality is superior to Market Basket’s.”

— Nashua resident Keith Manheck lives off Exit 8, has at least four stores in which to shop that are less than 3 miles apart.

He shops at Market Basket, because it is closest.

“I’ll compare them all, however. Market-Basket and Wal-Mart have the overall lowest prices (not by too much),” he said. “Hannafords and Shaw’s have better (and higher priced) meats and seafood.”

For top quality (and higher priced) food items, Manheck goes to Whole Food Markets in Bedford and Cambridge, Mass. “The quality is the best and freshest anywhere but be prepared to pay top dollar for it,” he said.

— Karen Bill of Nashua says she loves Shaw’s. She has shopped the other major grocery chains in the area but found that Shaw’s has “consistent great prices and excellent selection.”

“I travel past the other guys to shop there,” she said.

A loyal Shaw’s customer, Bill has a rewards card that averages 10 percent or more off every purchase, she said. “It is a great incentive to continue to shop there,” she said.

“Their produce, seafood, deli and meats are consistent . . . The prices are great, and I trust my food to be fresh no matter what I buy.

“Plus, their own brand is as good or better than any name brands.”

— John Watkins of Nashua does most of his shopping at Market Basket.

“They have lower prices on almost every product they stock,” Watkins said. “I find that Stop & Shop and Shaw’s tend to have consistently higher prices.”

Watkins does check the store circulars and finds that, occasionally, sale items are worth a special trip to one of the other stores.

“I also value my time so that occasionally, rather than traveling to another store, it’s worth paying a slightly higher price for one or two items when filling a longer list.”

— Gail Hatch of Nashua does most of her shopping at Hannaford.

“It’s not the most convenient store to me, but I like the overall experience there. The store layout is friendly; the prices seem OK. The selection and quality of store brands is very good. I like the access to the custom butcher shop; the fish market is nice, and I like the specialty cheeses. It is the type of store I can linger in and check out what is new in the fresh foods.”

Since Shaw’s implemented their rewards card, Hatch said she has avoided shopping there. “The card has the effect of penalizing you if you do not have it. Reward cards are a hassle to keep track of, and only rewards the store issuing them. I find it insulting that I should be penalized for not helping Shaw’s market more products to me.”

While Hatch lives near many Market Basket stores, she reluctantly shops there. “I find the pre-packed produce annoying and do not like their store brands. The stores have not changed from the ’50’s, the lighting is offensively bright and cold.”

In the $950 billion a year food business, supermarkets are under tons of pressure to compete. But competition among grocery stores is not what it used to be, said Todd Hultquist, spokesperson for the Food Marketing Institute in Washington, D.C.

“Today’s supermarket competes not only with supercenters, but warehouse clubs, dollar stores, convenience stores . . . even drug stores are carrying a lot more products.”

They’re also competing with restaurants, especially fast food, which control half the market for food market sales, he said. American consumers are eating out more. “And if they’re eating out more they’re cooking less, and if they’re cooking less, they’re shopping less.”

Today’s retailing strategy is not to be a one-stop solution fits all, he said. Instead, it’s about diversity.

With the strong demand for ethnic products and specialty produce, retailers are under a lot of pressure to serve a lot of market segments, Hultquist said.

In response, supermarkets are competing with one another with the addition of specialty gourmet segments, prepared foods and wine and cheese sections.

The most popular new store features are deli departments, fresh seafood, floral and plant shops, prepared foods for take-out, ethnic foods, pharmacies and in-store bakeries, according to the Food Marketing Institute’s 2004 report, “Facts About Store Development.”

Michael Levy, professor of marketing at Babson College, said supermarkets are forced to compete on more than just price to get the bigger share of the consumer’s wallet.

“If they compete only on price, the next guys’ going to match the price,” Levy said.

As Levy sees it, no supermarket chain can compete with Wal-Mart on price.

“Everything Wal-Mart does is to lower their costs,” Levy said. “They make executives share hotel rooms. Their home office in Bentonville is nothing special; everything they do is on the cheap, and they’ve got one of the most sophisticated supply chains of anyone in the world.

“A family owned grocery store wouldn’t’ be able to compete, and it’s very hard for these other regional chains to be able to compete with them.”

Levy was not surprised that the Wal-Mart Supercenter offered the best prices on most items.

“That’s their plan,” he said. “They want to be the lowest price on any given market basket of goods.”

So, how do grocery stores compete with Wal-Mart if they can’t compete on price?

Location, according to Levy. “A lot of people don’t want to deal with a Wal-Mart superstore because they’re just too big.”

The trade area, or region from which the store draws its customers, is relatively small, Levy said. People generally won’t drive 10 miles to a grocery store.

“Who has the time to do that?” he said.

—–

To see more of The Telegraph, or to subscribe to the newspaper, go to http://www.nashuatelegraph.com

Copyright (c) 2005, The Telegraph, Nashua, N.H.

Distributed by Knight Ridder/Tribune Business News.

For information on republishing this content, contact us at (800) 661-2511 (U.S.), (213) 237-4914 (worldwide), fax (213) 237-6515, or e-mail [email protected].

WMT, ABS, AHO, AHLN, UL, UN, PEP, DEG, DELB,

Force-Fed Women Fight the Fat in Mauritania

NOUAKCHOTT, Mauritania — Mariem Sow was a little girl when her sister Zeinabou choked to death in front of her while being force-fed camel’s milk by a family slave.

Beaten if she refused to swallow the rich diet of sweetened milk and millet porridge, Zeinabou was one of many Mauritanian girls fattened up because of an ancient belief that corpulent women make more desirable wives.

“As soon as my older sister was 12 they started force-feeding her so she would be plump by 15. They wanted to prepare her for marriage,” said Mariem, now 42, wrapped in white robes and reclining on cushions in her Nouakchott home.

The traditions of the desert are very much alive in Mauritania, an Islamic republic on the western edge of the Sahara whose people were still almost entirely nomadic when the country gained independence from France in 1960.

Wealthier families who have settled in the capital Nouakchott often keep a “khaima” — a nomadic tent — in the courtyard of their homes. Men and women walk the sandswept streets in flowing robes and headscarves.

Having a voluptuous wife and daughters — well fed to survive the rigors of a desert lifestyle — was long a visible sign of wealth and power among the country’s light-skinned Moors. It is still seen by many as a canon of beauty.

But with Lebanese satellite television broadcasting images of flat-stomached girls cavorting on beaches, and more Mauritanians traveling abroad, the vogue is starting to change.

Many Mauritanians believe it is unseemly for women to be seen engaging in any strenuous activity, but as dusk falls, chubby ladies shuffle self-consciously around the stadium in Nouakchott, their tracksuit trousers hidden under flowing “malhafa” robes.

“Sometimes I walk, sometimes I run. We come after dusk when the men have gone home,” said Fatimatou, a breathless 31-year-old, force-fed as a child but now trying to get down to 132 pounds.

“It’s no longer the modern fashion to be overweight. Women have evolved. Now they work in offices and they have to be fit.”

BIG IS BEAUTIFUL

More than one in five women in Mauritania, which straddles black and Arab Africa, were force-fed as young girls, according to a government survey from 2001, the latest available.

“Our society has this vision that a woman has to be fat to be beautiful. It is a canon of beauty,” said Marienne Baba Sy, head of a government commission that deals with women’s issues.

“If you’re a thin woman, people assume your family don’t look after you,” she told Reuters.

The force-feeding technique known as “gavage” — a French word more closely associated with fattening up geese to produce foie gras — is less widely practiced than it used to be after the government launched campaigns to highlight the health risks.

But the cult of fatness has deep roots.

“My husband says he wants me to lose weight but he looks at fat women and I think he prefers going to bed with them,” said Nene Drame, 47, a writer working on a novel about force-feeding.

“The Mauritanian man is savage by nature. He likes something he can get his hands on,” she said.

“Gavage” left some women struggling to walk, not just because of their weight — which often tops 198 pounds — but because they were tortured as they were force-fed.

Some had their fingers or toes broken so the pain would distract them from having to swallow the milk and porridge. Others had their feet crushed by a “zayar” — a wooden vise which would only be loosened once they ate.

“Above all it causes cardiac problems, problems during childbirth. Even from the point of view of work, obese women are less productive,” said Baba Sy.

“They get tired very quickly, out of breath. Psychologically it is very damaging. You can’t do the same things as other women — you can’t even pray properly,” she added.

Some children were tied down while being fed and were forced to eat whatever they vomited up during the ordeal, Baba Sy said. The force-feeding often lasted years.

HORSE PILLS

The 2001 survey estimated around 10 percent of women aged 15-19 were force-fed as young girls, down from 35 percent among 45-54-year-olds.

Although brutal “gavage” may be on the decline, the pressure to conform to traditional notions of beauty has given rise to a new phenomenon in which girls take pills to stimulate their appetite or animal steroids to boost their girth.

Packets of large pink pills made in Pakistan and marked “not for human consumption” are laid out on upturned boxes under trees on the edge of one of Nouakchott’s main markets.

“Normally they’re just for animals but we sell them to women too. We sell them for 50 ouguiya (20 U.S. cents) to people who buy for their animals,” said one seller, declining to be named.

“But for women we sell them for 200 ouguiya a tablet. They buy three or four at a time,” he said, just before a young teen-age couple walked up to make a purchase.

Shocked by the death of her sister, Mariem Sow has stayed slim and was even asked to apply for a modeling contract when she went to Paris after marrying a French man.

“I’d been told I didn’t fit the criteria of a Mauritanian, I was too thin, there were no gaps between my teeth. They told me it was a good job I had found a European husband,” she laughed.

“But my friends still tell me I need to eat.”

These Patients Are Dangerous Staff Deserve to Be Safe

NURSES at top-security Ashworth hospital are regularly out- numbered five-to-one by dangerous psychiatric patients. The ECHO today reveals how some nurses feel vulnerable to attack or intimidation as staff levels on wards deteriorate.

Ashworth, in Maghull, is home to some of the UK’s most dangerous criminals including Moors killer Ian Brady. n Schizophrenic murderer Paul Khan, who stabbed a Prestatyn dog walker to death in a frenzied, unprovoked attack Cop killer Glaister Earl Butler, who knifed a constable in Manchester.

n Raymond Wills, who butchered his sister and nephew.

n Liverpool murderer Mark Corner, who stabbed and dismembered two prostitutes.

n Homophobic killer Roy Jorgensen Kristensen, who stabbed barman Philip Lee at Otterspool.

One ward routinely has only three nurses – two women and a man – to deal with up to 15 mentally-ill patients, according to union bosses.

Hospital chiefs say staff safety is paramount and recruitment of qualified staff is under way.

But today, prison officers association general secretary Brian Caton called the situation “obscene”. He said: “Ashworth is home to some very dangerous, damaged and volatile people and the staff deserve to be kept safe.

“To cut staff numbers in the way they appear to have done is obscene. They are in a situation of quite substantial over-spend and we know they’ve got to make sure they spend their money wisely.

“But we are not going to continue to stay quiet when that over- spend puts patients, staff and the general public at risk.”

He called on trust chiefs to recruit more nurses and tell current staff the truth over their debt crisis.

“It is absolutely vital that they don’t leave it until there is a serious incident and we’ve got a big inquiry on our hands.

“Ashworth is part of the NHS. Two female and one male staff on a ward are unacceptable when there should be six nurses.

“These patients are dangerous and can attack each other and staff – the trust are gambling and it’s a gamble we cannot afford to take.”

Staff levels were first outlined as a problem after a 1999 inquiry into massive failures at the unit.

But union bosses say Ashworth’s financial situation and problems retaining staff is hampering recruitment.

Patrick Colligan North West service director of mental health charity MIND, said Ashworth bosses are not to blame. He said: “You cannot deny the fact that there are problems with staffing levels – it’s a national crisis throughout the entire NHS.

“But I am sure the management at Merseycare are doing their level best to solve it and we should trust their ability.”

Charles Flynn, chief operating officer and deputy chief executive for Mersey Care NHS Trust said: “At present, there are no vacancies for unqualified staff and recruitment is ongoing to fill a small number of qualified vacancies.

“Ashworth hospital currently has 258 male patients and the average ward size is 17 patients – the intention is to reduce to 15 patients per ward by 2007/08.

“There is a rich mix of experienced staff employed in High Secure Services with 681 clinicians.

“Almost half (47%) of the clinical workforce are qualified Registered Mental Health Nurses – some of them with very specialist additional qualifications.

“Nursing assistants provide essential support and a large number of them have many years experience within High Secure Services.

“It would be inappropriate to discuss actual staffing levels on particular wards for security reasons. However, staff safety is of paramount importance and no actions will be taken which compromise this

Ashworth’s journey

ASHWORTH Hospital was created in 1989 when Moss Side and Park Lane hospitals in Maghull were merged.

In 1992 an investigation was launched into alleged ill-treatment of patients by staff, after a television documentary.

In 1997 the Personality Disorder Unit at the hospital became the subject of a public inquiry which resulted in 58 recommendations – including one hospital should close.

In June 1995 further changes to the management of high security psychiatric services in England and Wales were announced.

Ashworth Hospital became an authority in its own right in April 1996.

The government said giving the hospitals authority status allowed “greater responsibility to the people who work in each hospital so that they are able t o develop the organisation in ways that meet the needs of their patients and respond quickly on day-to-day matters affecting patients and staff

‘People like Brady could take advantage

THE mother of Moors Murderers’ victim Keith Bennett today said the situation at Ashworth hospital had to be resolved quickly.

Keith was abducted and killed by Ian Brady and Myra Hindley just days after his twelfth birthday in June 1964.

Neither Hindley or Brady ever revealed where they had dumped Keith’s body on Saddleworth Moor, and despite searches of the area, his remains were never found.

His mother, Winnie Johnson, 70, said she was horrified at the prospect of patients like Brady being able to intimidate over- worked staff at the topsecurity hospital.

She told the ECHO: “It’s annoying and very concerning that staff at Ashworth are spread so thinly on some wards.

“They need to sort it out as soon as possible. The people who work there are in constant danger from psychopaths like Brady and they need proper protection.

“He is one of the mad and bad ones who staff there have to put up with every day.” Mrs Johnson, from Fallowfield, Manchester, and detectives involved in the case, have made several desperate pleas to the killers to reveal where Keith is, but they have ignored her.

She dedicated her life to the hunt for his make-shift grave, desperate to give him a decent funeral.

She said: “People like Brady are evil and devious and could take advantage if they think there aren’t enough nurses

Prosecutors see ‘CSI effect’ in white-collar cases

By Martha Graybow

WASHINGTON (Reuters) – Jurors schooled in crime
investigations through watching TV dramas expect prosecutors to
show them sophisticated forensic evidence — even in
white-collar trials — making it tough for the government to
prove cases, two federal prosecutors said on Friday.

Alice Martin, the U.S. attorney for the Northern District
of Alabama, said that the so-called “CSI effect” — a reference
to the hit CBS television show about gruesome crime scene
investigations — hurt her case against HealthSouth Corp.
founder Richard Scrushy.

Scrushy was acquitted of securities fraud and other charges
by an Alabama federal jury in June — a blow to prosecutors
seeking to punish alleged corporate wrongdoing.

Jurors in post-verdict interviews “said, ‘we needed a
fingerprint on one of the documents or we needed him (Scrushy)
to say the word ‘fraud’ on the audiotape”‘ that was secretly
recorded by a former HealthSouth finance chief, Martin said at
a white-collar crime conference at Georgetown University Law
Center in Washington.

“They said, ‘they always do fingerprints on TV,” she said.

David Anders, an assistant U.S. attorney in Manhattan who
prosecuted ex-WorldCom CEO Bernard Ebbers and former investment
banker Frank Quattrone, also told the conference that jurors
expect forensic-type evidence in white-collar cases.

“The ‘CSI effect’ is not something that we’re happy about,”
Anders said.

Prosecutors often base white-collar fraud cases on
relatively dry evidence contained in reams of e-mails and
complex accounting documents. Few of these trials resemble the
cases featured on “CSI,” about forensic scientists in Las Vegas
who reconstruct murders by analyzing evidence like blood stains
with high-tech tools.

“CSI: Crime Scene Investigation,” U.S. television’s
top-rated drama last season, is one of about two dozen police
procedural series airing on prime time in recent years,
including two spinoffs — “CSI: Miami” and “CSI: “NY.”

Gerald Lefcourt, a criminal defense attorney in New York,
said lawyers for white-collar crime defendants also need to
keep in mind that jurors — particularly younger ones in their
20s and 30s — are widely influenced by what they see on TV and
like to see visual presentations at trials.

“These are people who by and large have grown up on
television,” he said. “The day of the lawyers droning on is
really gone. I think that jurors today, particularly the young
ones, expect quickness and things they can see.”

Reuters/VNU

Mayo Clinic boosts immune system

ROCHESTER, Minn. ““ Mayo Clinic researchers have discovered a way to dramatically boost the output of immune system cells from the thymus, which may lead to improved cancer vaccines, as well as to ways to otherwise strengthen immune responses.

The Mayo report appears in the current online edition of the journal AIDS, (http://www.aidsonline.com). Mayo Clinic scientists studied the immune system responses in blood samples from health care workers accidentally exposed to HIV, who then received a commonly used anti-AIDS treatment known as antiretroviral therapy (ART). None of the workers developed HIV infections.

In these non-HIV-infected test subjects, the scientists discovered that ART dramatically increases (up to a factor of 1,000) the production of cells from which the immune system makes disease-attacking T cells. Importantly, the increase in T cells also occurred in older people who generally produce few new T cells. Further experiments were performed in mice to see if the ART treatment caused the immune system to erroneously attack the host instead of disease agents. It did not.

Significance of the Mayo Clinic Research

The findings are significant because they suggest new ways to use an existing and approved drug regimen of ART to stimulate the thymus to produce more T cells — without provoking an “autoimmune” reaction in which the body attacks itself. T cells are major disease fighters of the immune system that are depleted in diseases such as AIDS and cancers, as well as in bone marrow transplant recipients. ART is a combination treatment of antiretroviral drugs and drugs that prevent cell death.

Possible Applications

“One of the potential uses we envision is to use the ART treatment as a way to use tumor components to immunize cancer patients against their own cancer cells,” explains Mayo Clinic immunologist David McKean, Ph.D. “The current problem with this treatment strategy is that the tumor gives off a variety of soluble products which we don’t fully understand, but which we know wreck havoc on the immune system by suppressing its various components. If we can use the ART drugs to increase the number of newly produced T cells in cancer patients first, we can potentially improve the likelihood of getting a cancer vaccine to work.”

The findings may also benefit the aging population.

“The ability of ART to boost T cell numbers may allow patients who normally don’t respond to vaccines ““ such as those with chronic disease, or the elderly ““ to mount an effective immune response if they receive the vaccination in combination with ART,” says co-author and Mayo Clinic immunologist Andrew Badley, M.D.

With age the thymus (located in the upper chest) diminishes and produces fewer T cells. This leaves the elderly more vulnerable to disease and less able to make effective use of vaccines. However, researchers say if the aging immune system was primed by the ART regimen prior to receiving vaccines, a stronger immune response might be provoked. That way people might be better protected, and public health officials could use their supplies of vaccine more effectively.

About the Investigation

In the seven participants treated with ART, five showed a dramatic increase in a specific kind of cell known as “naive T cells”. This is important because naive T cells are used by the body to destroy tumor cells or cells that have been infected by viruses to which the individual has not been previously exposed. Says Dr. McKean, “A person in their 60s doesn’t produce many new T cells. Yet in order to effectively respond to a pathogen you haven’t seen before, you really need those new T cells produced by the thymus. So that’s why as people get older they become more susceptible to particular viruses.”

On the World Wide Web:

Mayo Clinic

‘Hygiene hypothesis’ Linked to Heart Disease Risk

By Matias A. Loewy

BUENOS AIRES (Reuters Health) – Early childhood viral infections might reduce the risk of developing heart disease later in life by as much as 90 percent, researchers from Sweden and Finland reported here on Wednesday at the IV World Congress of Pediatric Cardiology and Cardiac Surgery.

According to the investigators, “improved hygiene in early childhood might partially explain the greatest epidemic of the 20th century — coronary heart disease.”

It is the first time that the so-called “hygiene hypothesis” has been linked to the development of heart disease. The hypothesis proposes that reduced microbial exposure because of improved sanitation and cleaner lifestyles has facilitated the rise in asthma, allergic disease and multiple sclerosis in the Western world.

Researchers led by Dr. Erkki Pesonen, from the University Hospital in Lund, Sweden, compared 350 patients who had unstable angina or a heart attack with 350 subjects without coronary heart disease (control subjects). The study participants answered a questionnaire about their childhood experience with contagious diseases, specifically whether they had ever had chickenpox, scarlet fever, measles, German measles, mononucleosis, or infection of the parotid salivary glands.

Childhood contagious diseases were more frequent in the controls, researchers noted. Furthermore, they found a consistent trend between the number of childhood infections and the reduction in coronary risk. For instance, having two childhood viral infections reduced the coronary risk by 40 percent; four infections was associated with a 60-percent decreased risk; and six infections lowered the risk by 90 percent.

Dr. Horacio Faella, a pediatric cardiologist at the Garrahan Hospital, Buenos Aires, and member of the Organizing Committee of the meeting, considered these findings to be interesting but preliminary. “We need to do more studies about the influence of the immune system on the cardiovascular system,” he said.

More than Wisdom in those Wisdom Teeth

NEW YORK — Young adults in their 20s and 30s who can’t part with their third molars (a.k.a., wisdom teeth) may be at risk for chronic oral inflammation, increasing the risk of inflammation in other areas of the body as well.

That’s according to a long-term study presented this week at the opening of the American Association of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeons annual meeting in Boston.

This study shows that the wisdom teeth are “an area of potential chronic inflammation with little continuing observation or actually early recognition,” Dr. Robert S. Glickman from New York University College of Dentistry who was not affiliated with the study told Reuters Health.

“Everyone should know the status of their third molars,” he said. “It doesn’t necessarily mean that they should come out at that time, or ever, but because there is this potential for early inflammation to start and obviously that can have long-term health consequences — most dramatically, in pregnant women who deliver preterm babies.”

The primary health concern with wisdom teeth is infection, just like with the other teeth, Glickman explained. However, because of the unique location — in the back of the jaws — infection in the third molar region can spread down the neck in the lower jaw to the sinuses or up the neck from the upper jaw to the brain.

While many prior studies have linked periodontal, or gum disease, with systemic effects in older populations, the current study called the Third Molar Clinical Trial is unique in that it takes a look at the risks posed by keeping the wisdom teeth in a younger population.

In the ongoing trial, a team of dentists led by Dr. Raymond P. White, Jr., of the University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill, are tracking the health of the tissues supporting the teeth throughout the mouth, including the third molars, in more than 300 healthy subjects between the ages of 14 and 45, who at the outset had four, symptom-free third molars. The researchers have just completed the seventh year of the study.

Unexpectedly, they found that roughly 25 percent of these young adults with “healthy” wisdom teeth had considerable periodontal disease in this region. This finding flies in the face of national epidemiologic surveys that suggest a much lower rate of oral inflammation in people under age 35. The researchers had expected to find a rate of only about 10 percent in this young study set.

Additionally, the results suggest that third molars that have broken through the tissue and erupted in a normal, upright position are just as likely to exhibit inflammation as those that remain impacted or buried.

Glickman’s advice: “If your wisdom teeth are not in, you want someone to tell you where they are and what position they are in. If they are in or if they are impacted, you want someone to examine the tissues on a regular basis.”

“You’re not necessarily going to see infection or pain,” he added, but the dentist could spot “inflammatory events that could have long-term health consequences.”

Only One Cigarette a Day Triples Your Risk of Lung Cancer

SMOKING just one cigarette a day almost triples the risk of heart disease and lung cancer, warn researchers.

Women are at more risk than men, even when they smoke less than a pack a week.

A study demolishes the myth that ‘light’ smokers those on between one and four cigarettes a day and those who have cut down will significantly reduce their risk of serious health problems.

Doctors say the findings show every cigarette can cause damage to smokers as well as those around them.

Although the risk is highest for those who smoke the most, ‘social smoking’ carries a far greater danger than was previously assumed, according to the study.

Researchers in Norway tracked the health and death rates among almost 43,000 men and women from the mid-1970s until 2002.

Those taking part were aged 35 to 49 at the start, when they were screened for cardiovascular disease and diabetes.

The data showed light smoking significantly endangers health even after other risk factors are taken into account.

Those on between one and five cigarettes a day were almost three times more likely to die from coronary artery disease than those who had never smoked.

Male light smokers were almost three times more likely to be killed by lung cancer.

Women were almost five times as likely to die of the disease as their non-smoking peers.

The researchers also found that light smokers had significantly higher death rates from all causes up by 1.5 times compared to those who had never smoked.

Death rates were also linked to the number of cigarettes smoked each day, says the study published today in the scientific journal Tobacco Control.

The research was carried out by Dr Aage Tverdal, from the Norwegian Institute of Public Health, and Dr Kjell Bjartveit, from the National Health Screening Service in Oslo.

They concluded: ‘In men and women smoking one to four cigarettes per day there was a distinct increase in risk of death from ischaemic heart disease and from all causes.

‘For ischaemic heart disease, the steepest increase was, in both sexes, between zero and one to four cigarettes per day.

‘Above this level, the slope was less pronounced.’ Those smoking more than a pack a day were four times more likely to suffer heart disease. But their risk of lung cancer increased hugely up to 30- fold.

The researchers said it had often been assumed that a few cigarettes a day were not harmful. But the health message was clear, they insisted.

‘The results from this and other studies imply that smoking- control policymakers and health educators should emphasise more strongly that light smokers are also endangering their health,’ they said.

‘Is there a threshold for daily cigarette consumption that must be exceeded before serious health consequences occur?

‘In most studies, the lowest consumption group was set at one to nine or one to 15 cigarettes per day.

‘One may argue that smokers in these groups clustered close to the upper limit and a threshold might be found on a lower level.

‘Only a few studies have reported on the health consequences of smoking fewer than five cigarettes per day.’ June Davison, of the British Heart Foundation, said last night: ‘Smoking kills over 30,000 people each year in the UK from heart and circulatory disease.

‘This study only adds fuel to the evidence that every cigarette counts.

‘Cigarette smoke can affect the lining of the arteries, leading to a build-up of a fatty plaque called atheroma.

‘This can cause potentially fatal conditions such as a heart attack or a stroke.

‘It is important to remember that every cigarette makes a difference.

‘Even as little as one a day can endanger the health of smokers and those around them.’ [email protected]

Smart Collector: Value of ‘Sad’ Irons Can Make Sellers Happy

Q: Can you tell me anything about my solid brass iron, five inches long? The lid opens and it has three slots on each side. — Inez, Yorktown, Va.

A: Before electric irons, women (and men) used metal irons called “sad” irons.

Sad refers not to the user’s frame of mind, though the work was arduous, but to the weight of the iron. To prepare for ironing, the worker placed a small heavy metal iron atop a wood-burning stove used for heating or cooking.

The hot surface was then pressed to the fabric; that’s why it is called “iron” — ing!

Early sad irons were solid metal, usually iron. Later refinements included a metal slug heated and placed in a metal frame, irons fueled with white gas (kerosene), alcohol, electric or other fuel types, and irons lined with asbestos.

In 1871, Mary Potts of Ottumwa, Iowa, revolutionized the industry by patenting an iron with a detachable handle. Known as the “Mrs. Potts’ Sad Iron,” her invention enabled workers to keep alternate handleless irons heating on the stove. When the iron cooled, bottom units were exchanged.

Visit www.irons.com for a link to the Midwest Sad Irons Collectors Club (MSICC). Don’t let the regional tag fool you; the group is international, with members from throughout the U.S. plus several countries.

Based on holes in the side of the reader’s iron, MSICC President John Morley, Jr. thinks it is probably a charcoal iron. When filled with hot coals, the unit was ready to press. The brass rooster knob that lifts the top lid is an occasional ornament in sad irons.

This unit could be an early iron or a repro. As Morley explained, “because of their popularity and collectibility, some fancy early irons have been reproduced.”

Of course, value will differ, depending on the truth. Checking eBay, a similar iron was posted with no bids, probably because potential bidders smelled a repro.

To determine age and authenticity, the iron must be seen by a collector. I suggest you contact Morley or another officer of the MSICC.

FYI: Morley, who collects children’s sad irons, is reachable by linking to MSICC through the site above. If the site does not give enough info, he suggests “Pressing Irons and Trivets” by Esther S. Berney. It is out of print, so check your library for a copy.

Fishing

After we ran the photo of an $11,110 lure, several readers inquired about pricing vintage or antique fishing gear. Start with either the auction house that sold the lure, [email protected], or find what you have in a price guide.

For Heddon, try “The Heddon Legacy,” by Bill Roberts & Rob Pavey, $29.95 from Collector Books. From the same publisher, Vols. I and II of “Fishing Lure Collectibles” By Dudley Murphy & Rick Edmisten, are $29.95 each.

Auction action

A 4-inch-long presentation hardstone snuff box made in St. Petersburg circa 1890 that sold at Sotheby’s London for $147,984 was originally presented by Emperor Nicholas II to a French diplomat.

According to custom, Imperial gifts were adorned with gems, which could then be exchanged for gold or money. Here, only a large and two small diamonds remain in their jeweled, three-color gold mounts. The rest have been replaced with paste.

Collector quiz

Q: Can you match these Pyrex glass pieces with original 1953 prices?

a. round cake dish __ 1. $3.45

b. percolator __ 2. $.79

c. 3 qt. saucepan __ 3. $.95

d. 2 qt. covered bowl __ 4. $1.95

e. oven/fridge set four __ 5. $2.95

A: 1-b, 2-d, 3-a, 4-c, 5-e.

Source: “Florences’ Ovenware from the 1920s to Present,” by Gene Florence, $24.95 from Collector Books.

Danielle Arnet welcomes questions from readers. She cannot respond to each one individually, but will answer those of general interest in her column. Send e-mail to [email protected] or write Danielle Arnet, c/o Tribune Media Services, 435 N. Michigan Ave., Suite 1400, Chicago, IL 60611. Please include an address in your query.

Vitamin D Deficiency: A Hidden Health Epidemic Among African-American Women

PITTSBURGH, Sept. 22 /PRNewswire/ — A growing body of research supports the finding that vitamin D deficiency is a major health crisis for African- American women. While 70 percent of all women ages 51-70 and nearly 90 percent of women older than 70 aren’t getting enough vitamin D, African-American women are at even greater risk. If they’re between 19 and 49 years old, they have 10 times less vitamin D in their blood than their Caucasian counterparts.

Active, healthy lives depend on beautiful, healthy bones. Healthy bones depend on calcium, which in turn depends on vitamin D to help with calcium’s absorption into the body. In addition to bone health, vitamin D is also important in building and maintaining healthy muscles.

Vitamin D helps muscle cells mature and function and helps keep them active and strong enough to support the body. On the other hand, lack of vitamin D can make muscles weak, which may be why symptoms of aching bones and muscle discomfort, which are unexplained by any other illness, may be the symptoms of vitamin D deficiency.

“Healthy bones are essential for keeping women active, vibrant and mobile throughout life,” says Dr. Michael Thomas, a nationally renowned women’s health expert.

“Long after we’ve reached mid-life, it’s our bones that help our bodies keep up with our attitudes.”

More than two-thirds of African-American women mistakenly believe they are getting enough vitamin D. In addition, African Americans typically have denser bones, so there is a false assumption that calcium and vitamin D deficiency bypasses this group. The reality is that when African-American women reach midlife, their risk of developing osteoporosis more closely resembles that of Caucasians, and if over the age of 65, between 80 percent and 95 percent of bone fractures among African-American women are due to osteoporosis.

“Simple changes in diet, exercise and mindset can be the difference between daily aches and muscle discomfort and maintaining a vibrant, active lifestyle well past your prime,” Dr. Thomas says. “The time is now to join the U.S. Surgeon General and other bone experts to help minimize the epidemic and join the quest to get women of color bone-healthy beautiful.”

THE COLOR IN BONES – WHY BLACK WOMEN ARE AT HIGHER RISK

A variety of factors can cause calcium and vitamin D deficiency in African-American women. The high melanin content in darker skin reduces the skin’s ability to produce vitamin D from sunlight. In fact, experts note that people with darker skin may need 20 to 30 times as much exposure to sunlight as fair-skinned individuals to generate the same amount of vitamin D. Inadequate intake of vitamin D in diet is another factor. Studies confirm that African Americans consume the lowest amounts of vitamin D from food alone among different ethnicities. According to the National Institutes of Health (NIH), as many as 75 percent of African Americans are lactose intolerant, possibly further limiting the consumption of calcium and vitamin D fortified dairy products.

Bone Straight … the Low-down on Supplements

More than 75 percent of Americans are not meeting the current calcium intake recommendation. And while some women may think they’re receiving enough, most women in a recent study underestimated their daily calcium needs by at least half. Consequently, African-American women, who are at higher risk than the general population, should consider taking a calcium supplement with vitamin D to help make up for what is needed daily. Here are tips on choosing the right calcium and vitamin D supplement for you:

    * All Choked Up! ... Many women have problems swallowing calcium pills.      Consider smaller, chewable tablets and those that are carbonate-based,      which are more concentrated and allow you to take fewer pills.    * The Host with the Most! ... Check for calcium supplements with at least      500mg per serving that are enhanced with 400 IU of vitamin D, like the      Os-Cal(R) Chewable with the most vitamin D.    * Takers can be Choosers! ... Not all calcium supplements are the same.      Calcium carbonate-based supplements are generally more economical per      dose because the calcium is the most concentrated.  They also are the      most widely used so they're easily accessible over the counter at most      major grocery and drug stores.    VITAMIN D MATTERS!  

Living out its commitment to keeping America bone healthy, the Os-Cal Chewable We Matter, Vitamin D Matters! Forums are a series of educational events that will be held in churches across the country to help African- American women learn about the importance of maintaining their bone health – along with their inner spiritual beauty. The inaugural event kicked off July 29 in Washington, D.C., in conjunction with the National Urban League’s annual conference. Each forum will feature “O,” The Oprah Magazine’s, “Dream Team of Health Experts” (Byllye Avery, Dr. Janet Taylor and Dr. Susan Taylor) to inspire women to stay bone healthy.

“The first and most important step in preventing vitamin D deficiency is to become a catalyst for dispelling myths in the African-American community about bone health,” Dr. Thomas says. “These events allow for open, honest discussion and create a platform to dispel myths that have circulated within the African-American community for years — such as we don’t need supplements because of our higher bone densities. It’s a chance to teach and — potentially — to make lives longer through beautiful, healthy bones.”

Call 1-866-My-Bone-Health for a free guide about keeping your bones healthy, or visit http://www.oscal.com/champion for more information.

    BY THE NUMBERS!     How Much Calcium Do I Need?*     Women(1)    9-18 years          1,300 milligrams/day    19-50 years         1,000 milligrams/day    51-70+ years        1,200 milligrams/day     Pregnant/Lactating Women    Up to 18 years      1,300 milligrams/day    19+ years           1,000 milligrams/day     Post-Menopausal Women(2)    50+ (Not on HRT)    1,500 milligrams/day      How Much Vitamin D Do I Need?**    Women, 19-50 years  200 IU    Women, 51-70 years  400 IU    Women, 71+ years    600 IU     Pregnant/Lactating    Up to 18 years      200 IU    19-50 years         200 IU     * Sources: (1) National Academy of Sciences; (2) Optimal Calcium Intake,      National Institutes of Health Consensus Statement    About GlaxoSmithKline Consumer Healthcare  

GlaxoSmithKline Consumer Healthcare is one of the world’s largest over- the-counter consumer healthcare products companies. Its more than 30 well- known brands include the No. 1 doctor- and pharmacist-recommended calcium supplement Os-Cal, the leading smoking cessation products, Nicorette(R) and NicoDerm(R), as well as many medicine cabinet staples, Abreva(R), Aquafresh(R), Sensodyne(R) and Tums(R).

About GlaxoSmithKline

GlaxoSmithKline — one of the world’s leading research-based pharmaceutical and healthcare companies — is committed to improving the quality of human life by enabling people to do more, feel better and live longer.

GlaxoSmithKline Consumer Healthcare

CONTACT: Media, Mary Eva Tredway of Duffy Communications,+1-404-266-2600, Ext. 247, or [email protected]; or Lori H. Lukus ofGlaxoSmithKline Consumer Healthcare, +1-412-200-3543, or [email protected]

Web site: http://www.oscal.com/champion

Once-a-Month Pill That Makes It Easier to Fight Osteoporosis

A MONTHLY tablet which tackles osteoporosis thinning bones has been launched in the UK.

Doctors believe the convenience of taking Bonviva only 12 times a year will help sufferers stick to their medication and reduce the disability caused by osteoporosis.

Bonviva is one of a class of drugs called bisphosphonates, which build bones in women at risk of osteoporosis after the menopause.

Other drugs are taken daily or weekly and researchers last year found many patients were forgetting or giving up on their treatment.

In the UK, up to 80 per cent of women taking a once-daily bisphosphonate and 60 per cent on once-weekly medication did not manage to take their treatment properly for a year. This may be due to the strict regime patients have to follow when taking bisphosphonates.

They must take the tablet before they eat that day and then stay standing or sitting upright and fasting for an hour.

It is hoped that by reducing the frequency of the regime, women will be less likely to stop treatment.

Osteoporosis causes bones to weaken and fracture easily.

Bonviva reduces the rate of bone breakdown which, when coupled with poor bone-building in older women, means they experience an overall loss of bone.

The treatment has been developed by the drug companies GlaxoSmithKline and Roche.

Dr Mike Stone, a consultant physician at Llandough Hospital in Cardiff, said treatments for osteoporosis could work only if patients continue to take them.

He added: ‘When you consider that patients may be more likely to stay on treatments longer if they have to take them less frequently, you can see immediately what a positive impact a once-monthly treatment could have on people’s lives.’

Dr Louise Dolan, a consultant rheumatologist at Queen Elizabeth Hospital in South East London, said: ‘A once-amonth treatment option should encourage women to take their treatment regularly.’

Rosemary Shand discovered she had osteoporosis six years ago when she fell and fractured her wrist.

The 56-year-old nurse, from Chippenham, Wiltshire, was prescribed a daily bisphosphonate. But she often thought about giving up the medication because it was such a chore.

Mrs Shand had to fast overnight and take a tablet first thing in the morning, then remain upright without eating for an hour.

‘I resented having to take this medication every morning,’ she said.

‘It meant I couldn’t have a cup of tea in the morning, which I wanted, or breakfast and meant I had to go to work hungry.

Having to take a tablet once a day was a chore, it was inconvenient and I had to get up an hour early just to make sure that I took it and remained upright.’

Six months ago, Mrs Shand began taking Bonviva.

‘This medication is a real breakthrough,’ she said. ‘My first thought in the morning is no longer that I have to take medication for osteoporosis.

‘Now I just mark in my diary when every month I have to take the tablet and that’s it.

‘I have so much more freedom and enjoy my life a lot more.’

Women are also being urged to ensure they are getting enough vitamin D to reduce their risk of bone problems.

A campaign launched by the charity Women’s Health Concern warns that even women who are already being treated for osteoporosis may have inadequate levels of the vitamin.

One study has found that 97 per cent of hip fracture patients were suffering from a shortage of vitamin D, which is essential for healthy bones.

Karen Winterhalter, executive director of WHC, said the research is ‘very worrying’.

She added: ‘Bone fractures take a terrible toll, especially after the menopause, and many could be prevented with lifestyle measures and proper treatment.

‘Most people already know that calcium is important to protect their bones but fewer are aware of the contribution made by vitamin D to bone health.’

Vitamin D and calcium supplements are a central part of osteoporosis treatment. The vitamin helps the body absorb calcium.

Unlike calcium, vitamin D is not readily available in the diet and the most convenient source is in supplements.

To get the required daily amount of vitamin D from diet alone, an adult would have to eat nine eggs.

[email protected]

Bush prepares Rita response

By Adam Entous

WASHINGTON (Reuters) – Still under a cloud over the slow
response to Hurricane Katrina, President George W. Bush and top
aides rushed on Wednesday to assure the public they would be
able to avoid a repeat of the problems when Hurricane Rita
strikes.

Bush issued pre-emptive emergency declarations for Texas
and Louisiana, while Homeland Security Secretary Michael
Chertoff and acting FEMA Director David Paulison fanned out to
tout improved federal preparations and coordination with state
and local officials.

Bush said he had spoken to the governors of Texas and
Louisiana about preparations for Rita, which grew into a
monster Category 5 storm and took aim at Texas, Bush’s home
state.

Chertoff said there was a push to evacuate people in
affected areas as early as possible. Paulison said federal and
state officials were in almost hourly contact and that one of
the important things the Federal Emergency Management Agency
was doing this time was working with the Pentagon ahead of time
to preposition supplies.

“We’re going to make sure this time, to make sure we have
all those resources available,” Paulison said.

White House officials were already laying the groundwork
for Bush to visit or get close to the disaster zone soon after
Rita passes, leaving his schedule open for Saturday and Sunday.

Bush came under fire for waiting several days before
visiting New Orleans after Katrina devastated that city. He has
since returned five times to the disaster zone.

Administration officials are counting on a more aggressive,
hands-on approach to Hurricane Rita to help counter criticism
of their slow and confused response to Katrina. Since that
storm hit on August 29, Bush has seen his overall approval
ratings drop to new lows.

The effort could pay off politically for Bush, said Bruce
Buchanan, a political scientist at the University of Texas. “It
does supplant the memories (of Katrina), assuming he does
well,” Buchanan said.

“Federal, state and local governments are coordinating
their efforts to get ready,” Bush said. “We hope and pray that
Hurricane Rita will not be a devastating storm, but we’ve got
to be ready for the worst.”

His emergency declarations for Texas and Louisiana
authorized the Homeland Security Department and FEMA to
coordinate all disaster relief efforts.

For a second day running, Paulison held a media briefing to
read out a list of actions the agency was taking to prepare for
Rita.

The White House said truckloads of water, ice and food were
being prepositioned in Texas. Officials said the Coast Guard
had rescue helicopters at the ready in Houston and Corpus
Christi.

“Coordination at all levels needs to be seamless, or as
seamless as possible, and that’s what we’re working to do,”
White House spokesman Scott McClellan told reporters.

One of the horrors in the aftermath of Katrina was the
discovery of nursing home residents who had been left behind
and drowned.

Ahead of Rita, Chertoff said, authorities were “making
provisions for people in nursing homes or hospitals to get them
out so they are out of harm’s way and don’t need to be
rescued.”

(Additional reporting by Steve Holland and Deborah Charles)

Oh Baby! ; Hospitals Investing a Bundle to Pamper Moms

Flat-screen TVs, room service, plush comforters, little bottles of shampoo, bathrobes, complimentary massages and, before long, facials, manicures, pedicures and more. If I couldn’t imagine how much it hurts, I’d have a baby just for a few days of pampering.

Hospitals are investing millions – in brick and mortar as well as technology – to provide new moms a more luxurious stay. Pascack Valley Hospital in Westwood spent more than $50 million on a new wing scheduled to open in the next few weeks. The largest section of which, by far, is an entire floor devoted to maternity.

Pascack Valley is not alone. In December, Hackensack University Medical Center plans to open a gargantuan new building serving women and children. Englewood Hospital and Medical Center expects to complete its third – and final – “trimester” of renovations on its maternity units in the next few months. Chilton Memorial Hospital in Pompton Plains aims to reconfigure all of its rooms to private ones by the year’s end. And Paterson’s Barnert Hospital is transitioning toward all single suites.

Why all this upgrading? In the eye of health-care providers, women are the decision-makers. And since their first exposure to a medical center is often during pregnancy, if they have a positive experience, they’ll bring the family back.

“OB is the entry point of purchase,” says Zahava Cohen, director of patient care at Englewood Hospital. “You got to make sure you knock somebody’s socks off.” (Or, in this case, their baby’s booties off.)

Women want posh, and hospitals are delivering, often at no extra cost.

“It doesn’t matter that the floors are clean,” says Laura LaBarbera, director of patient services at Chilton. High-quality care is expected, amenities are desired. The average age of women giving birth is getting older, LaBarbera says. Many new moms have traveled extensively and are used to shopping around.

“They’re not as easy to please,” LaBarbera says. But hospitals are trying.

Years ago, more than one mom and crying newborn in a room were standard. Today, almost all labor and delivery rooms are private. Postpartum rooms in suburban hospitals, where moms rest for 48 hours after a normal vaginal delivery or four days after a Caesarean section, are largely transitioning to private suites. In them, dads may stay overnight in sleeper chairs or pull-out couches, and more visitors are allowed for longer periods of time.

“Women like to share their pregnancies with their families,” says Dr. Manuel Alvarez, chairman of obstetrics and gynecology at Hackensack University Medical Center. Private rooms make that possible.

That was true for the Dorundas of Wayne, who opted for a private room at Chilton last month.

Sitting on a plush sleeper couch with 5-pound twins Michael and Abigail nestled in their arms, the first-time parents looked rested and relaxed: Jaime, 28, in her fluffy pink slippers and Michael, 30, in khaki shorts and running sneakers.

“I would make sure you at least have the option for a private room,” Jaime said. Twins or no twins, agreed Michael.

At Chilton, a private room costs an additional $125 per night, not covered by insurance. At hospitals such as Pascack Valley, however, where all the rooms are private, there is no difference in cost.

Suburban hospitals are ahead of their city counterparts when it comes to courting moms. At Lenox Hill Hospital in Manhattan, where many celebrities, such as Sarah Jessica Parker, have given birth, double rooms are still the standard. And some hospitals in the city charge as much as $450 per night for a private room.

With single suites a widespread goal for suburban hospitals, the amenities race is on.

Teaneck’s Holy Name Hospital has bedside entertainment systems providing free Internet access, video games and music.

Pascack Valley’s new private rooms and nursery overlook an open- air garden complete with fountain and lush topiaries shaped like a giraffe and teddy bear.

Englewood’s new family waiting room contains a cappuccino maker, and a bathrobe hangs in patient bathrooms.

The labor and delivery room at Chilton is like a bedroom decorated with crystal lamps on dressers and sconces on the wall, all dimmed to create a serene setting.

Hackensack’s new unit will have Wi-Fi access, and women will be able to get manicures and pedicures as well as room service around the clock.

At Barnert, the new mother and a guest enjoy a “celebration dinner” with china, glassware and sparkling water.

St. Mary’s Hospital in Passaic tucks all hospital tubes behind sliding picture frames on walls and places televisions in cabinets rather than hang them from the ceiling.

Most of the spa-type features are complimentary, such as yoga and massages at Englewood and aromatherapy during labor at Chilton. Englewood intends to offer even more lavish services through VIP packages for additional fees.

Health-care providers agree that hospitals not only use the posh environments to attract women but also to recruit doctors and especially nurses, who are in short supply. Hospital administrators acknowledge that many physicians cross the bridge to practice in such surroundings. Englewood, for example, is affiliated with Mount Sinai Hospital in Manhattan. That gives obstetricians the ability to offer a city or scenic delivery to patients – and hospitals the opportunity to impress.

But it’s not all about luxury, doctors say.

“It’s not a hotel,” says Faith Frieden, chief of obstetrics and gynecology at Englewood. “It’s still first and foremost a medical care center.”

All the hospitals are increasing space for classes and lactation consulting offered in several languages. Pascack Valley’s new wing will offer higher-level neonatology units than in the past. Englewood has purchased a 4-D ultrasound machine for its new floor.

In the end, for Jaime Dorunda – who had a Caesarean section two days early – none of the amenities mattered. The nurses by her side, Dorunda said, mattered most.

* *

HOSPITAL HOSPITALITY

Combine all the amenities coming to life at North Jersey hospitals for new moms and you have a five-star, luxury accommodation – with everything but the bellhop.

* Room service (including ethnic and vegetarian dishes)

* Bathrobes

* -Manicures and pedicures

* -Complimentary massages

* -Yoga classes

* -Flat-screen TVs

* -Entertainment systems with video games and music playlists

* -Wi-Fi Internet access

* Cappuccino makers in waiting rooms

* Sleeper couches for overnight guests

* -Romantic dinners for two

**

E-mail: [email protected]

Personalized Medicines Over-Hyped, Report Says

LONDON — Personalized medicines targeted according to a patient’s genetic profile have been over-hyped and their widespread use is still 15 to 20 years away, leading scientists said on Wednesday.

The field, known as pharmacogenetics, has made strides in the battle against certain cancers and shows great promise in improving efficacy, reducing adverse reactions of drugs and limiting medical costs.

However, a report by the Royal Society, an independent academy of leading scientists, said more research into the genetics of complex diseases, DNA testing, international guidelines and investment were needed before targeted therapies would be widely available.

“Personalized medicines show promise but they have undoubtedly been over-hyped,” said David Weatherall, who chairs the working group that produced the report.

“This is a long-term goal and it will take many years to come to fruition.”

The sequencing of the human genome paved the way for scientists and drug firms to match drugs and doses to particular patients and sparked predictions it could occur quickly.

For some cancer patients, it has.

Novartis’s Glivec for leukemia and Genentech’s Herceptin for breast cancer are so-called smart drugs that target molecular abnormalities or altered genes that promote tumor growth.

“The cancer field has led the way in the most remarkable way,” Weatherall told a news conference to launch the report.

A shortage of researchers, lack of knowledge about the genetics of diseases and funding have hampered progress against other illnesses.

FINANCIAL INCENTIVES

The report recommends introducing financial incentives at the national and European level to encourage pharmaceutical companies to develop pharmacogenetic drugs with smaller potential markets than blockbuster medicines.

It also believes money should be available to research scientists to test existing, off-patent drugs, to determine the impact of genetics on adverse side effects in patients.

The report said the onus would be on governments to fund or provide incentives for carrying out tests on off-patent drugs.

Weatherall said it represented a major problem because the tests would need to be done on a drug-by-drug basis.

“We badly need guidelines for genetic research across international frontiers,” he adding, emphasizing the international scope of the challenge.

More money should also come from companies that produce diagnostic DNA tests to match the treatment to the patient.

Personalized medicine could also play an important role against the world’s biggest killers in the developing world such as malaria, tuberculosis and HIV/AIDS, and research will need to be done in developing countries.

Hospital forgotten during Katrina looks for future

By Maggie Fox, Health and Science Correspondent

NEW ORLEANS (Reuters) – Dr. Peter De Blieux struggled for
four days to get desperate and impoverished patients safely out
of flooded Charity Hospital in downtown New Orleans. Now he is
fighting to get them back.

Dr. Ben deBoisblanc watched in frustration as helicopter
after helicopter swept away patients and even able-bodied staff
from the for-profit hospital across the flooded street from
Charity, while two of his own desperately ill patients died
after waiting for hours for help.

Three weeks later Charity Hospital sits empty and dark.
Clean sheets cover the examining tables in the emergency room
and hallways once filled with four days worth of human detritus
are pristine.

Outside, De Blieux consults with Army Special Forces troops
who helped drain the remaining putrid water from the basement
so that bodies that have been sitting in the morgue since
before the storm hit on August 29 can be removed.

Now as New Orleans struggles to recover, they say it is
time to decide what kind of future they and their patients will
have.

The future of the non-profit, aging Charity facility, part
of the state-run Louisiana State University system, symbolizes
the dilemmas that must be addressed.

DEFINING A NATION

“I really believe that this will define us as a nation —
how we respond to this,” deBoisblanc said in a telephone
interview from his temporary home in Baton Rouge.

“We are either going to do it right or we are going to do
it wrong. I am not saying hand out a free Lexus to everybody
who has been displaced. We have to be very, very careful that
we don’t take these victims and somehow ostracize them because
it’s inconvenient for us or makes our lives more difficult.”

Charity’s plight was one of the most dramatic stories to
come out of the storm that first battered New Orleans and then
drowned it with filthy water.

During the crisis, doctors, nurses and other staff carried
their frailest patients upstairs as water filled the basement
and shorted out the generators, and they pleaded for help that
did not arrive for days.

The storm hit on a Monday, and on Wednesday staff were
still pumping by hand to ventilate patients who could not
breathe on their own.

The flood blew out the generators and backed up sewage, and
the hospital began to stink of trash, sweat and human waste.

“It became obvious that FEMA was not going to come,” said
deBoisblanc, who runs the intensive care units in the hospital,
referring to the Federal Emergency Management Agency.

“We were going to have to find our own way out.”

By Wednesday afternoon some of the trainee doctors, called
residents, called up the television networks. A private
helicopter operator promised to send aircraft if they could get
the patients to a landing pad.

A canoe and a National Guard truck were waved down and four
of the most desperate patients were ferried across the street
to Tulane University’s hospital. One Charity patient got out.
The good Samaritan’s helicopters were commandeered — probably
by accident, said deBoisblanc — to remove three other
patients.

Black Hawk helicopters with night vision eventually came to
the rescue, and deBoisblanc went with one to a triage area on a
highway cloverleaf intersection.

“What do you see but all these ambulances — dozens of
ambulances. I asked how long have you all been there, and this
guy said three days.”

Stunningly, no one had directed the ambulances to other
locations where they could have been put to use.

EVERY ONE FOR HIMSELF

DeBoisblanc flew back to Charity and brought the remaining
30 or so intensive-care patients from his unit to Tulane
hospital across the street.

Once there, “we waited and waited and waited as helicopter
after helicopter landed and loaded up patients, which in some
cases seems valid,” he said. “Other times able-bodied doctors,
nurses and family members went while these patients sat on the
rooftop.”

It was not completely cold-blooded, deBoisblanc said. Some
helicopters were not configured to carry patients strapped to
boards, and many people had been standing in a line of hundreds
for hours, waiting to get out. It was dark; it was confusing.

But then a very large cargo helicopter arrived.

“It can hold 30 people,” deBoisblanc said. And it did — 30
people who walked aboard on their own.

“We stood there in disbelief that we had 30 patients there
and there was no sense of priority of these sick patients over
other patients. At the time I was pretty pissed off.”

Guards with guns were keeping order, said deBoisblanc, and
no arguments were tolerated.

“It was a product of the lack of command and control
structure,” he said. “It became survival of the fittest. There
was no sense of shared resources.”

People were struggling to take care of those they felt
personally responsible for, deBoisblanc said.

But two patients died, including a frail old woman whose
husband had sat by her side day and night, fanning her to keep
her cool, and who had been expected to survive. They were
separated at the end.

“She died being hugged by lots of wonderful nurses and
residents who cradled her in their arms and petted her and told
her it was all going to be OK. She did not die alone,”
deBoisblanc said.

Some staff, like deBoisblanc, themselves became refugees
after the last patient left the Friday after the storm. He has
not been back.

De Blieux, who helped oversee the emergency department,
commutes daily from his wife and young children in Baton Rouge
to help clean up the hospital.

The building may be old, but it is filled with
state-of-the-art equipment, including a hyperbaric chamber used
to force oxygen into the tissues of seriously ill patients.

De Blieux and other volunteers have labored for days in the
heat and darkness to clear out trash and human waste from the
upper floors.

Despite their efforts, the hospital may never reopen to
patients. The flood fried the electricity panel and ruined the
sewage system.

Charity’s administrators see an opportunity to replace the
1930s facility with something newer and better as New Orleans
rebuilds and perhaps reinvents itself.

“Charity Hospital was an obsolete physical plant. The state
had appropriated some money to pay for a new hospital — a
state-of-the-art indigent care facility. So it doesn’t make
sense to spend a lot of money putting the hospital back
together,” said deBoisblanc.

“We don’t have patients living in New Orleans. What makes
more sense to me is as we re-populate the city, use a temporary
facility.”

There is talk of bringing a hospital ship in, says
deBoisblanc. But, he adds, “First of all we have got to make
sure a new hospital is going to be built.”

But it would take four years to build one. Where would the
poor of New Orleans go in the meantime?, De Blieux asked.

“It is the only indigent care facility in the city,” he
said.

Like everywhere else in the United States, there are
facilities for people with insurance but very little for those
without — who include the so-called working poor.

The three big New Orleans hospitals that remained operating
through Katrina’s fury and afterwards are run by for-profit
corporations, and anyway they are in the suburbs, accessible
only by car.

The Cultural Identity of Students: What Teachers Should Know

Every student conies to the classroom with a set of behaviors and characteristics that makes him or her unique and that will affect his or her academic achievement. Banks and Banks (2005, 13) noted, “Behavior is shaped by group norms … the group equips individuals with the behavior patterns they need in order to adapt.” Furthermore, students identify with certain groups to experience a feeling of belonging. Campbell (2004) stated that students of all ages have a strong need to belong to groups, because groups provide a source of motivation.

Students may identity with certain groups because of race, social class, or religion. These categories are some of the social constructions of culture; they provide a sense of cultural identity. To enhance academic success, teachers can use information about cultural identity to create learning environments that recognize the cultural contributions of students.

Student Self-Concept

The set of beliefs that individuals hold about themselves is termed self-concept or self-image (Bennett 2003). Socializing agents- such as peer groups, media, parents, and teachers-influence the development of a positive or negative student self-concept. A positive self-concept contributes to the academic success of the student, while a poor self-concept “becomes one of the most challenging individual differences in how he or she will learn” (Bennett 2003,222).This challenge requires teachers to address a variety of social and academic needs of students.

As students develop their selfconcept during adolescence, they also develop a sense of cultural identity. “Cultural identity is adapted and changed throughout life in response to political, economic, educational, and social experiences” (Gollnick and Chinn 2002,21). An awareness of their self-concept and cultural identity provides the foundation for how students define themselves in terms of how others view them. Thus, teachers need to view students as cultural beings, embrace student diversity, and validate the cultural identity of students. In doing so, classrooms that model tolerance and appreciation of student differences will be created.

School Environment

Developing an awareness of cultural identity and how it affects education and interactions with others in school can be challenging for adolescents. Teachers must be aware of how much cultural identity influences the education of students. In addition, teachers must be cognizant that their teaching practices, their interactions with students, and their own ideas about identity influence the academic success and social development of their students. According to Tatum (1997,18), “the concept of identity is a complex one, shaped by individual characteristics, family dynamics, historical factors, and social and political contexts.”

The cultural identities of students are constructed from their experiences with the 12 attributes of culture identified by Cushner, McClelland, and Safford (2000): ethnicity/nationality, social class, sex/gender, health, age, geographic region, sexuality, religion, social status, language, ability/disability, and race. Students’ cultural identities are defined by these experiences, and students learn these identities within a culture through socializing agents (Campbell 2004). Therefore, teachers must understand that these cultural identities define who the students are.

Students can discover and share their cultural identities through writing projects that focus on their cultural heritages. The resulting writing can trigger other lessons that incorporate the cultures of students. By developing lessons that highlight students’ cultures and experiences, the teacher actively engages them in learning. Therefore, teachers are meeting the students where they are. In this way, an awareness of the cultural identity of the student affects how well the student will interact with the teacher, how well the student will interact with his or her peers, and how the student views his or her acceptance within the cultural group and within the classroom (Campbell 2004).

Student-teacher and student-student interactions are predicated on whether or not each person’s needs are met. The teacher can meet students’ needs by modeling a concerned attitude for the well-being of students and by creating a caring environment where students feel valued and appreciated. For example, a teacher may set the tone for a caring classroom environment by including students’ viewpoints in the development of classroom rules or responsibilities. A teacher also may show care and concern for students by expressing an interest in their daily or extracurricular activities. In turn, students should respond positively to a teacher who understands the cultural dynamics of the classroom. Students will strive to build a respectful rapport with the teacher because they feel that the teacher genuinely cares about them.

Multicultural Teaching

Teachers can help students feel comfortable with their cultural identity and assist them in their learning by using a multicultural teaching approach that embraces diversity in the classroom. Campbell (2004, 60) wrote, “Multicultural education should assist students as they learn and explore their changing identities.” Teachers with a multicultural education perspective can assist students through culturally relevant teaching, which Gay (2000, 1) defined as “using the cultural knowledge, prior experiences, frames of reference, and performance styles of ethnically diverse students to make learning encounters more relevant to and effective for them.”

Culturally relevant teaching starts by the teacher getting to know students on a personal level, building teaching around the students’ interests when possible, and showcasing the talents of students and using those student gifts as teaching tools (Bennett 2003). These three areas allow the classroom to become learner- centered and promote the academic success of all students. Culturally relevant teaching, according to Bennett (2003, 257) has three underlying principals: “students must experience academic success,””students must develop and/or maintain cultural competence,” and “students must develop a ‘critical consciousness’ through which they may challenge social injustice.” That is, teachers must empower students to succeed by providing them with a learning environment which respects their culture, embraces their diversity, and celebrates their differences. Teachers can empower students by spending more time mentoring them rather than managing them.

What is it that teachers should know?

* Our students need to belong, to be valued, and to be appreciated on a daily basis.

* Students’ cultures have value in the classroom, and these cultural identities must be validated through lessons and teaching practices.

* A philosophy that demands high expectations of all students is the beginning of empowering students for success.

The teacher’s ability to identify with students or understand the cultural identities of students is necessary for addressing the needs of every student. Therefore, teachers must learn as much as possible about their students so that they can structure activities, build curricular materials, and tap into resources that will help all students be academically successful.

“Teachers must empower students to succeed by providing them with a Learning environment that respects their culture, embraces their diversity, and celebrates their differences.”

References

Banks, J. A., and C. A. McGee Banks, eds. 2005. Multicultural education: Issues and perspectives, 5th ed. New York: Wiley.

Bennett, C. I. 2003. Comprehensive multicultural education: Theory and practice, 5th ed. Boston: Allyn and Bacon.

Campbell, D. E. 2004. Choosing democracy: A practical guide to multicultural education, 3rd ed. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Merrill.

Cushner, K., A. McClelland, and P. Safford. 2000. Human diversity in education: An integrative approach, 3rd ed. Boston: McGraw-Hill.

Gay, G. 2000. Culturally responsive teaching: Theory, research, and practice. New York: Teachers College Press.

Gollnick, D. M., and P. C. Chinn. 2002. Multicultural education in a pluralistic society, 6th ed. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Merrill.

Tatum, B. D. 1997. ‘Why are all the black kids sitting together In the cafeteria?’ and other conversations about race. New York: Basic Books.

Lisa A. Jones is an Associate Professor of Multicultural Education at the University of Houston-Clear Lake. She teaches courses in Community Collaborations in Diverse Settings and Foundations of Multicultural Education. She is a member of the Zeta Omega Chapter of Kappa Delta Pi.

Copyright Kappa Delta Pi Summer 2005

Indonesia’s moderate Islamic image under threat

By Dean Yates

JAKARTA, Indonesia (Reuters) – Joining a group of young
Indonesian intellectuals who hold liberal Islamic views was
once just a ticket to controversy. Now, it could be
life-threatening.

Since Indonesia’s top Muslim council issued religious
edicts in late July that banned liberal interpretations of the
faith, death threats against members of the 4-year-old Islamic
Liberal Network, known as JIL, have poured in.

The fatwas that JIL says triggered the hate campaign
coincide with the closure of numerous unauthorized Christian
churches by hardline Muslim groups and the jailing this month
of three Christian women for inviting Muslim children to church
events.

The developments have hurt Indonesia’s image as a moderate
Muslim nation and reflect a backlash against liberal opinion as
well as a push by Muslim conservatives to reassert themselves
after the failure of political Islam to gain traction during
last year’s elections, experts say.

“The fatwas have had a snowball effect,” said Nong Darol
Mahmada, a co-founder of the Islamic Liberal Network who has
received dozens of death threats via e-mail and text messages.

“People believe that JIL is banned and that it is now
legally permitted (under Islamic law) to murder us.”

Police guard the Jakarta office that houses JIL after one
militant organization threatened to attack the group, which has
never shied from controversy since its inception in 2001.

It has been quick to poke holes in the arguments of
militant clerics and take the lead in debates about issues from
marriage to the role of religion in politics, often using radio
to reach a broad audience across the world’s most populous
Muslim nation.

IN THE CROSSHAIRS

To some analysts, JIL was a key target when the Indonesian
Ulemas Council (MUI) issued its non-binding fatwas on July 29.

Apart from attacking liberalism, the council forbade
pluralism and inter-religious marriage.

“We are seeing a conservative high tide which is a reaction
to several things, but a common view that Muslim liberals have
taken things too far,” said Greg Fealy, an expert on Indonesian
Islam at the Australian National University in Canberra.

Fealy said he did not believe such a backlash meant the end
of progressive Islamic thought in Indonesia, where Muslims have
embraced democracy and have more freedom to express their views
than in just about any country in the Islamic world.

While it was clear Indonesians increasingly identified with
Islam, last year’s elections showed voters did not care for
Islamist parties that support strict Islamic Sharia law.

Those parties won 23 percent of parliamentary seats last
year, up from 19 percent in 1999.

“People are more self-consciously Islamic but it doesn’t
mean anyone is saying … we should make Indonesia an Islamic
state,” Fealy said.

Many Indonesian Muslims, especially on the main island of
Java, infuse the practice of Islam with local tradition
influenced by Hinduism and mysticism.

Indonesia is also officially secular and recognizes
Christianity and several other religions in addition to Islam.

That has not stopped Islamic militants in the past two
years from closing down some 25 unlicensed churches that
operate from homes and shops.

Christians say the growth of such churches underscores the
difficulty of getting a permit, which requires approval from
local communities where they are usually a minority. Police
have said they cannot act because the churches are illegal.

In another religious case, a court in West Java this month
jailed three Christian women for three years each for inviting
Muslim children to church events without parental consent.

UNFINISHED STORY

JIL was not actually banned in the MUI fatwas, but the
message was clear, said Mahmada, 31, an articulate graduate of
Islamic studies from Indonesia’s most prestigious Islamic
university, as she sipped a bottle of iced tea.

“I am pretty pessimistic about Islam in Indonesia,” she
added.

Down the road at the Al-Muslimun mosque, Imam Pambudi, 41,
a local Islamic community leader, said JIL had to leave the
area.

“At first we had no problems but after the MUI fatwa, the
people here were shocked that something considered haram
(forbidden) by the MUI was among us,” said Pambudi.

Despite what appears to be a series of blows to Indonesia’s
Muslim liberals and the country’s image in general, analysts
like Fealy and Merle Ricklefs, another prominent Australian
expert on Islam in Indonesia, remain generally optimistic.

“This is a story without an ending, but there are grounds
for thinking that the progressive liberalism of Indonesia has
withstood the attack,” Ricklefs wrote in the Australian
Financial Review on September 2.

“With its reactionary fatwas, MUI may indeed have sidelined
itself within a rapidly changing society.”

Frequency of Echogenic Intracardiac Focus By Race/Ethnicity in Euploid Fetuses

Abstract

Objective. To determine the frequency of echogenic intracardiac focus (EIF) by race/ethnicity.

Methods. We performed a retrospective analysis from January 1996 through June 2003. We reviewed all initial sonograms from 14 to 23 weeks gestation in singleton pregnancies. Mothers on admission for delivery provided race/ethnicity.

Results. There were 8207 ultrasounds and deliveries that met study criteria. There were 4636 (56.5%) Caucasian, 2087 (25.4%) African-American, 1261 (15.4%) Hispanic and 223 (2.7 %) Asian subjects. There were 347 (4.2%) EIF detected. The frequency by race/ ethnicity varied significantly (p

Conclusions. This large, population-based study showed that fetuses born to Asian mothers were significantly more likely to have an EIF. This racial difference should be taken into account when counseling patients about the potential for Down syndrome.

Keywords: Echogenic intracardiac focus, race/ethnicity

Introduction

An echogenic intracardiac focus (EIF) noted in the left ventricle of the fetal heart was first described in 1988 [1,2]. Bromley and colleagues first noted an association of the EIF and Down syndrome in their population of women having midtrimester sonograms [3]. Numerous studies since have described the association of an isolated EIF and aneuploidy, chiefly Down syndrome [4-6]. A meta-analysis of sonographic markers for Down syndrome calculated a likelihood ratio of 2.0 for an echogenic focus to adjust the risk for a fetus with Down syndrome [7]. Previous studies have implicated maternal race and ethnicity as an important risk factor for detecting a fetus with an EIF [8-10]. There is little population-based data investigating the association of race and ethnicity with the incidence of echogenic foci. We sought to determine the variation in the frequency of echogenic intracardiac focus by race/ethnicity.

Methods

We performed a retrospective analysis at Saint Francis Hospital and Medical Center, a tertiary community teaching hospital, matching our ultrasound and delivery databases. We examined all ultrasound exams from January 1996 through June 2003. We included all initial sonograms from 14-23 weeks gestation in singleton pregnancies. An EIF was noted if it was as echogenic as bone in any chamber of the fetal heart. Known aneuploid fetuses were excluded. All ultrasound exams were performed in a single AIUM accredited unit with a general population referral base. Mothers upon admission for delivery provided race/ethnicity. Descriptive statistics and Chi-square were performed. The study was approved by our hospital’s IRB.

Results

There were 8207 ultrasounds and deliveries that met study criteria. Down syndrome was known in 40 cases (approximate prevalence 1:200) and these were eliminated from the analysis. Sixty- five percent of the ultrasounds were performed for routine indications such as fetal anatomical survey or for an estimation of gestational age; 34% were targeted ultrasounds. There were 4636 (56.5%) Caucasian, 2087 (25.4%) African-American, 1261 (15.4%) Hispanic and 223 (2.7%) Asian subjects. Broken down by race/ ethnicity, 50% of the scans performed in the Caucasian population were targeted versus 44% for the Asian, 33% of the African- American, and 22% of the Hispanic populations, respectively. EIF were detected in 347 (4.2%) fetuses. The frequency by race/ ethnicity varied significantly (p

Discussion

We have shown that maternal race/ethnicity significantly affects the incidence of sonographically detected fetal echogenic intracardiac focus.

In a prospective series, Shipp and colleagues found a 30.4%, 5.9%, 10.5%, and 11.1% incidence of echogenic intracardiac foci in Asian, black, white and unknown race mothers, respectively [10]. Of the 489 subjects in the study, 46 were Asian and 400 white. In a case control study by Ehrenberg and colleagues, Asian mothers were approximately 5 times more likely to have a fetal echogenic intracardiac focus [9]. However, there were only 103 cases and controls in this study with Asians accounting for about 10% of the subjects. Finally, a small study of Hispanic women in Puerto Rico found 9 echogenic intracardiac foci in 485 normal fetuses (1.9%) [8].

Our study has the advantage of many more subjects than previously reported. Our subjects are a representation of our local population’s racial/ethnic mix. We confirmed the previous report by Shipp and colleagues that Asian race is significantly associated with the detection of an echogenic intracardiac focus, however our percentage of echogenic intracardiac focus in Asian women is considerably smaller than that found in their report. The age of our Asian population with an EIF was 30.6 (SD 5.6) years old compared to 32.7 (SD 5.7) for our Caucasian population indicating that maternal age was not a factor in the higher incidence of EIF.

Figure 1. Incidence of EIF by race/ethnicity.

While this is a retrospective study, the data was collected prospectively and maintained at our institution over a long period of time. While this may introduce ascertainment bias, it would most likely be randomly spread throughout the study population with little impact on the results. Additionally, only women who had an ultrasound and delivered at our institution were included in our analysis. Since our institution provides tertiary care, few patients are transported or deliver elsewhere. The loss of these patients; however, may introduce some selection bias. Our larger numbers may provide a better estimation of the influence of race and ethnicity than previously published. This racial difference should be taken into account when counseling patients about the potential for Down syndrome. With the higher incidence of EIF in the fetuses of Asian mothers, the likelihood ratio for increasing the risk of Down syndrome may be further reduced or become insignificant. Further investigation is needed to determine appropriate likelihood ratios for race/ ethnicity if EIF is used to screen for Down syndrome.

References

1. Levy DW, Mintz MC. The left ventricular echogenic focus: A normal finding. Am J Roentgenol 1988;150:85-86.

2. Schechter AG, Fakhry J, Shapiro LR, Gewitz MH. The left ventricular echogenic focus. Am J Roentgenol 1988;150: 1445-1446.

3. Bromley B, Lieberman E, Laboda L, Benacerraf BR. Echogenic intracardiac focus: A sonographic sign for fetal Down syndrome. Obstet Gynecol 1995;86:998-1001.

4. Nyberg DA, Souter VL. Sonographic markers of fetal trisomies: second trimester. J Ultrasound Med 2001;20: 655-674.

5. Bromley B, lieberman E, Shipp TD, Richardson M, Benacerraf BR. Significance of an echogenic intracardiac focus in fetuses at high and low risk for aneuploidy. J Ultrasound Med 1998;17:127-131.

6. Nyberg DA, Souter VL, El-Bastawissi A, Young S, Luthhardt F, Luthy DA. Isolated sonographic markers for detection of fetal Down syndrome in the second trimester of pregnancy. J Ultrasound Med 2001;20:1053-1063.

7. Smith-Bindman R, Hosmer W, Feldstein VA, Deeks JJ, Goldberg JD. second-trimester ultrasound to detect fetuses with Down syndrome: A meta-analysis. JAMA 2001;285: 1044-1055.

8. De la Vega AVM. Incidence of fetal echogenic intracardiac foci in a Hispanic population. P R Health Sci J 2002;21:349-350.

9. Ehrenberg HM, Fischer RL, Hediger ML, Hansen C, Stine D. Are maternal and sonographic factors associated with the detection of a fetal echogenic cardiac focus? J Ultrasound Med 2001;20:1047-1052.

10. Shipp TD, Bromley B, lieberman E, Benacerraf BR. The frequency of the detection of fetal echogenic intracardiac foci with respect to maternal race. Ultrasound Obstet Gynecol 2000;15:460- 462.

ADAM F. BORGIDA1, CHRISTINE MAFFEO2, ELISA A. GIANFERARRI2, ALAN D. BOLNICK2, CAROLYN M. ZELOP3, & JAMES F. X. EGAN2

1 Division of Maternal Fetal Medicine, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Hartford Hospital, Hartford, CT, USA, 2 Division of Maternal Fetal Medicine, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, University of Connecticut School of Medicine, Farmington, CT, USA, and 3 Division of Maternal Fetal Medicine, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Saint Francis Hospital and Medical Center, Hartford, CT, USA

Correspondence: Adam F. Borgida, MD, 85 Jefferson St. #625, Hartford, CT 06102, USA. Tel: + 1 8605452884. Fax: + 1 8605453396. E- mail: [email protected]

Copyright CRC Press Jul 2005

Americans Spend 90 Percent of Time Indoors – Exposed To Indoor Allergens

NEW YORK, Sept. 19 /PRNewswire/ — STORY SUMMARY: This is a special report.

According to the August 2005 issue of Journal Of Allergy And Clinical Immunology, the number one indoor allergen is allergens from dust mites. On average, Americans now spend more than 90 percent of their time indoors. Researchers believe this may be part of the reason American’s awareness of indoor allergens has doubled.

Mike Tringale of the Asthma and Allergy Foundation of America.

“Removing the source of allergens at home is the first step to better air quality, and keeping allergens out of the air in the first place also plays an important role. In fact, one example of an effective and creative tool is the Febreze Allergen Reducer fabric spray. Research confirms that it actually does reduce up to 75% of allergens from cats, dogs and dust mites that can become airborne from fabrics in the home.”

Febreze is joining forces with the Asthma and Allergy Foundation of America to educate Americans on measures to improve their indoor forecast this fall.

For more information please visit http://www.febreze.com/ and http://www.aafa.org/. I’m Danielle Addair.

ADDITIONAL RESOURCES: Audio version and more available at http://www.prnewswire.com/broadcast/22619/consumer.shtml

AUDIO PROVIDED BY: Febreze

Audio: Note to Editor – Press Only – includes Audio, MP3 requests,contact information and more available athttp://www.prnewswire.com/broadcast/22619/press.shtml

Febreze

CONTACT: MultiVu, 1-800-653-5313, ext. 3 or Tara Rupp, PLUS Media,+1-212-206-8160, ext. 22

Web site: http://www.febreze.com/http://www.aafa.org/

Tropical Storm Rita heads for Florida Keys

By Jane Sutton

MIAMI (Reuters) – Traffic streamed out of the vulnerable
Florida Keys on Monday as Tropical Storm Rita strengthened near
the islands and threatened to power its way into the Gulf of
Mexico three weeks after Hurricane Katrina cut a deadly path
through the region.

A Louisiana official said the levees in New Orleans, where
hundreds died after Katrina struck, would fail again if the
devastated city was smashed by a new storm surge, and oil
companies only just starting to recover from Katrina began to
evacuate oil rigs in the Gulf.

Private forecasters said there was a 40 percent chance that
damaging hurricane-force winds would directly affect key energy
production areas in the Gulf.

Rita was likely to become a major hurricane with winds of
at least 111 mph (178 kph) as it drew strength from warm Gulf
waters after passing over the Florida Keys on Tuesday,
forecasters at the U.S. National Hurricane Center in Miami
said.

Rita’s center was about 345 miles east-southeast of Key
West, Florida, at 5 p.m. (2100 GMT) Monday. It was racing
west-northwest at 14 mph (23 kph) and had top winds of 70 mph
(115 kph), putting it just short of hurricane strength.

The Hurricane Center cautioned the storm still could veer
north to the Miami metropolitan area, home to 2.3 million
people. Miami-Dade County officials urged residents to evacuate
mobile homes, barrier islands and flood-prone areas, and long
lines formed at gas stations as motorists filled their tanks.

Authorities in the Keys, a 110-mile (177-km) chain of
islands connected to the southern tip of Florida by a single
two-lane highway, ordered all 80,000 residents out by
nightfall.

Authorities designated both lanes northbound to speed the
evacuation and a steady stream of traffic headed out of the
Keys. Public buses ferried out those who lacked transportation.

Rita could drench the Keys with up to 15 inches of rain and
send a wall of seawater surging over the islands, flooding the
highway and stranding those who stayed behind.

“That’s where we’ve lost the most people over the years in
this country, from the storm surge,” Ed Rappaport, deputy
director of the hurricane center, told Miami TV station WFOR.

‘SERIOUS, SERIOUS BUSINESS’

Military cargo planes evacuated the Keys’ three acute-care
hospitals, Gov. Jeb Bush said.

Some residents were reluctant to leave the laid-back
islands and were confident it would hit them as a Category 1,
the lowest rung on the five-step scale that measures hurricane
intensity.

“The stores are all boarded up but it’s open, everybody’s
very mellow. The tourists are all gone,” said Key West resident
Christelle Orr. “We may be crazy (not to evacuate) but I mean
it’s not like Louisiana, you know, we’re not under water,” she
said as the cafe where she worked was boarded up.

Others feared the traffic more than the storm.

“If you evacuate, you’ll get stuck on the highway. I feel
safer staying at home,” said Chris Techmer, who lives in a home
on stilts on Sugarloaf Key north of Key West. “I usually stay.
I’ve been through so many hurricanes.”

Rita would be the seventh hurricane to hit Florida in the
last 13 months.

“I worry that we’ve been hit by so many storms that people
now are kind of quantifying between whether it’s a Category 1 –
‘Oh, don’t worry about that one …,”‘ Bush said. “These storms
can gain power very, very quickly and people are forewarned,
this is serious, serious business.”

A hurricane warning was issued for south Florida from just
north of Miami on the Atlantic Coast, through the Florida Keys
and up to Cape Sable on the state’s Gulf coast, alerting
residents to expect hurricane conditions within 24 hours.

Hurricane warnings were also in effect for the northwest
islands of the Bahamas and northwestern Cuba.

The Atlantic hurricane season that runs from June 1 to
November 30 produces an average of about 11 tropical storms or
hurricanes. But forecasters had predicted an unusually active
season with as many as 21 storms due to warm sea-surface
temperatures and other conditions favorable to hurricane
formation. Rita is No. 17.

Hurricane Katrina has been blamed for nearly 1,000 deaths
in six states.

(Additional reporting by Laura Myers and Michael Christie)

Tropical Storm Rita forms near Bahamas

MIAMI (Reuters) – Tropical Storm Rita, the 17th tropical
storm of the busy Atlantic hurricane season, formed near the
Bahamas on Sunday and prompted an evacuation order for tourists
in the lower Florida Keys.

Forecasters said Rita could be a hurricane by late on
Monday, when it was expected to be in the Florida Straits
between the Keys and Cuba. The Bahamas, southern Florida, the
Keys, Cuba and the Turks and Caicos Islands were all under
storm alerts.

At 11 p.m. EDT (0300 GMT), Rita’s center was about 295
miles east-southeast of Nassau, Bahamas, and moving
west-northwest at about 10 mph (16 kph).

Forecasters said Rita’s path could take it into the Gulf of
Mexico by Tuesday or Wednesday.

Rita’s sustained winds had strengthened to near 50 mph (85
kph), with higher gusts.

Authorities in the Florida Keys, a 110-mile chain of
islands off the southern tip of the Florida peninsula, began a
phased evacuation, telling visitors to leave the lower Keys
between the Seven-Mile Bridge and Key West. Schools were
ordered closed on Monday and Tuesday.

The National Hurricane Center cautioned that residents in
mobile homes and in low-lying areas should prepare now for
possible evacuation.

WARNINGS AND WATCHES

A hurricane warning alerting residents to possible
hurricane conditions within 24 hours was in effect for all of
the Keys.

A hurricane watch, telling people they could see hurricane
conditions in 36 hours, was in effect for the northwestern
Bahamas and parts of Cuba.

“Weather conditions will deteriorate slowly on Monday,” the
National Hurricane Center said. “Hurricane force winds of 74
mph (119 kph) or greater will be possible in the Florida Keys
as early as Tuesday morning.

Authorities upgraded the alerts for mainland Florida,
putting the southeastern section of the state from Deerfield
Beach south to Florida City under a tropical storm warning and
hurricane watch.

Southwestern Florida from East Cape Sable to Chokoloskee
was put under a tropical storm watch.

A tropical storm warning was in effect for the Turks and
Caicos islands, a British territory near the Bahamas, and for
the central and southeast Bahamas.

The Atlantic hurricane season, which runs from June 1 to
November 30, produces an average of about 11 tropical storms or
hurricanes. But forecasters had predicted an above-average
season with as many as 21 storms due to high sea-surface
temperatures and other conditions favorable to hurricane
formation.

Hurricane Katrina has been blamed for at least 883 deaths
after it hit the U.S. Gulf coast in late August.

Tropical Storm Philippe, meanwhile, was upgraded to a
hurricane as sustained winds reached 75 mph (120 kph) but was
no immediate threat to any land.

Philippe was about 390 miles east of the Leeward Islands of
the Caribbean. It was moving on a north-northwest track that
would take it through the open Atlantic for the next few days.

Pilonidal Cyst Comes Back

Q: For as long as I can remember, I’ve had a cyst on the end of my tailbone. Then, a few years ago, it started acting up and I went to a doctor, who referred me to a surgeon. The surgeon operated on it, but after a year it has returned.

Now the surgeon tells me that these so-called pilonidal cysts often do recur, and he can’t guarantee that it won’t happen again. I’m only 30 years old. Do I have to look forward to this happening the rest of my life?

— I.L., Rawlings, Md.

A: A pilonidal cyst is very different from other types of cysts that everyone has had from time to time. These form as dead skin collects or infections take place inside a pilonidal sinus. This is the name given to any localized area under the skin that contains hairs. The most common location for a pilonidal cyst is the skin in the area of the tailbone.

The cysts often occur in women between puberty and age 40. People who are obese or those with thick body hair have an increased risk of pilonidal cysts.

The cyst may not cause any symptoms unless it becomes infected. Trauma or injury to the area may cause the cyst to become tender and painful, to form an abscess, and possibly to drain. Trauma increases the risk of bacterial infection in a pilonidal sinus.

Treatment is straightforward, beginning with antibiotics if the area is infected, followed by surgical removal. Many surgical procedures are available, and there is little evidence that one approach works much better than another. Simple incision and scraping it out is commonly used. Benefits and risks of any recommended surgical procedure should be discussed with the surgeon.

These cysts often return after surgery, and the recommended response is to do the surgery again. Unfortunately, the medical research does not indicate which surgical approach is best the second time around.

A recent study done in Europe, reported in the November 2004 issue of the medical journal Diseases of the Colon and Rectum, showed that crystallized phenol was very effective in treating pilonidal cysts.

This chemical was applied topically to the area of the cyst two or three times. The research found that it worked 95 percent of the time, and in only 5 percent of cases did a cyst recur over two years. This appears to be an easy and effective treatment, but it may be years before it is commonly available.

Since you have already had surgery, it very likely that you have a pilonidal cyst. But prior to surgery it can be confused with another problem called hidradenitis suppurativa.

This is a chronic skin condition in which there is inflammation in and around certain types of hair follicles. However, the hair follicles most affected by hidradenitis are located in the groin, armpit and around the nipples.

The most common symptoms are painful, tender, firm, lumpy lesions under the arms. They may open and drain pus spontaneously. Nodules recur several times yearly, but in severe cases there is a constant succession of new lesions.

There is really no great medical treatment for hidradenitis. It usually heals slowly, with or without treatment, over 10 to 30 days.

Embodying Losses in Pat Barker’s Regeneration Trilogy

One challenge in writing about modern warfare is the sheer impossibility of adequately representing the dead and injured. An estimated 10 million men died in World War I and another 20 million were wounded; but statistics are abstractions, and the massive numbers of dead and injured soldiers overwhelm the imagination, making them impossible to grasp. In Writing War in the Twentieth Century, Margot Norris argues that this is a key difficulty facing anyone who attempts to write about modern warfare: “The census of the war dead resists and exceeds both representation and attempts at signification-particularly ontological signification” (3). Thus, novels about modern warfare must confront the difficult problem of how to represent and conceptualize it. If, on the one hand, the sheer scope of the losses is described, readers will find themselves unable to grasp the meaning of such huge numbers or to translate them into human terms. On the other hand, if the experience is individualized, the personal impact may be emphasized although the larger significance of the conflict will be lost. An interrelated challenge is countering the official military language often used to describe war. Military language distorts and justifies warfare by presenting it as a rational act: In the battle phase, it ignores mangled bodies and replaces them with discussions of strategy, gains, and losses. In the aftermath of battle, it idealizes warfare with terms such as honor, duty, and sacrifice. To achieve these definitions, military language must, above all, erase the body and its destruction and replace it with abstract concepts. For these reasons, in The Body in Pain: The Making and Unmaking of the World, Elaine Scarry suggests that modern warfare has brought about an “utter derealization of verbal meaning” (133) in which “[l]anguage becomes increasingly severed from material substance” (135).

Pat Barker’s World War I trilogy-Regeneration (1991), The Eye in the Door (1993), and the Booker Award-winning The Ghost Road (1995)- takes up the challenge of embodying the dead and wounded in unique ways. The trilogy has been recognized as an important contribution to the literature of war, particularly in its recovery of Dr. W. H. R. Rivers’s work. Barker could hardly have invented a more multifaceted figure for her trilogy than Rivers, who functions as an earlytwentieth-century Renaissance man and symbol of Western civilization. The reallife Rivers had a unique career, making important contributions to three separate fields: medicine, where he performed a famous experiment on nerve regeneration with Dr. Henry Head; anthropology, as a founding father of British social anthropology and inventor of the genealogical method that describes cultures through their kinship systems; and psychiatry, through his sensitive work with traumatized soldiers at Craiglockhart Hospital in Scotland.1 Barker draws on all three aspects of Rivers’s work throughout the trilogy.

The trilogy has contributed to a rebirth of interest in Rivers’s work.2 But its unusual and powerful evocations of the damaged and dead bodies produced by war have been largely ignored. Barker’s earlier novels, such as Union Street (1982) and Blow Your House Down (1984), also reveal a visceral emphasis on the human body. Blow Your House Down, for example, graphically presents the lives of working- class prostitutes, describing sex work through fleshly images that fall outside the typical categories of erotic-pornographic literature, forcing readers to confront them outside of those categories. Similarly, the Regeneration trilogy presents its readers with visions of human flesh, both through the haunted memories of its traumatized soldiers and, in The Ghost Road, Rivers’s memories of his 1907-08 anthropological expedition to Melanesia. In both cases, mutilation and death are re-presented in ways that escape warfare’s typical conceptual categories, thus, in Scarry’s words, “realizing” modern warfare by reconnecting language and material substance.

Representing the Dead

Set between July 1917 and early November 1918, just before Armistice was declared, Barker’s World War I trilogy dramatizes the last year of the war through the experiences of Rivers and his relationships with the shell-shocked soldiers he treats. Its struggle to “realize” warfare by reconnecting language and materiality is first addressed through indirection. Until the last chapter, when the narrative follows one of Rivers’s patients, Billy Prior, to his death by gas in the Battle of the Sambre-Oise Canal, the trilogy never directly dramatizes battle. In place of battle scenes, the trilogy presents fragmented memories of battle through their effects on traumatized soldiers. It repeatedly employs synecdoche to bring the mangled bodies produced by war into imaginative and psychological reality. The soldiers that Rivers treats with his talk therapy struggle to come to terms with repressed memories of the horrors that they have witnessed, horrors that involve direct contact with eviscerated human flesh. In Regeneration, one patient survived a mortar attack to find his mouth filled with the flesh of the man who had been standing next to him. Billy Prior had a similar experience when he found himself holding a human eye in his hand.

This focus on body parts performs two functions. First, it underlines the trilogy’s emphasis on memory and its contrast with typical war memorials. The war memorial marks dead bodies with a monument, erasing fragmented body parts and replacing them with stone structures that deny the fragility of human flesh. This type of monument is perfectly represented by the Tomb of the Unknown Warrior, placed in Westminster Abbey in 1920. A solid slab of black marble, beneath which a single unidentifiable human body is buried, represents the many thousands of soldiers who were reduced to fragments of flesh. The monument’s lengthy inscription reads, in part,

Thus are commemorated the many multitudes who during the Great War of 1914-1918 gave the most that man can give-life itself-for God, for King and Country, for loved ones, home and empire, for the sacred cause of justice and the freedom of the world.

They buried him among the kings because he had done good toward God and toward his house.

This inscription-a rope of abstractions-also serves to cover up the mutilated and dehumanized bodies it stands for. By contrast, the reader witnesses in the trilogy soldiers unable to speak as they struggle to remember and come to terms with the moments in which they held the body parts of their fellow soldiers in their hands.

Second, the trilogy uses those moments to unsettle Western conceptual categories. Ann Ardis interprets Blow Your House Down as repeatedly “challeng[ing] our attempts to classify human experience on the basis of binary oppositions” (52). To explain how the novel achieves this, she employs Hortense Spillers’s theoretical distinction between body and flesh. According to Spillers, “the body” is preconceptualized: it has a gender, a race, a class, a set of predetermined meanings; “the flesh,” however, is the “zero degree of social conceptualization,””a primary narrative” (67). Spillers argues that descriptions of whipped female slaves, for example, give us a “materialized scene of unprotected female flesh-of female flesh ‘ungendered'” (68). In a parallel move, Ardis interprets a scene of violence against a prostitute in Blow Your House Down as turning her into “flesh” and, thereby, taking the violence out of a preconceptualized category, such as “male violence against a woman,” and into “something more primary” (53).

Regeneration’s soldiers experience a similar “zero degree of social conceptualization” as they remember their physical contact with “flesh.” Billy Prior demonstrates the inadequacy of Western language in his responses to his experience.3 He first is sent to Craiglockhart Hospital for mutism, having lost the ability to speak after two of his men were killed in a mortar attack. When he regains the ability to speak, he is still haunted by nightmares and unable to recall the specifics of the attack that traumatized him. Finally, in a long and intensive therapeutic session, Rivers hypnotizes him to recover the memory. Prior had feared that some misjudgment of his own had led to his men’s death. Hypnosis revealed, however, that the traumatic incident occurred when Prior went to clean up the trenches after the attack. Suddenly, he finds himself staring at a human eye on the ground:

Delicately, like someone selecting a particularly choice morsel from a plate, he put his thumb and forefinger down through the duckboards. His fingers touched the smooth surface and slid before they managed to get a hold. He got it out, transferred it to the palm of his hand, and held it out towards Logan [another soldier]. He could see his hand was shaking, but the shaking didn’t seem to be anything to do with him. “What am I supposed to do with this gob- stopper?” (103).

Barker describes Prior’s picking up a slippery human eye without any conceptualization of what it means. Prior’s description of the eye as “this gob-stopper,” slang for a kind of candy, seems to make some sort of vulgar joke at finding the round eye, stressing the lack of language to deal with “flesh.” At the same time\, “gob” indicates a number of other, unsettling meanings: a mass, a mouthful, raw meat, something that chokes you (Oxford English Dictionary). These multiple, irreconcilable meanings focus the reader’s attention on the eyeball and its significance as mutilated flesh or what Spillers calls “a primary story.” At the end of the scene between Prior and Rivers, we learn that the eye belonged to a man named Towers: “He had very blue eyes, you know. Towers. We used to call him the Hun” (106). Prior’s re-membering this traumatic moment is, at the same time, a confrontation with “flesh” and with dismembering, making it impossible to place his experience within any preexisting conceptual category and thus dispose of it.

The Anthropology of War

The trilogy’s final volume, The Ghost Road, develops this visceral approach to flesh by drawing on Rivers’s memories of Melanesia and what he learned there about tribal warfare and head- hunting. As the war nears its end, Rivers is transferred from Craiglockhart to the significantly entitled Empire Hospital in London, where he treats the physically, rather than psychically, wounded. Here, he begins to experience increasingly intense memories of his 1907-08 trip to Melanesia during which he and fellow anthropologist Arthur Hocart stayed for three months with a tribe of former headhunters. There he befriended his cultural counterpart, the witch doctor Njiru, who gradually revealed to him the secret rituals of a dying warrior society, thus juxtaposing Europe with its apparent anthropological opposite. In that juxtapositioning of Europe and Melanesia, The Ghost Road achieves some of its most disturbing effects, cutting through the outer surface of European civilization to suggest an inner core of connection to the rituals of headhunting. Melanesia breaks open modern abstractions that keep death and warfare at a distance with its visceral celebration of both. As Rivers’s memories begin to take on a more and more visual form, he experiences the same haunting that had traumatized his patients. Melanesian culture displays the very things-death and body parts-that the West buries. As The Ghost Road shifts between Rivers’s memories of Melanesia and his present life in the wards of Empire Hospital, he is challenged to come to terms with those memories and their relationship to the West’s experience of war.

At first, Rivers’s flashbacks to Melanesia seem relatively benign. On one occasion, visiting his landlady’s rooms and glimpsing her dead son’s portrait on the mantelpiece that is surrounded by flowers and candlesticks, he is reminded of Melanesian skull houses. This prompts him to think:

Difficult to know what to make of these flashes of cross- cultural recognition. From a strictly professional point of view, they were almost meaningless, but then one didn’t have such experiences as a disembodied anthropological intelligence, but as a man, and as a man one had to make some kind of sense of them. (117)

The part of Rivers that is “a disembodied anthropological intelligence,” a representative of the scientific, superior West, will be stripped away by these increasingly forceful “flashes of cross-cultural recognition.”

As Barker reveals in the Author’s Note at the end of The Ghost Road, Njiru, as well as other Melanesian characters, are based on actual people (277-78). In the 1920s, Arthur Hocart published his and Rivers’s work in several lengthy essays in the Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland. The essays detail their life among the New Solomon islanders and emphasize ritual, warfare, and what Hocart calls “the cult of the dead.” They also reveal how closely The Ghost Road follows actual events in Melanesia, providing close analogues to all the events recounted in the novel. Rivers’s central published work on this Melanesian expedition, however, reveals only his “disembodied anthropological intelligence” and underlines the fact that in The Ghost Road, Rivers functions, in part, as a representative of Western rationalism. On returning to England in 1908, Rivers spent the next five years writing his massive two-volume history of Melanesia, the culmination of his genealogical work, published to acclaim in 1914. The History of Melanesian Society provides painstakingly detailed descriptions of kinship and marriage systems in Melanesian society. It barely mentions, even in passing, such topics as warfare, death rituals, and head-hunting. As Rivers admits in his introduction, much of it consists of “bodies of dry fact” (3), but he defends its usefulness as providing “a rough preliminary account of social conditions which will, I hope, be more thoroughly studied before it is too late” (2).4

The History of Melanesian Society does make for dry reading, and examining it gives a reader no hint of the intense images that appear in The Ghost Road or of the importance of the 1907-08 trip in Rivers’s psychological and emotional life. His trip to Melanesia points toward a transformation in his personality that would fully emerge only during his psychiatric work with soldiers during the war. Away from Europe, Rivers relaxed and became a happier man. He was open to identifying with his Melanesian interlocutors and became more aware of the significance of the unconscious mind in human life. As he describes it in Regeneration, “And do you know that was a moment of the most amazing freedom, [. . .] the Great White God de- throned, [. . .] And suddenly I saw not only that we weren’t the measure of all things, but that there was no measure” (242, emphasis in original).

Rivers’s flashbacks to Melanesia add another dimension to the trilogy’s efforts to realize death, bringing Rivers, like his patients, face to face with body parts and decomposing corpses. He remembers a culture that faces death nakedly, one that materializes both death’s meaning and the meaning of warfare. In one such memory, Rivers recalls his response to seeing the exposed corpse of Ngea, a chief who died during his stay. As a Western doctor, he is conditioned to think of a corpse as something that “neither fascinated nor frightened him. A corpse was something one buried or dissected. Nothing more.” Yet, when he approaches the stone hut in which Ngea’s body is propped up, he is overwhelmed by fear at the sight of the corpse covered with flies, so much so that it strips him of his rational defenses against confronting death as a reality and shakes him to his core: he feels “the sense of being unshelled, peeled in some way, [. . .] He was open to whatever might happen in this place, open in the way that a child is, since no previous experience was relevant” (Ghost Road, hereafter GR 189). Weeks later, he witnesses the ceremonial placement of Ngea’s now sun- bleached skull in the chiefs’ skull house and looks at the number of skulls that are hung up and scattered on the ground. Whereas the West memorializes its piled corpses with monuments, Melanesia marks them with skulls. In Melanesia, body counts were literal, with the heads of those killed being displayed around the huts of victorious warriors. The fact that the tribe itself is threatened with the extinction, not just of its warrior traditions, but of itself, points to the effort to come to terms with massive cultural destruction.

Again, Scarry’s discussion of the significance of the dead body in culture and warfare sheds light on these cultural differences. Scarry examines the dichotomous relationship between on the one hand, the abstract ideals for which a war is said to be fought, for example, “to make the world safe for democracy,” and, on the other hand, the number of wounded and dead bodies that the war produced. Her argument is that the dead or wounded body is used to confer reality on or to “substantiate” the abstract claim (125). Thus warfare is a process by which disembodied ideas are laid side by side with mangled bodies, and the reality of the latter is conferred upon the former. As Scarry explains:

That is, instead of the familiar process of substantiation in which the observer certifies the existence of the thing by experiencing the thing in his own body (seeing it, touching it), the observer instead sees and touches the hurt body of another person (or animal) juxtaposed to the disembodied idea, and having sensorially experienced the reality of the first, believes he or she has experienced the reality of the second. (125)

In a move similar to The Ghost Road’s flashbacks to Rivers’s Melanesian experience, Scarry turns to ancient cultures for examples that clarify the relationship between abstract claim and mutilated body: a prophet splitting open a body and reading its entrails, a sacrificed body buried in the foundation of a city gate to make it impregnable, an oath taker dipping his hand in blood. In all of these practices, a body is used to make real the immaterial claims of prophecy or power: “[T]hus pain is relied on to project power, mortality to project immortality, vulnerability to project impregnability” (126). Each of these examples demonstrates the power of the human body as a signifier, just as Melanesian headhunting societies needed a head to launch a new canoe or to bury a chief properly. But, Scarry goes on to point out, many cultures gradually replaced human sacrifice with animal sacrifice and then with other rituals. War is the one area in which that substitution has never been made.

This anthropological view of warfare is implicit in the growing intensity of Rivers’s flashbacks in The Ghost Road and the ways in which he himself is implicated in the legacy of the West’s destructiveness. At first, almost as if by reflex, Rivers tries to retreat into claims of Western superiority when such parallels occur to him. He recalls a Melanesian custom in which an illegitimate boy was adopted by a leading man who brought him up as his own. When he reached puberty, the boy was given a great ceremony wit\h gifts and the honor of leading the sacrificial pig, and, then, in front of the whole community who knew what was going to happen, the adoptive father crushed his son’s skull with a club. Rivers contrasts this ritual to the image of Abraham and Isaac that was represented on a stained-glass window in his father’s church. Abraham has raised his arm to slay his son; but below the human figures, is the ram caught in the bushes, indicating the ultimate message of the story: God will not demand the sacrifice of the son, an angel will stay Abraham’s hand, and the ram will be substituted. Rivers thinks reassuringly, “The two events represented the difference between savagery and civilization” (GR 104). The two contrasting stories also recall Scarry’s argument about the substitution of animal for human sacrifice in most parts of culture. But the exception, of course, is warfare. In the midst of World War I, therefore, Rivers cannot comfortably retreat behind notions of his own culture’s superiority: Fully aware of his fatherly relationships to the soldiers that he rehabilitates for the front, Rivers’s reaction to the two juxtaposed images quickly becomes complicated by recent events: “Perhaps [. . .] it was because he’d been thinking so much about fathers and sons recently that the memory of the two sacrifices had returned, but he wished this particular memory had chosen another moment to surface” (GR 104).

Although he finds it too dangerous to pursue these thoughts about fathers, sons, and sacrifice, Rivers touches the outer edge of an image that poet Wilfred Owen explores more fully in his bitter sonnet, “The Parable of the Old Man and the Young.” The poem employs the Abraham-Isaac story as a metaphor for the fathers and sons of the World War I era and thus gestures to the same civilized hopefulness represented in the church window. Surely, “civilized” Judeo-Christian Europe has moved beyond primitive human sacrifice and can find some other substitute to lay upon the altar. But Owen’s poem concludes bitterly with Abraham’s refusal to obey the angel’s command: “But the old man would not so, but slew his son, / And half the seed of Europe, one by one.” Owen’s words point to an ultimate irony: Although, in many instances, Western culture has abandoned primitive sacrifice, it has not only been retained in warfare but also brought to new levels of destructiveness and horror.

The most complex parallel established between Europe and Melanesia, however, is the personal one between Rivers and his main native informant, Njiru. Even at their first meeting, Rivers responds strongly to Njiru’s powerfully concentrated personality:

A man in early middle age, white lime streaks in his hair, around the eye sockets, and along the cheek and jaw-bones, so that it seemed-until he caught the glint of eye white-that he was looking at a skull. [. . .]

Njiru was deformed. Without the curvature of the spine he would have been a tall man-by Melanesian standards very tall-and he carried himself with obvious authority. [. . .] The eyes were remarkable: hooded, piercing, intelligent, shrewd. Wary. (GR 126- 27)

In “The Cult of the Dead in Eddystone of the Solomons, Part I” Arthur Hocart describes Njiru in ways that are strikingly similar to the descriptions in the novel:

Njiruviri [. . .] turned out in the end to be not only the best interpreter, but head and shoulders the best informant. It is a pity that, being in possession of much secret lore, he carefully disguised his knowledge and was therefore long wasted as a mere channel of communication, when he could have been used as an original scholar and thinker. The eldest son of the chief who controlled the most important cults in the island, debarred by being a hunch-back from great physical activity, he had devoted himself to thought and learning. His knowledge was not only vast, but most accurate [. . .]. Had he been a European he would have ranked high among the learned. (72-73)

As Hocart’s descriptions of Njiru indicate, the Europeans are empowered by their ability to define, judge, and record with their scientific technologies. They also indicate that the Europeans, too, are headhunters, scientifically speaking.

Even at their first meeting, the parallels between Njiru and Rivers are notable. Like Rivers, Njiru is tall, middle-aged, and authoritative. Like Rivers, Njiru is a healer, and Rivers observes his medical practices as he performs rituals, chants, and massages for his various patients. Like Rivers, Njiru is a scholar with much complex and obscure knowledge. Finally, Njiru is single, an isolated figure, set apart from the rest of his society, both because of his special knowledge and because he is deformed with a hunched back. Rivers lives a celibate life as a Cambridge don, and he, too, is aware of a sense of personal deformity-he suffers from a stammer and is unable to remember things visually. Also, he is troubled by his inability to relate openly to people.

Rivers’s connection to Njiru grows more profound during the war years, a development that is marked by his increasingly intense memories. Treating his patients, using the early tools of psychiatry- suggestion, talk therapy, hypnosis-he thinks, “A witch-doctor could do this [. . .] and probably better than I can” (GR 49). As Njiru heals by magic, exorcising the evil spirits that the Melanesians hold responsible for illness and death, so Rivers, too, tries to exorcise the nightmares and hallucinations that haunt his patients. Western medicine and science, what Rivers represents, might seem the opposite of Melanesian practices, but increasingly Rivers recognizes the ways in which twentieth-century medicine has come full circle, back to psychological connections that have much in common with magic, ritual, and religion. In his 1919 lecture, “Mind and Medicine,” Rivers relates psychiatry to medicine’s cultural roots in magic and religion and concludes, “One of the most striking results of the modern developments of our knowledge concerning the influence of mental factors in disease is that they are bringing back medicine in some measure to that co-operation with religion which existed in the early stages of human progress” (253).

Rivers’s war work also highlights the contradictory nature of the two men’s relationships to their cultures. They are healers but also supporters of war, although Rivers becomes a more ambivalent one. In fact, many of Rivers’s memories of Njiru have to do, not with healing, but with head-hunting and its vanishing rituals. The Ghost Road describes Njiru as the descendent of some of the most famous headhunters in the Solomons-his grandfather, Homu, is remembered for having taken ninety-three heads in a single day. The fact that head- hunting has only recently been suppressed-by force-adds still another layer of complexity to the relationship of Europe and Melanesia.5 As the representative of this recently repressed head- hunting culture and the repository of its rituals reveals to Rivers the occasions on which a new head used to be necessary-to launch a war canoe, to celebrate the death of a chief, to free the chief’s widow from her mourning confinement-Njiru embodies both the roots of warfare and the grief of a culture threatened with extinction. As Rivers moves between his memories of life and death in the New Solomons and his present work in the Empire Hospital, he is implicitly confronted with the question-which is easier to believe: that a human head secures the invulnerability of a war canoe or that 10 million dead and 20 million wounded men will make the world safe for democracy?

By the novel’s conclusion, the relative positions of Europe and Melanesia have been reversed. As an anthropologist, Rivers had once believed in and exercised the power to define Melanesian culture through Western concepts and words. Now, at the war’s end and watching a patient die, Western language fails him and both he and the novel turn to Melanesia for the words to name Western culture’s experience and for the ritual that might provide some response to it. Treating a soldier whose skull is half blown off while the young man’s family looks to him for help, Rivers knows that his medical science can do nothing; he can only wait for death. He remembers a Melanesian word-mate-which has no English equivalent, one of those Melanesian terms that stands outside of Western conceptual categories, such as life and death. Mate means dead but also means being in a state in which “death is the appropriate and therefore the desirable outcome” (GR 264). If he were a Melanesian doctor like Njiru, the proper treatment would be to aid death, but Rivers remains loyal to his Western training, waiting passively for the end, even while aware of the kernel of truth in the Melanesian attitude. Then, to his horror, his patient regains consciousness and begins to speak, shouting what sounds like “Shotvarfet, Shotvarfet,” over and over again. Soon, all the soldiers on the ward take up the cry. When the dying soldier’s father asks, “What’s he saying,” Rivers manages to translate it as “It’s not worth it.” But the father cannot accept this judgment and insists, “Oh, it is worth it, it is” (GR 274; emphasis in original). When the soldier finally dies, Rivers can only speak the words of Western science and logic: “6:25,” he says, recording the time of death (GR 275). Like Billy Prior’s response, “What am I supposed to do with this gob-stopper?” the words of both the soldiers and Rivers are incommensurate with the experience, underlining the failure of Western language in the face of cultural destruction.

After this draining experience, both Rivers’s memories and the trilogy culminate in the image of Njiru. Rivers hallucinates seeing Njiru, walking through the hospital ward chanting the exorcism of the Melanesian spirit, Ave. When he arrived in the New Solomons, one of the first things that Rivers had been told was tha\t Njiru “knew Ave.” Ave is the most feared of the Melanesian spirits, the bringer of epidemic disease and warfare, “the destroyer of peoples” (GR 268). The words that the healer chants to exorcise Ave are also the last, most secret ritual that Njiru reveals to Rivers. The Western language of science and protest having failed, it is Njiru’s chant that names the state of the West at the trilogy’s conclusion. This is a chant that Barker draws almost word for word from Rivers’s Medicine, Magic, and Religion (48): “O Sumbi! O Gesese! O Palapoko! O Gorepoko! O you Ngengere at the root of the sky. Go down, depart ye. [. . .] There is an end of men, an end of chiefs, an end of chieftains’ wives, an end of chiefs’ children-then go down and depart. Do not yearn for us, the fingerless, the crippled, the broken. Go down and depart, oh, oh, oh” (GR 276). In his essay, Rivers explains that the first part of the chant is a list of “the names of certain ghosts, probably those of his predecessors in the knowledge of the rite” (Medicine 48). Thus the chant begins with a rope of names that calls on past generations, even while it goes on to cite the destruction of the living generations-chiefs, chieftains’ wives, chiefs’ children. Hocart also transcribes this chant and suggests that its penultimate line means “there are none but cripples left; do not love them, and stay” (“Cult, Part II” 268). One can contrast this chant-with its list of specific names, its images of broken bodies, its embodied sense of grief-with the abstractions of the inscription on the Tomb of the Unknown Warrior. When he visited Melanesia ten years earlier, Rivers wielded the tools of Western culture to define the natives and their history. Now, Njiru’s secret knowledge and words are the only ones commensurate to the West’s experience; he finally turns the tables on the anthropologists and names the devastation that the West has inflicted on itself.

The ways in which these Melanesian memories of ritual, violence, and death are interwoven with the European experiences of World War I suggest that part of what is driving Rivers’s “flood of nostalgia” in The Ghost Road is an attempt to come to terms with massive cultural destruction. It is also Rivers’s quest to understand these experiences as a man. In labs and on dissecting tables, he is familiar with skulls and corpses in the Western scientific sense, as a “disembodied intelligence.” In Melanesia, he experiences the embodiment and the reality of death in ways that parallel the visceral shocks his patients have undergone. Barker’s use of Rivers’s anthropological work also shatters Europe’s position of superiority by juxtaposing it to images of Melanesian warfare and ritual and emphasizing that Europe’s disembodied responses make even more destruction possible. So, in modern civilization, Abraham will sacrifice, not just one son but “all the seed of Europe, one by one.” Barker’s trilogy as a whole works through these contradictions, remembering war by dismembering it. It strips away disembodied abstractions to reveal an eyeball, a head, pieces of flesh, reconnecting language and material substance.

THE PENNSYLVANIA STATE UNIVERSITY AT HARRISBURG MIDDLETOWN, PENNSYLVANIA

NOTES

1. Although today, largely because of Barker’s trilogy, Rivers is remembered as a psychologist and for his impact on war poet Siegfried Sassoon, during his lifetime, he was best known as an anthropologist. Between 1906 and 1930, Rivers’s work dominated the emerging field. He participated in four early European anthropological expeditions-the famous expedition to the Torres Straits in 1898, a 1901-02 stay with the polyandrous Todas tribe in southwestern India, and two trips to Melanesia in 1907-08 and 1914. Rivers’s study The Todas was considered a classic when it was published in 1906 and established his genealogical survey work as the dominant method in anthropology until Bronislaw Malinowski championed the concept of intensive fieldwork (Langham 50). In fact, Malinowski, who, as a fledging anthropologist, accompanied Rivers on his last trip to Melanesia in 1914, saw himself as competing with Rivers, writing in a letter to a fellow anthropologist, “Rivers is the Rider Haggard of Anthropology: I shall be the Conrad!” (quoted in Clifford 96). Rivers’s year-long stay in Melanesia in 1907-08, however, took him into Conrad territory, especially in Pat Barker’s version of it. See Slobodin for a detailed examination of Rivers’s anthropological work, as well as his other “careers.”

2. A number of articles on Regeneration, the first novel in Barker’s trilogy, have been published. In particular, see Whitehead and Harris, both of whom analyze the role of Rivers in the novel, especially in relation to his medical and psychiatric work. Also, see Monteith, Wyatt-Brown, and Brannigan for overviews of the Regeneration trilogy as a whole, including comments on how the treatment of Rivers’s anthropological work in The Ghost Road develops the trilogy’s overall themes.

3. See articles by Mukherjee and Newman for analyses of the breakdown of language in other novels by Barker. Barker’s concern with language and questioning of abstractions connects her with the practice of the Great War poets, as demonstrated by Paul Fussell in The Great War and Modern Memory, as well as modernists who wrote in its aftermath.

4. In his History of Melanesian Society, Rivers announced plans to co-author a second book on Melanesia with Arthur Hocart that would focus on their fieldwork on Eddystone Island and the topics that were excluded from the History-warfare, headhunting, death rituals, magic, witchcraft, and medicine. This work never materialized because of the war and Rivers’s sudden death from a heart attack in 1922. Both during and after the war, however, Rivers delivered lectures and published essays that record some of the experiences that appear in The Ghost Road.

5. During the nineteenth century, the European powers gradually annexed the Melanesian islands: the Dutch claimed the Western half of New Guinea in 1828; the French, New Caledonia in 1853; and the British, Fiji in 1874. The Solomon Islands were the last part of Melanesia to be declared a European colony when the British established a protectorate over them between 1893 and 1900 (Sillitoe 26-27). European annexation was motivated by a variety of desires, including pacifying the islands in response to attacks on Europeans and laying the basis for stable plantation economies. The Melanesians’ reputation for violence and “black” customs, such as head-hunting and cannibalism, added urgency to these developments. Beginning in the 1870s, British gunboats regularly visited the Solomons to punish attacks on Europeans by shelling villages. This kind of “pacification” proved to be a long and difficult process, however. As one official noted in 1911, “[O]ne of the cardinal principles upon which the administration of a new country should be based is that the ‘Pax Britannica’ must be enforced. It is useless to endeavor to educate a savage people in order to lift them to a higher plane of civilization unless it is demonstrated that the Government can and will make the King’s peace respected” (quoted in Boutilier 44).

WORKS CITED

Ardis, Ann. “Political Attentiveness vs. Political Correctness: Teaching Pat Barker’s Blow Your House Down.” College Literature 18.3 (1991): 44-54.

Barker, Pat. Blow Your House Down. New York: Ballantine, 1984.

_____. The Eye in the Door. New York: Penguin: 1993.

_____. The Ghost Road. New York: Penguin. 1995.

_____. Regeneration. New York: Penguin, 1991.

_____. Union Street. London: Virago, 1982.

Boutilier, James. “Killing the Government: Imperial Policy and the Pacification of Malaita.” The Pacification of Melanesia. Ed. Margaret Rodman and Matthew Cooper. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan Press, 1979. 43-87.

Brannigan, John. “Pat Barker’s Regeneration Trilogy.” Contemporary British Fiction. Ed. Richard J. Lane, Rod Mengham, and Philip Tew. Cambridge: Polity, 2003. 13-26.

Clifford, James. The Predicament of Culture: Twentieth-Century Ethnography Literature, and Art. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1988.

Fussell, Paul. The Great War and Modern Memory. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1975.

Harris, Greg. “Compulsory Masculinity, Britain, and the Great War: The Literary-Historical Work of Pat Barker.” Critique 39.4 (Summer 1998): 290-304.

Hocart, A. M. “The Cult of the Dead in Eddystone of the Solomons, Part I.” Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland 52 (Jan.-Jun. 1922): 71-112.

_____. “The Cult of the Dead in Eddystone of the Solomons, Part II.” Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland 52 (Jul.-Dec. 1922): 259-305.

Langham, Ian. The Building of British Social Anthropology: W. H. R. Rivers and His Cambridge Disciples in the Development of Kinship Studies, 1898-1931. London: Reidel, 1981.

Monteith, Sharon. Pat Barker. Tavistock, UK: Northcote, 2002.

Mukherjee, Ankhi. “Stammering to Story: Neurosis and Narration in Pat Barker’s Regeneration” Critique 43.1 (Fall 2001): 49-63.

Newman, Jenny. “Souls and Arseholes: The Double Vision of The Century’s Daughter.” Critical Survey 13.1 (2001): 18-36.

Norris, Margot. Writing War in the Twentieth Century. Charlottesville: UP of Virginia, 2000.

Owen, Wilfred. The Poems of Wilfred Owen. Ed. Jon Stallworthy. New York: Norton, 1986.

Rivers, W. H. R. The History of Melanesian Society. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1914.

_____. Medicine, Magic, and Religion: The Fitzpatrick Lectures Delivered before the Royal College of Physicians of London in 1915 and 1916. London: Routledge, 1924.

_____. “Mind and Medicine.” Bulletin of the John Rylands Library 5 (Aug. 1918-July 1920): 235-53.

Scarry, Elaine. The Body in Pain: The Making and unmaking of the World. New York: Oxford UP, 1985.

Sillitoe, Paul. An Introduction to the Anthropology of Melanesia: Culture and Tradition. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1998\.

Slobodin, Richard. W. H. R. Rivers. New York: Columbia UP, 1978.

Spillers, Hortense J. “Mama’s Baby, Papa’s Maybe: An American Grammar Book.” Diacritics 17.2 (1987): 65-81.

Whitehead, Anne. “Open to Suggestion: Hypnosis and History in Pat Barker’s Regeneration.” MFS: Modern Fiction Studies 44 (Fall 1998): 674-94.

Wyatt-Brown, Anne M. “Headhunters and Victims of the War: W. H. R. Rivers and Pat Barker.” Proceedings from the Thirteenth International Conference on Literature and Psychoanalysis. Ed. Frederico Pereira. Lisbon: Instituto Superior de Psicologia Aplicada, 1997. 53-59.

Copyright HELDREF PUBLICATIONS Summer 2005

Sign and Symbol in Barbara Gowdy’s The White Bone

Most reviewers of Barbara Gowdy’s The White Bone embrace the novel’s apparatus, accepting implicitly the author’s claim that she was writing something other than a prolonged beast fable. Catherine Bush, reviewing for The Globe and Mail, offers a representative perspective on this tale told from the point of view of elephants: “The White Bone is a quest story, and a novel that takes its readers into an alternate world seen through the eyes of an alien intelligence . . . Gowdy has created her own elephant lore, hymns, cosmology” (1). Similarly favourable reviews by Bill Richardson in Quill and Quire and Margaret Walters in the Times Literary Supplemented identify a quest pattern, and echo Bush’s defense of Gowdy’s representation of elephants: “We recognize in [the elephants] traits and peccadilloes that are our own, but they are mercifully innocent of anything that smacks of cutesy, Disney-like anthropomorphizing” (Richardson 35). Walters even goes so far as to suggest that the weaknesses of The White Bone lie in its occasional attempts at fable, such as when “the matriarchs’ squabbles occasionally dwindle into obvious satire on humans behaving badly”(22). Such non-allegorical readings stress Gowdy’s zoological scrutiny, contending that the detailing of elephant habits of eating, excreting, travelling, and mating protects the characters from signifying as human. And, as a glance at the novel’s acknowledgments shows, Gowdy has indeed done her research, supplementing her extensive reading with a trip to “the Masai Mara so that [she] might see the African elephant in its natural home”(330). Reviewers of The White Bone who foreground its description of physical behaviour comprehend the animal characters as animals: even if “the elephants do offer us a mirror of ourselves, [it is] not a straightforward reflection but the chance to imagine ourselves as elephants rather than elephants as us”(Bush 1).

Another camp of reviewers is unwilling to disregard the novel’s allegorical properties: while Judy Edmond of The Winnipeg Free Press notes that “Gowdy has said she did not intend this book to be a parody or social satire along the lines of Animal Farm or Watership Down” she argues that “Gowdy’s prose [is] so weighty with metaphor that one wonders whether The White Bone is meant to be understood on another level”(3). Sara Boxer of The New York Times is more explicit:

The White Bone is a big religious put-on, an elephantine Pilgrim’s Progress. The white elephant bone at the center of the book is a relic that everyone believes will point to the “Safe Place.” The elephants, fearful that uttering the name of the bone will weaken it, call it “the that-way bone”(sounds like “the Jahweh bone”). The elephants’ trek is a test of their faith in the face of drought and bounty hunters. When Date Bed, a Christ figure, picks up a rearview mirror, it is a lesson in vanity. And those monstrous female names are not so different from Prudence, Piety, Chastity and Discretion. (7)

The issue for Boxer is not that Gowdy’s characters are animals; Boxer is most absorbed by those sections of The White Bone that describe the finer points of the elephants’ material/corporeal existence. She is annoyed by Gowdy’s apparent references to “another level” of interpretation. That Gowdy’s elephants act like elephants is, for Boxer, not enough to counteract their role in an allegorical story.

The uncertainty regarding The White Bone’s standing as allegory (or otherwise) is only partially a matter of Gowdy’s declarations on the subject. According to medieval narrative tradition, the four levels of interpretation associated with allegory are: the literal level of interpretation, which operates as a textual “veil”; the moral or tropological level, a didactic level that may be read for lessons about individual behaviour; the allegorical level, whose lessons are lessons of belief rather than behaviour and that apply more generally; and, finally, the anagogical level, which points to the universal sign of God. Despite its engagement with metaphysics, the novel’s literal level of interpretation does not appear to function as a textual veil for either a moral or an allegorical level of interpretation. Gowdy is certainly not providing the didactic lessons for individual behaviour that are in keeping with the moral allegory, and even the ecological grounding of The White Bone, which is surely engaged with ethics, cannot be read as a coherent doctrine. In other words, while the depiction of the slaughter of animals is ethically and environmentally charged, Gowdy’s literal story does not mandate for a particular code of human conduct or order of beliefs. Her zoological emphasis praised by reviewers precludes such mandating, since the behaviour of the elephants cannot serve as a code for the behaviour of humans.

Still, The White Bone’s concern with names and naming, the reading of signs, and the processes of mourning are all associated with the concerns of the allegorical text, in particular the contemporary or postmodern allegorical text. The elephants’ naming procedure, which entails the marking of and “surrender to” (21) personality traits, together with the species’ reliance on an elaborate system of “links,” recalls Deborah Madsen’s assertion that “Interpretation is represented as the subject of allegorical narratives”(135). Further, the portrayal of Tall Time’s increasing disbelief in the veracity of the “links,” his alarm at “the sickening prospect that everything exists for the purpose of pointing to something else”(135), is associated with the so-called “revival”(Smith 105) of allegory initiated by critics of modernism and postmodernism. Paul Smith argues that critical insistence on “the nature of allegory to stress discontinuity and to remark the irremediable distance between representation and idea”(106) has led to the recovery of “allegory as a privileged form of discourse in postmodern artistic practice and theory”(106). Finally, The White Bones ironic genealogy, which describes a family’s diminishment instead of growth, seems related to Walter Benjamin’s conception of the allegory as ruin, as “in this guise history does not assume the form of the process of eternal life so much as that of irresistible decay”(178).

Even without engaging the moral or allegorical levels of interpretation, The White Bone does appear to point to the presence of an anagogue. The thematizing of the spiritual and the metaphysical, which occurs as a supplement to the zoological scrutiny, indicates a level of fixed meaning onto which literal referents may be translated. Thus, the legend of “the Descent,” which tells of “a starving bull and cow [that] killed and ate a gazelle and in doing so broke the first and most sacred law ‘You shall eat no creature, living or dead'”(7), signals that Gowdy is working explicitly within (and against) a Judeo-Christian framework.1 In her conception of the elephant visionary, defined in the novel’s glossary as “A cow or cow calf who is capable of seeing both the future and the distant present”(xvi), Gowdy presupposes an interpretive activity both transparent and fixed. Mud’s role as her family’s visionary forces her to come to terms with Torrent’s conviction that “nothing want[s] substance until it is envisioned- ‘Once envisioned,’ he said, ‘it is obliged to transpire'” (82). And, as Boxer registers, Gowdy’s elephant mythology includes figures that represent the universal sign. Boxer notes “Date Bed, a Christ figure,” although for a discussion of the anagogic level of interpretation, it is more fruitful to consider how the figure of “the She” operates as a sign for God’s persona. The tension between the narrative function of “the She” and that of Date Bed marks The White Bone as an imperfect or possibly postmodern allegory, in that the force of the symbol undermines the anagogic sign.

In Blindness and Insight, Paul de Man rehearses the historical distinction between symbol and allegory: “[the romantic] valorization of symbol at the expense of allegory . . . appeal[s] to the infinity of a totality [that] constitutes the main attraction of the symbol as opposed to allegory, a sign that refers to one specific meaning and thus exhausts its suggestive potentials once it has been deciphered” (188). For Gowdy, a distrust of the reciprocal relationship between sign and meaning associated with traditional allegory initiates a postmodern adjustment. Madsen explains that true allegory should be thought of “as the quest for a transcendental center or origin of meaning-an absolute-in terms of which narrative truth will become legible” (135). The first clue that the sign of “the She” is not such “an absolute” is that its apparent function as such is never veiled: as the narrator asserts, “Ask the big cows to account for any mystery and they will answer, ‘Thus spake the She'”(23). Much of the novel is concerned with contesting blind faith in the ways of “the She” and, by extension, the Judeo-Christian framework. In postmodern fashion, the thematic exploration of how absolute reliance on a rigid faith system is a potential danger to the elephant psyche is also a lesson for the reader about how to interpret the text. Just as the elephants, in particular Mud, must learn to develop a faith that operates outside a religious system, so too must thereader accept the somewhat paradoxical narrative mandate that, although some of the elephant mythology resembles or inverts human myths, to read the novel only in terms of a one-to-one relationship between animals and humans is to succumb to the lure of uncomplicated, though overly static, reading system. Gowdy rejects reading practices associated with traditional allegory and with fixed systems by valorizing a Christ figure not as part of an allegorical pre-text but as part of a symbolic order in which other uncontrolled levels of meaning are suggested.

Date Bed’s symbolic, as opposed to signifying, status comes into focus when her role is compared to that of the white bone itself. As Hail Stones recounts, the legend of the white bone emerged after a period known as “the darkness,” during which, in the face of drought and slaughter, all seemed lost for the elephant species. The white bone, a newborn elephant’s rib bleached by the sun, “radiated toward all living creatures a quality of forgiveness and hope,”(43) and could reveal a Safe Place to any elephant who found it and “believe[d] in its power”(44). The white bone belongs to the same diegetical system of myth as “the She,” and is vulnerable to the same skeptical understanding. The hackneyed construction of the elephant mythology, with its various inversions and parodies, might suggest The White Bone is an allegory for the failure of religion altogether. However, the symbolic value of Date Bed as a Christ figure has a dual function. Gowdy’s development of a symbol undermines the authority of a fixed anagogue in the true allegory while the symbol of the sacred defuses the reader’s sense of an unqualified attack on faith.

Gowdy’s characterization of Tall Time reflects the ruptured allegory, especially as postmodernists have taken up this imperfect form. Smith differentiates between the allegory with which Madsen is concerned and the contemporary allegory in which “a shared referential, metasemantic system such as was available to mediaeval allegorists and their audience is not commonly held by readers . . . so [that] one has to be constructed or invented in the act of reading itself “(107). Craig Owens also focuses on this aspect of the contemporary allegory, arguing that “the allegorical impulse that characterizes postmodernism is a direct consequence of its preoccupation with reading” (223). Thematizating reading an indeterminate system, or, as de Man would assert, thematizing the failure of such readings (Allegories 205), designates the postmodern allegory. Tall Time marks these interests in The White Bone, as he is often portrayed in the process of obsessive allegorizing. The narrator explains, “It was a comfort for [Tall Time] to discover that his birth mother had died as a result of a specific circumstance-that, with vigilance, such deaths could be avoided. He became a student of signs, omens and superstitions, or “links,” as all three are often referred to”(49). Tall Time’s comfort level is greatly disturbed not only by the idea that the links might be infinite (135), but even more so by his increasing sense that the links are meaningless (157). Tall Time eventually cures himself of his allegoresis2, his tendency towards excessive interpretation, and decides to follow the directions of Torrent rather than those suggested by the links: “Not once, in thirty years of being guided by the speechless messages of his surroundings did he ever feel this certain. There is a membrane of moonlight on the ground, bats flare up, terrible omens he strides through as if in defiance of a natural law”(299). Although Tall Time’s catharsis is a postmodern deterrent to reading the novel as simply a series of links defining the human world via an allegorical system, Gowdy does not allow the dilemma of interpretation to be easily resolved. In the paragraph following the portrait of Tall Time’s newly unencumbered sense of his place in his world, Gowdy describes his ironic death by gunshot, suggesting that the real dread of abandoning an interpretive system founded on omnipotent permanence is that, without one, tragedy may appear meaningless.

Though The White Bone is not using Christianity as an unproblematic anagogic pre-text, Gowdy is absorbed by Christian symbols of sacredness and salvation, and by such myths as that of the Fall, the Incarnation, the Resurrection, and the Apocalypse. In distinguishing between signs of Christianity and the symbol of Christ, Gowdy’s work recalls feminist theologians reformulating the symbol of Christ. In To Change the World, Rosemary Ruether notes that, although “Christology has been the doctrine of the Christian tradition that has been most frequently used against women”(45), it is precisely by considering “alternative models of christology”(47) that feminists can reconcile themselves with the Christian church. As Maryanne Stevens points out in her preface to Reconstructing the Christ Symbol, the essays contained in the volume all discuss such “alternative models,” figuring Christ as a symbol for “universality and inclusivity,”(3) for “radical stubbornness,” (3) in his status as a “stranger; outcast, hungry, weak, and poor,”(4) and as a “trickster who dismantles our categories and peels us open to new depths of humanity”(5).3 Likewise, Gowdy’s corpus detects the sacred in non-traditional realms, such as those of worldly/bodily experience as opposed to those of myth, and on the margins of “normal” ; behaviour. Her fashioning of the sacred symbol is part of a trend in Canadian literature and culture surveyed by William Closson James in Locations of the Sacred. In his preface, James states that, “even as fiction relocates the sacred from its older abode beyond the earth to some place or other within ordinary experience, so the broader cultural scene provides evidence that the sacred may be found at the boundaries and margins rather than at the centre, at points of crisis and limit rather than in the continuities of the conventional” (ix). James goes on to argue that “The religious meaning of fiction cannot be determined or measured by the degree to which its subject is overtly religious, nor by the extent to which it espouses a view of life congenial to some religious outlook or other”(33). By James’ definition of “religiousness,” which he asserts is “derive[d] from [a novel’s] concern with ultimate questions of meaning, truth and value”(33), Gowdy’s work may be considered religious and, I would argue, Christological4 as opposed to Christian in that she explores how faith might proceed outside the limits of particular religious practice.

To determine the features of Gowdy’s Christology, the way the sign of the white bone differs from the symbolic value attached to Date Bed must be considered. As noted, the first mention of the white bone is made by Hail Stones, who recounts what he knows of it to the She-S family “using the formal diction”(42). Hail Stones frames this almost ceremonial narrative by citing Rancid as his own family’s source for the story (41), and concludes by conceding that “1We [the She-Ds] never did learn how Rancid came by the legend . . . He died before we could ask. But we did not doubt him'” (44). The She-Ss also decide to believe to this version of “the legend” and to take up the quest for the white bone. However, Rancid’s counsel that the white bone will “always [surface] within a circle of boulders or termite mounds to the west of whatever hills are in the region” (44) is not the only account circulating around The Domain. Tall Time, who has been told by Torrent to “go to the most barren places and the hills and to look for an extremely large standing feast tree”(142), is “taken aback” by She-Boom’s profession that “THE SHE- L’S’AND’L’S SAID IT WILL BE FOUND NEAR A WINDING RIVERBED NORTHEAST OF A RANGE OF HILLS”(142). The conflicting accounts of the white bone’s whereabouts reflect Gowdy’s interrogation of blind faith’s reliance on an ever-receding truth-source. Torrent explains to Tall Time that “‘Faith is not trust in the known'” (157), and even Torrent’s version of the white bone story is marked as third-hand (142).5

Early on in The White Bone, Gowdy discusses the importance of cultural transmission amongst the elephant community:

the Long Rains Massive Gathering . . . is the great annual celebration to which upwards of forty families journey to feast together and hear the news and sing the endless songs (those exceeding five hundred verses) . . . So much is bound to happen, in fact, that cows arriving at a gathering customarily greet each other by declaring their chief intention (next to eating, of course): “I come to seduce.””I come to gossip.””I come to enlighten”(8).

The transmission of culture through song most powerfully connects the elephant families to one another when they are dispersed throughout The Domain; the songs take up such activity as birthing, “delirium” or oestrus, thanksgiving, and, especially, mourning. In keeping with the superstitious nature of many of the elephants, some songs have developed as “link” songs, which function as mnemonic warnings. After the slaughter at Blood Swamp, Mud finds comfort in one of Tall Time’s link songs: “Except in the cases of berries and specks / Blue blesses calves and the peak-headed sex / Eat a blue stone and for two days and nights/ Those who would harm you are thwarted by rights”(94). The link songs differ from songs of birthing or mourning, and are like the various accounts of the white bone, in that their circulation defers spiritual energy on to material objects. The dubiousness of this deferral is brought into focus in the chapter that describes Date Bed’s death, and in which both her attempts to make use of a mnemonic guide to find the She-S- and-S family, and to mobilize the power of the white bone fail. In panic, the elephants mistakenly depend on the value of external, arbitrary, and metonymic signs, for as \Tall Time must admit, “the white bone is itself a link”(156). In her characterization of Date Bed, however, Gowdy suggests an alternative, more metaphoric, manner of conceiving the sacred.

Although the white bone makes even Date Bed susceptible to the hazards of superstition6, she is initially distinguishable by her interest in logic. Mud thinks that, when the time comes, Date Bed should be given the cow name “She-Studies”(24). The narrator describes Date Bed’s unusual curiosity about cow remedies:

Before she learned not to, [Date Bed] would ask the cows why one treatment was chosen over another, why the ingredients deviated from the standard mixture, and the answer was always a variation of “That’s what works,” which even as a small calf Date Bed heard as a variation of “Thus spake the She.” To her frustration nobody, not even the eminent She-Purges, was interested in the logic behind the remedy. (107)

Date Bed’s “supreme” interest in logic (107) is identified as troubling for the nurse cows, who feel that to inquire into finer points of a remedy is “to tamper with their power and offend the She”(io8). For Date Bed, however, healing is more a matter of resourcefulness and reason than blind faith: she reasons that she can use a fire to cauterize her bullet wound in the absence of the standard warthog urine or hyena dung (108). Date Bed is also the only elephant character in the novel depicted as having an explicit “idea,” that of attracting eagle scouts with the Thing (179), as opposed to functioning only according to habit, duty or distress. Date Bed’s logic, however, does not keep her from expressing her faith in spiritual energy; directly after healing herself she “murmurs a song of thanksgiving” directed towards the loving- kindness of the She (109-10). Gowdy privileges a belief system whose energy is primarily situated in the individual mind; Date Bed’s acknowledgment of the She is an acknowledgment of her own ingenuity.

The scene’s literal representation of malady and healing emphasizes an important aspect of the sacred symbol, which will manifest itself as a process of psychic healing in the surviving members of the She-S family. The depiction of Date Bed’s logic and her will to heal is associated with another aspect of her character crucial to Gowdy’s Christology: Date Bed’s facility with unusual forms of communication. Date Bed is a remarkably adept mind talker, able not only to hear the thoughts of other creatures but to converse with them; she is even able to gain information from a cluster of flies, despite the norm that “Mind talkers and insects don’t communicate, so there is no point in asking [them for help]”(no). Date Bed’s skills are set in relief against the strained discourse that takes place among the rest of her family, whose infighting and petty silences add bitterness to their grief, and against the difficulty Tall Time has communicating with the brusque We-Fs. During their trek toward the Second Safe Place (as it is called by the We-Fs), Tall Time realizes that “it is no use asking Sink Hole where they are going, or even when they will be stopping for the day, such questions invariably being met with an odour of disapproval so powerful it burns the inside of [his] trunk”(289). The two bulls’ failure to make contact, culminating in Sink Hole’s taking literally Tall Time’s petulant order that Sink Hole leave him alone (291), results in their permanent separation and, metaphorically, in Tall Time’s death. The capacity for communication is thus granted sacred value as it provides a possible avenue for literal and figurative salvation.

When Mud becomes the family’s mind talker, a transformation that conclusively signals Date Bed’s death, her initial response is to disregard the sacred value of communication that typified Date Bed’s handling of the gift. Mud is not interested in conversing with other species: “What [the giraffes, impalas and oryxes] call themselves [she] doesn’t know, she never bothered to ask Date Bed, and not knowing, she can’t conceive of addressing them. Besides, why should she?”(309) Mud similarly dismisses her own family’s grief, having become freshly obsessed with the search for the white bone and oddly resentful of the time wasted on the search for Date Bed (307). Mud shows her terrible single-mindedness when she promises her newborn to Me-Me, and only after She-Snorts has saved Bolt by killing Me-Me is Mud shaken from this dangerous fixation. Mud’s newborn metaphorically resurrects Date Bed, having been born exactly where Date Bed died, and at a moment marked by a bolt of lighting (322). Mud’s catharsis allows her finally to grieve Date Bed, “this beloved name a requiem for every loss of her life, from her birth mother to her birth name to Date Bed to the brief, dreamlike loss of herself “(324). The catharsis also reveals to Mud the difference between the Safe Place, which is merely an allegorical sign, and symbolic salvation, which for Mud is love. Once Mud has become “herself” again she is finally able to cultivate her new gift; Mud’s first success at mind talking with another species is the dialogue she has with Date Bed’s beloved mongooses, who point out the direction indicated by Date Bed’s throwing of the “that way” bone (326). Mud, however, is no longer consumed with the idea of the Safe Place; rather she “is weak with love”(327) for her daughter.

In contrast to the allegorical sign of the white bone, the sacred symbol does not guide; at most Date Bed offers others a catalyst for self-recognition. The issue of identity is raised in Chapter One, during Mud’s renaming ceremony. As is to be expected, Date Bed ruminates most extensively on how the process of naming is bound up with the issue of identity. With reference to the renaming ceremony, Date Bed states:

“it seems to me that unless they regard you as a future nurse cow, they choose a name that will antagonize you . . . They hope that by provoking you, you’ll eventually prove them wrong. A misguided strategy, in my opinion. More often than not, cows surrender to their names.”(21)

Certainly, the cow names that give reviewer Sara Boxer so much trouble are useful shorthands for the superficial behaviour of such characters as She-Screams or I-Flirt. However, far from confirming a traditional allegory, such overly suggestive names reveal Gowdy’s rejection of allegory’s mandates; the portrayal of She-Screams as domineering, intrusive and very, very loud makes plain the problem of acting according to a static sense of identity, of being controlled by a sign of one’s self. Date Bed’s later reflections about names suggest that this sort of “surrender” serves only to mask one’s true and sacred identity.

As Date Bed approaches her death, her thoughts about identity become more insistent and profound. After realizing that her memory is growing dimmer, she fastidiously works at retrieving the details from out of her shadow memories, believing that each retrieval represents an extension of her life (270). Date Bed’s earlier notion that identity is related to the external sign of a name, whereby in the end “you are the measure of what your cow name has come to signify”(271), is replaced by her “hunch that you are the sum of those incidents only you can testify to, whose existence, without you, would have no earthly acknowledgment”(271). This realization is another crucial feature of Gowdy’s Christology; perhaps more than a healer, the sacred figure is witness to the crises of annihilation that threaten herself and/or those who love her.

In their introduction to Testimony, Shoshana Felman and Dori Laub specify one the central features of “eye-witness” accounts:

Since the testimony cannot be simply relayed, repeated or reported by another without thereby losing its function as testimony, the burden of the witness-in spite of his or her alignment with other witnesses-is a radically unique, noninterchangeable and solitary burden . . . To bear witness is to bear the solitude of a responsibility, and to bear the responsibility, precisely, of that solitude. (3)

The assertion that, in the face of trauma, the subject is forced back in on his or herself, is similar to the idea suggested by Date Bed’s “hunch.” The witness is necessarily singular, and his or her identity is specified by that which only he or she has seen. While Date Bed’s role in The White Bone is that of the sacred witness, ah1 the surviving characters in the novel are forced to take up the “burden of the witness,” a burden that not only transforms each individual, but also produces an epistemological chasm between them. In response to She-Soothe’s claim that she “knows” Date Bed, She- Snorts states, “‘You don’t. You can’t, not any longer. None of us are who we were'”(306).

She-Snorts’ words reflect the paradox of Gowdy’s concern with individual identity. Gowdy’s plot tracks the regenerating processes of self-recognition. Her work is preoccupied with the celebration of peculiarity, especially the particularity of experience that produces the subject, and unique expressions of love. But her work also investigates such negative aspects of individualism as vanity and the inability to communicate. In The White Bone, many of the negative features of individualism are aggravated by those traumatic incidents that isolate the witness. Date Bed’s role is to solve this paradox; as a Christ figure, she assumes the solitary burden of the witness and provides a catalyst for renewal by acknowledging the uniqueness of love. The circumstances of her dying days, however, make it difficult for Date Bed to “transgress” her isolation. Although she bequeaths her ability to mind talk to Mud, as well as many of her species’ songs to the mongooses, Date Bed’s role as a sacred witness to “outrage”(Felman 4) is jeopardized because her dying entails draining her perfect memory and thus a potential rupture of identity.

The preface to The White Bone is tak\en up with the issue of elephant memory and its complex relationship to identity. The narrator points out that “Some [elephants] go so far as to claim that under that thunderhead of flesh and those huge rolling bones they are memory”(1) and, later in the narrative, the matriarch of the She-Ds further explicates this claim. SheDemand’s position, however, that elephants are memory in so far as they are the “living” memories of the She (83), is displayed as another problematic manifestation of blind faith. After the slaughter at Blood Swamp, Date Bed considers the fate of her species, wondering whether its ordeals might be either a test or a punishment from the She: “And then, recalling She-Demands’ final sermon, she thinks, ‘We are being remembered,’ and this strikes her as a more terrible prospect than the other two because it is unassailable”(104). Date Bed’s associations of memory and the force of doom is further complicated by the narrator’s assertion that the species is actually “doomed without [memory]. When their memories begin to drain, their bodies go into decline, as if from a slow leakage of blood”(1). This two-sided nature of elephant memory is another complicating feature of Gowdy’s representation of the sacred witness. The species is doomed without memory. Like other persecuted groups, who “must survive in order to bear witness, and . . . must bear witness in order to affirm . . . survival”(Felman 117), the elephants depend on preserving and regenerating individual and collective memory. For this reason, the species is committed to activities such as mourning their dead, singing the Endless songs, reiterating their lore, and the scrupulous “noticing” of the world around them (1-2).

However, the phenomenon of being remembered, or witnessed, is a “terrible prospect”(104), both because it exposes the persona of the She as entirely and terribly separate, and because it seems to presuppose doom. Throughout the novel, being witnessed is often equated with death. As a visionary, Mud is saddled with various images of slaughter and death, including her vision of the massacre of the She-D family, which precedes the She-S’s encounter with the survivors. Equally disturbingly, Mud witnesses the dead body of She- Screams several days before She-Screams falls over the rock ledge; Mud is struck by the “cruelly pathetic” fact that she must now comprehend all of She-Screams’ ludicrous behaviour in light of a memory of her death (183). This aspect of memory, for many elephants, makes the act of bearing witness taboo: as She-Snorts scolds Mud, “Α death vision is the burden of the visionary alone'”(239). Various questions then arise: how is spiritual regeneration possible without the sharing of memory? How is the apocalyptic moment salvaged from the crisis of annihilation? How much of Date Bed’s sacredness, her identity, has survived in Mud without the act of bearing witness?

Gowdy’s response to these questions entails a return to ruptured allegory, in which all interpretive signs are revealed as necessarily indeterminate. As Date Bed’s health worsens, her memories begin to be replaced by what she calls “hallucinations,” visions of things she has never witnessed. Date Bed’s hallucinations include her sense of “walking in an immense cavern where it is somehow as bright as midday, and on each side of her, in phenomenally straight rows, stacks of strange fruits . . . glide by”(160); of a “wall, twice as high as she is and three times her width” on which “life unfolds . . . in jerks and flashes as if it were the shifting scene of someone else’s memory”(179); and of “A conical green tree bristling with short thorns and laden in what appear to be sparkling fruits or flowers”(279). Date Bed’s witnessing of the supermarket, the movie screen, and the Christmas tree reflect Gowdy’s brief foray into the explicitly tropological or moral level of interpretation, as human reality is directly juxtaposed with elephant reality. Date Bed considers that, just as such visions may be the “lost memories of a creature from a place unknown,” her own draining memory might “have entered the body of some strange, doomed creature who, like her, is enthralled by the scenes unfolding in its mind”(274). In other words, humanity is facing the same crisis of annihilation as the elephant species and the only way to transform such a crisis is to compare and embrace different realities. Clearly, however, such transformation depends upon a fairly precarious set of circumstances, as even the elephants themselves have difficulties understanding one another. According to Gowdy’s construction of the pitfalls of self-recognition and the generally destructive relationships between species, the salvaging of the apocalyptic moment seems rather unlikely.

Still, beyond Gowdy’s pessimistic view of social behaviour is the sacred symbol that represents love. That the sacred is a compound of suggestions rather than a controlled sign signals Gowdy’s postmodern approach to allegory. Further, the indeterminacy and variousness with which Gowdy imagines love dulls the intensity of her social pessimism and makes room for a renewed faith. In the final scene of The White Bone, Mud has developed enough self-awareness to shed her anxiety about belonging to a family compact and, “out of contrition,” to acknowledge the numerous guises of love (327). And while Mud has had a vision of the Safe Place, “in which she recognized nobody,” she chooses not to “speculate” (327) about this falsely remembered sign. Such visions belong to a system of dubious links, blind faith, and the bitterness of fear. Rather, Mud regularly looks behind her to notice the trace of where her family has been, “the dust raised by their passage rolling out as far as the horizon” (327). This witnessing “of passage” is threatened by the apocalyptic crisis, and is recovered by the sacred confirmation of love.

During an interview with Jana Siciliano, Gowdy asserted that she “didn’t want to write a novel . . . designed to shed light on human folly through animal behaviour. Rather than being a social satire, The White Bone is an attempt, however presumptuous, to make a huge imaginative leap” (Interview). The novel elaborates a thematic rejection of a fixed faith system, one in which unique expressions of fear or grief or love are subsumed within a codified and “unassailable”(104) creed. Thus, the sacred renewal of the elephant families may appear to lose its force if considered as a mere sign for a lesson on human behaviour within the similarly fixed scheme of traditional allegory. In ecocritical terms, Gowdy’s avowed and thematized refutation of allegory communicates her frustration with unthinking anthropomorphism, the human practice of viewing everything in terms of itself; she questions human reluctance to place the animal at the centre of the story. Gowdy, however, does not avoid social satire as completely as she hopes to. In the scene describing Date Bed’s “hallucinations” of elements of the human world, Gowdy envisions an ill-fated elephant making the same sort of “imaginative leap” that she is attempting, representing reciprocally Gowdy’s despair for the “strange, doomed creature” (274) of her human self. In such scenes, the novel’s complex explorations of faith, memory, grief and love emerge explicitly as human concerns. The White Bone’s attempt at animal-centred literature is its crucial and overriding aim. While such an ecocritical novel is possible, the form seems quite limiting, Gowdy’s own declarations notwithstanding. As an instance of postmodern allegory, which inevitably and ultimately gestures towards the human, The White Bone enlarges its aims. The novel explicitly and convincingly solicits the reader to allow the elephants to bear witness, to regard suffering humbly as no less horrific for being alien. More implicit, and to my mind more significant, is the challenge to cultivate reciprocal awareness. Mud’s witnessing of “the dust raised by [her family’s] passage” (327), described in the last scene of the novel, models for Gowdy’s reader the human imperative to examine similarly the consequences of earthly passage, to acknowledge, for example, that “grief” and “faith” and “love” are human terms describing the often violent collisions among consciousness, body, and world. Though a postmodern rupture between human and animal persists, that rupture does not excuse a relativist setting aside of the unintelligible. Rather, attention to mutual unintelligibility, as rendered in The White Bone, becomes a site of reciprocity; that we can only know Mud’s “love” as “likehuman love” compounds the term as symbolic, unfixed, and still imminent.

NOTES

1 Gowdy’s manipulation of Judeo-Christian myth chiefly includes her inversion of the stories of Genesis. For example, humans are represented, not as the acme of the natural order, but as diminutions of higher creatures (7); the world is almost destroyed, not by a flood, but by drought (43).

2 The term “allegoresis” is most commonly associated with medieval literature, referring to the process of interpreting texts allegorically. As J. Stephen Russell notes, “In the Middle Ages, allegory was not a mode of writing; it was the self-conscious recognition of the way we perforce see the world, replace any thing with words or other signs”(xi). Here, I am using the term to specify Tall Time’s propensity to impose meaning onto the objects in his world, to transform everything into a sign.

3 Stevens is here referring to essays by Ruether, Rita Nakashima Brock, Jacquelyn Grant, and Eleanor McLaughlin.

4 Gerald O’Collins states that the “branch of theology called Christology reflects systematically on the person, being, and doings of Jesus of Nazareth” (i). I am interested in Christology’s focus on identifying the features of the Christ symbol, especially as those features are associated with a particular ideological framework.

5 To\rrent explains to Tall Time that even the We-Fs have not seen the white bone directly, but that rather their “ancestors” have (70).

6 Such is the case when Date Bed comes to depend unreasonably on the Thing (a car’s side-mirror that is a fragment of one of the instruments of her species’ destruction).

WORKS CITED

Benjamin, Walter. The Origin of German Tragic Drama. Trans. John Orborne. London: NLB,1977.

Boxer, Sarah. “Her Name is Mud.” Rev. of The White Bone, by Barbara Gowdy. New York Times Book Review 16 May 1999: 7-8.

Bush, Catherine. “Pachyderms’ Progress.” Rev. of The White Bone, by Barbara Gowdy. The Globe & Mail 5 Sep. 1998: Di.

de Man, Paul. Allegories of Reading. New Haven: Yale UP, 1979.

__. Blindness and Insight. 2nd edition. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1983.

Edmond, Judy. Rev. of The White Bone, by Barbara Gowdy. Winnipeg Free Press 27 Sep. 1998: D3.

Felman, Shoshana & Dori Laub. Testimony. New York: Routledge UP, 1992.

Gowdy, Barbara. The White Bone. Toronto: Harper, 1998.

James, William Closson. Locations of the Sacred. Waterloo: Wilfrid Laurier UP, 1998.

Madsen, Deborah. Rereading Allegory: A Narrative Approach to Genre. New York: St. Martin’s, 1994.

O’Collins, Gerald. Christology: A Biblical, Historical, and Systematic Study of Jesus. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1995.

Owens, Craig. “The Allegorical Impulse: Toward a Theory of Postmodernism.” Art After Modernism. Ed. Brian Wallis. New York: New Museum of Contemporary Art, 1984. 203-35.

Richardson, Bill. Rev. of The White Bone, by Barbara Gowdy. Quill & Quire Oct. 1998: 35.

Ruether, Rosemary Radford. To Change the World. New York: Crossroad Publishing, 1981.

Russel, J. Stephens, ed. Allegoresis: The Craft of Allegory in Medieval Literature. New York: Garland, 1988.

Smith, Paul. “The Will to Allegory in Postmodernism.” Dalhousie Review 62 (1982) 105-22.

Stevens, Maryanne, ed. Reconstructing the Christ Symbol. New York: Paulist P, 1993.

Walters, Margaret. “Hiding from the Hindleggers.” Rev. of The White Bone, by Barbara Gowdy. Times Literary Supplement 14 May 1999: 22.

Copyright University of British Columbia Summer 2005